WELCOME TO BMW.
Owner's Manual.
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with the vehicle, the better control you will have
on the road. We therefore strongly suggest the following:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also
use the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. It contains important
notes on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical
features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information de-
signed to enhance operating reliability and traffic safety, and to contribute
to maintaining the value of your BMW.
At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the
most current resource. After a vehicle software update – such as a Re-
mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle
will contain the latest information.
You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the
onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
3
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
After a vehicle software update – such as a Remote Software Upgrade
– the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest
information.
NOTES
Information ........................................................................................................... 6
QUICK REFERENCE
Getting in ............................................................................................................. 16
Set-up and use ................................................................................................... 19
On the road ......................................................................................................... 23
CONTROLS
Dashboard .......................................................................................................... 30
Sensors of the vehicle ....................................................................................... 35
Operating condition of the vehicle .................................................................. 40
BMW iDrive ......................................................................................................... 43
BMW Remote Software Upgrade ................................................................... 58
Personal settings ............................................................................................... 62
Opening and closing ......................................................................................... 69
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel ................................................................. 99
Transporting children safely ........................................................................... 113
Driving ................................................................................................................ 118
Displays ............................................................................................................. 135
Lights ................................................................................................................. 156
Safety ................................................................................................................. 165
Driving stability control systems .................................................................... 194
Driver assistance systems ............................................................................. 198
Parking .............................................................................................................. 223
Driving comfort ................................................................................................ 243
Climate control ................................................................................................. 244
Interior equipment ........................................................................................... 256
Storage compartments .................................................................................. 262
Cargo area ........................................................................................................ 266
4
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ............................................................... 270
Saving fuel ........................................................................................................ 276
MOBILITY
Refueling ........................................................................................................... 282
Wheels and tires .............................................................................................. 284
Engine compartment ....................................................................................... 315
Operating materials ......................................................................................... 318
Maintenance .................................................................................................... 325
Replacing components ................................................................................... 327
Breakdown Assistance ................................................................................... 331
Vehicle Care ..................................................................................................... 338
REFERENCE
Technical data ................................................................................................. 344
Appendix .......................................................................................................... 346
Everything from A to Z ................................................................................... 348
© 2023 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID8 II/23, -
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic-
ular topic is by using the index.
For an overview of the vehicle, we recommend
reading the quick reference guide in the own-
er’s manual.
Validity of the Owner's Manual
Production of the vehicle
At the time of production at the plant, the
printed Owner's Manual is the most current
resource. Due to updates after the editorial
deadline, differences may exist between the
printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen-
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi-
cle.
After a software update in the vehicle
After a vehicle software update, such as via
Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated
Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the
latest information.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication is available as a
printed book from an authorized service cen-
ter.
The topics are also discussed in the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Media at a glance
General information
The contents of the Owner's Manual are avail-
able in various media formats. The following
Owner's Manual media formats are available:
▷ Printed Owner's Manual.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Printed Owner's Manual
The printed Owner's Manual shows all stand-
ard, country-specific and optional equipment
that is currently available, or may become
available in the future, for specific models.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle
Principle
The Integrated Owner's Manual shows all
standard, country-specific and optional equip-
ment that is currently available, or may be-
come available in the future, for specific mod-
els. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be
displayed on the control display.
Selecting the Owner's Manual
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select the desired method of accessing the
contents.
Scrolling through the Owner's Manual
Swipe up or down until the next or previous
contents are displayed.
Seite 6
NOTES
Information
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Context help
General information
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be ac-
cessed from any menu. Depending on the
selected function, either the associated de-
scription or the main menu of the Integrated
Owner's Manual will be displayed.
Selecting context help from a menu
1. Press and hold the desired menu item.
2. "General help"
Selecting context help from a Check Control
message
Directly from the Check Control message on
the control display:
"Owner's Manual"
Supplementary Owner's Manuals
Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Man-
uals, which are included in addition to the on-
board literature.
Additional sources of
information
Service center
An authorized service center, e.g., a BMW
dealer or BMW service center, will be happy
to answer your questions at any time.
Internet
Vehicle information and general information on
BMW, such as on technology, are available on
the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
BMW Driver’s Guide app
The BMW Driver's Guide app shows all stand-
ard, country-specific, and optional equipment
that is currently available, or may become
available in the future, for specific models. The
app can be displayed on smartphones and
tablets.
BMW Driver’s Guide Web
The BMW Driver's Guide website shows all
standard, country-specific, and optional equip-
ment that is currently available, or may be-
come available in the future, for specific mod-
els. The BMW Driver’s Guide Web can be
displayed in any current browser.
Icons and displays
Icons in the Owner's Manual
Icon Meaning
Precautions that must be followed in
order to avoid the possibility of injury
to yourself and to others as well as
serious damage to the vehicle.
Measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
"..." Texts in vehicle used to select
individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the
voice activation system.
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice
activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
a numbered list. These steps must be carried
out in the order shown.
1.
First action step.
2. Second action step.
Bulletpoint lists
Items or actions without strict order or alterna-
tive options are shown as a bulletpoint list.
Seite 7
Information
NOTES
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Icons on vehicle parts
This symbol on a vehicle component
indicates that further information on the
component is available in the Owner's Manual.
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual shows all standard,
country-specific, and optional equipment that
is currently available, or may become available
in the future, for specific models, i.e., model
series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also
describes and illustrates equipment, systems
and functions that are not available in a vehi-
cle, for example due to the following situations:
▷ Selected optional equipment
▷ National-market version or national-market
equipment
▷ Options for later release and software up-
date
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
Before starting a journey, verify whether the
described equipment or function is available
in the vehicle. For information on whether a
function is currently available in the vehicle or
when the function can be installed in the ve-
hicle, contact an authorized service center or
other qualified service center.
A claim for the availability of equipment, a sys-
tem or a function in the vehicle cannot be de-
rived based on the description in the Owner's
Manual.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob-
served.
For any equipment and models not described
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple-
mentary Owner's Manuals.
An authorized service center is happy to an-
swer any questions that you may have about
the features and options applicable to the vehi-
cle.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of the vehicle pursues a pol-
icy of constant development to ensure that our
vehicles continue to embody the highest qual-
ity and safety standards. In rare cases, there-
fore, the features described in this Owner's
Manual may deviate from those in the vehicle.
Validity of the Owner's Manual
Production of the vehicle
At the time of production at the plant, the
printed Owner's Manual is the most current
resource. Due to updates after the editorial
deadline, differences may exist between the
printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen-
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi-
cle.
After a software update in the vehicle
After a vehicle software update, such as via
Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated
Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the
latest information.
For Your Own Safety
Intended use
Heed the following when using the vehicle:
Seite 8
NOTES
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where
the vehicle is driven.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu-
ments.
Warranty
The vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require-
ments applicable in the country of first delivery,
also known as homologation. If the vehicle is
to be operated in a different country it might
be necessary to adapt the vehicle to potentially
differing operating conditions and registration
requirements. Noncompliance with homologa-
tion requirements in a certain country may
affect warranty coverage. Please consult the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Booklet for fur-
ther information on warranty matters.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, for instance the use of
modern materials and high-performance elec-
tronics, requires suitable maintenance and re-
pair work.
The vehicle manufacturer therefore recom-
mends having necessary work performed by
an authorized service center, e.g., a BMW
dealer or service center. If a different repair
shop is selected, BMW recommends select-
ing a workshop that performs the appropriate
work such as maintenance and repair accord-
ing to BMW specifications with properly trained
personnel. In the Owner's Manual, such works
are referred to as "another qualified authorized
service center or repair shop".
If work is not carried out properly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub-
sequent damages and related safety risks.
Improperly performed work on the vehicle
paintwork can lead to a failure or fault of com-
ponents, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby
result in a safety hazard.
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends the use of parts and acces-
sory products approved by BMW.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice
on their use and installation are available from
an authorized service center.
BMW parts and accessories have been tested
by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
vehicles.
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces-
sories.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individ-
ual product from another manufacturer can be
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
whether these products are suitable for BMW
vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
For vehicles sold in California, the law requires
vehicle manufacturers to provide the following
warning:
Warning
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au-
tomobile components and parts, including
components found in the interior furnishings
in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear con-
tain or emit chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects or other reproductive harm. Battery
posts, terminals and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Batteries also
contain other chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer. Wash your
hands after handling. Used engine oil con-
Seite 9
Information
NOTES
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
tains chemicals that have caused cancer in
laboratory animals. Always protect your skin
by washing thoroughly with soap and water.
For more information go to www.P65Warn-
ings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Warning
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
senger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including en-
gine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. To minimize ex-
posure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle
the engine except as necessary, service the
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear
gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing the vehicle. For more information
go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
vehicle.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. The vehicle is covered by the fol-
lowing warranties:
▷
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War-
ranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties
is listed in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Booklet.
The vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con-
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de-
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate the vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt the vehi-
cle to meet different prevailing operating con-
ditions and homologation requirements. You
should also be aware of any applicable war-
ranty limitations or exclusions for such country
or region. In such case, please contact Cus-
tomer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for maintenance measures:
▷ BMW maintenance system.
Maintenance, refer to page 325.
▷ Maintenance Booklet, available online and
accessible via a QR code in the New Vehi-
cle Limited Warranty Booklet.
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models.
If the vehicle is not maintained or is improperly
maintained, this could result in serious dam-
age to the vehicle.
A failure to maintain the vehicle or improper
maintenance may affect your warranty cover-
age. Please consult the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty Booklet for further information on
warranty matters.
Refer to section on engine oil change re-
garding recommended service intervals for oil
changes.
Data memory
General information
Electronic control devices are installed in the
vehicle. Electronic control units process data
they receive from vehicle sensors, self-gener-
ate or exchange with each other. Some con-
trol units are necessary for the vehicle to func-
tion safely or provide assistance during driving,
Seite 10
NOTES
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
for instance driver assistance systems. Fur-
thermore, control units facilitate comfort or in-
fotainment functions.
Information about stored or exchanged data
can be requested from the manufacturer of the
vehicle, in a separate booklet, for example.
Personal reference
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle
identification number. Depending on the coun-
try, the vehicle owner can be identified with the
vehicle identification number, license plate and
corresponding authorities. In addition, there
are other options to track data collected in the
vehicle to the driver or vehicle owner, such as
via the ConnectedDrive account that is used.
Operating data in the vehicle
Control units process data to operate the vehi-
cle.
For example, this includes:
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its
individual components, e.g., wheel RPM,
wheel speed, deceleration, lateral accelera-
tion, engaged seat belt indicator.
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain
sensor signals.
The processed data is only processed in the
vehicle itself while the vehicle is being oper-
ated. Data is not stored beyond the operating
time.
Electronic components, e.g. control units and
vehicle keys, contain components for storing
technical information. Information about the
vehicle condition, component usage, mainte-
nance recommendations, events or faults can
be stored temporarily or permanently.
This information generally documents the
state of a component, a module, a system, or
the surrounding area, for instance:
▷
Operating states of system components,
such as fill levels, tire pressure, battery sta-
tus.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys-
tem components, for instance lights and
brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special driving
situations such as airbag deployment or
engagement of the driving stability control
systems.
▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
The data is required to perform the control unit
functions. Furthermore, it also serves to detect
and correct malfunctions, and helps the vehicle
manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.
The majority of this data is stored temporarily
and is only processed within the vehicle itself.
In some circumstances the vehicle may store
some data for an additional but limited period
of time.
When servicing, for instance during repairs,
service processes, warranty cases, and quality
assurance measures, this technical informa-
tion can be read out from the vehicle together
with the vehicle identification number.
An authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop can read
out the information. The diagnostic socket re-
quired by law in the vehicle is used to read out
data.
The data is collected, processed, and used
by the relevant organizations in the service
network. The data documents technical condi-
tions of the vehicle, which can be used to de-
termine vehicle maintenance status, and facili-
tate quality improvement.
Vehicle fault and event memories can be re-
set by an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop when
performing repair or servicing work.
Seite 11
Information
NOTES
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Data entry and data transfer into
the vehicle
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort
and individual settings can be stored in the
vehicle and modified or reset at any time.
For example, this includes:
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel
positions.
▷ Chassis and climate control settings.
If necessary, data can be transferred to the en-
tertainment and communication system of the
vehicle, for instance via smartphone.
This includes the following depending on the
respective equipment:
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or
photos for playback in an integrated multi-
media system.
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction
with an integrated hands-free system or an
integrated navigation system.
▷ Entered navigation destinations.
▷ Data on the use of Internet services.
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or
is found on a device that has been connected
to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle,
it can be deleted at any time.
This data is only transmitted to third parties
upon personal request as part of the use of on-
line services. The transmission depends on the
selected settings for the use of the services.
Incorporation of mobile devices
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile
devices connected to the vehicle, for instance
smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
control elements.
The sound and picture from the mobile devi-
ces can be played back and displayed through
the multimedia system. Certain information is
transferred to the mobile devices at the same
time. Depending on the type of incorporation,
this includes, for instance, position data and
other general vehicle information. This opti-
mizes the way in which selected apps, for in-
stance navigation or music playback, work.
There is no further interaction between the
mobile device and the vehicle, such as active
access to vehicle data.
How the data will be processed further is de-
termined by the provider of the particular app
being used. The extent of the possible settings
depends on the respective app and the operat-
ing system of the mobile device.
Services
General information
If the vehicle has a wireless network connec-
tion, it will enable data to be exchanged be-
tween the vehicle and other systems. The
wireless network connection is realized via an
in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via
personal mobile devices brought into the ve-
hicle, for instance smartphones. This wireless
network connection enables 'online functions'
to be used. These include online services and
apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or
by other providers.
Services from the vehicle manufacturer
Where online services from the vehicle man-
ufacturer are concerned, the corresponding
functions are described in the appropriate
place, for instance the Owner's Manual or
manufacturer's web page. The relevant legal
information pertaining to data protection may
also be found on the manufacturer’s website.
Personal data may be used to perform online
services. Data is exchanged over a secure con-
nection, for instance with the IT systems of the
vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose.
Any collection, processing, and use of personal
data above and beyond that needed to pro-
vide the services must always be based on a
Seite 12
NOTES
Information
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
legal permission, contractual arrangement or
consent. It is also possible to activate or deac-
tivate the data connection as a whole. This ex-
cludes functions and services required by law
such as Assist systems.
Services from other providers
When using online services from other provid-
ers, these services are the responsibility of the
relevant provider and subject to their data pri-
vacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle
manufacturer has no influence on the content
exchanged during this process. Information on
the way in which personal data is collected and
used in relation to services from third parties,
the scope of such data, and its purpose, can
be obtained from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-
like situations, such as an air bag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will as-
sist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time, typically
30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷
How various systems in the vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
seat belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better un-
derstanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by the vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re-
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data, for instance name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac-
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve-
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification
number
General information
Depending on the national-market equipment,
the vehicle identification number is located in
different positions in the vehicle. This chapter
describes all possible positions for the series.
Engine compartment
The engraved vehicle identification number
can be found in the engine compartment, on
the right-hand side of the vehicle.
Seite 13
Information
NOTES
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Right nameplate
The vehicle identification number can be found
on the nameplate, on the right-hand side of
the vehicle.
Left nameplate
The vehicle identification number can be found
on the nameplate, on the left-hand side of the
vehicle.
Windshield
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
iDrive
It is also possible to display the vehicle identifi-
cation number via iDrive.
1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Vehicle ID (VIN):"
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that the vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in-
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying BMW
of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West-
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De-
Seite 14
NOTES
Information
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Getting in
Opening and closing
Vehicle key
Buttons on the vehicle key.
Icon Meaning
Unlock.
Lock.
Stationary climate control.
Open the cargo area.
Panic mode.
Pathway lighting.
Access to vehicle interior
Unlocking with the vehicle key
Press the button on the vehicle key.
If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have
been unlocked due to the settings in place,
press the button on the vehicle key again to
unlock the other vehicle access points.
After opening one of the front doors, the vehi-
cle is ready for operation.
Locking with the vehicle key
1. Close the driver's door.
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.
All vehicle access points are locked.
Buttons for the central locking
system
Overview
The central locking buttons are located on the
front door.
Lock.
Unlock.
Locking the vehicle
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button.
Seite 16
QUICK REFERENCE
Getting in
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the vehi-
cle key three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Access to the cargo area
Opening the cargo area
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-
ton on the trunk.
▷ Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors
may be unlocked.
Closing the cargo area manually
Depending on the equipment: pull down the
trunk lid with the recessed grips.
Closing the cargo area automatically
Depending on the equipment:
Press the button on the inside of the cargo
area.
Displays, control elements
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Light switch
2 Turn signal indicator, high beams
3 Instrument cluster
4 Wipers
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator/warning lights can illuminate in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and illuminate temporarily when
drive-ready state is turned on.
Seite 17
Getting in
QUICK REFERENCE
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Driver's door
Switch console
BMW iDrive
Principle
BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and oper-
ating concept and includes a wide range of
functions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Call up the main menu.
Call up the Media/Radio menu.
Go to Phone menu.
Call up the navigation map.
Call up the destination input menu
for navigation.
Go to previous menu.
Call up the Options menu.
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant
Principle
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a
personal assistant that enables natural voice
operation of various vehicle functions.
Activating the voice control system
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel briefly.
2. Say the command.
Canceling voice control
▷ Press the button on the steering
wheel again.
▷ ›Cancel‹
▷ Slide the Controller to the right or left.
▷ Press the Controller.
Seite 18
QUICK REFERENCE
Getting in
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Set-up and use
Seats, mirrors and steering
wheel
Manually adjustable seats
1 Longitudinal direction
2 Thigh support
3 Seat tilt
4 Backrest width
5 Lumbar support
6 Height
7 Backrest tilt
Electrically adjustable seats
1
Backrest width
2 Height/longitudinal direction/seat tilt
3 Head restraint/backrest tilt
4 Lumbar support
Adjusting the head restraint
Adjusting the height: manual head
restraints
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Adjusting the height: electrical head
restraints
Press switch up or down.
Seite 19
Set-up and use
QUICK REFERENCE
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Adjusting the distance
▷ Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
front.
After setting the distance, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Adjusting distance: M sport seat
The distance to the back of the head is ad-
justed via the backrest inclination.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Icon
Meaning
Fold the exterior mirror in and out.
Adjust the exterior mirrors.
Select exterior mirror, Automatic Curb
Monitor.
Adjusting the steering wheel
position
1. Fold the lever down completely.
2. Grip the steering wheel with both hands
and move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seat posi-
tion.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Memory function
Principle
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-
tion:
▷
Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror adjustment.
▷ Height of the Head-up display.
Overview
The memory buttons are located on the front
doors.
Seite 20
QUICK REFERENCE
Set-up and use
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Storing settings
1. Set the desired position.
2. Press the button. The LED illumi-
nates.
3. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
while the LED is illuminated. A signal
sounds.
Calling up settings
Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.
Entering the rear
Manual longitudinal setting
Fold the seat backrest forward
1.
Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold the seat backrest forward.
3. Push the seat forward.
Push the seat backrest rearward
1.
Push the seat back into the initial position.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
Electric longitudinal setting
Fold the seat backrest forward
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold the seat backrest forward.
To make the entry to the rear easier, the seat
will automatically move to the most forward
position.
The process will be terminated when the
switch for the forward/back direction adjust-
ment is pressed or the backrest is reclined.
Push the seat backrest rearward
Push the seat backrest rearward and lock it.
The seat moves automatically to the last seat
position that was stored.
Infotainment
Navigation destination input
1.
Navigation menu
2. "Destination input"
A search box and entered information such
as the search history are displayed.
3. Select the desired entry or the search box.
4. When selecting the search box, enter char-
acters or choose one of the POI categories
displayed.
If necessary, select to display more
information, e.g. to preview a map.
Seite 21
Set-up and use
QUICK REFERENCE
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Apply the suggested search keywords as
necessary
5. Select the desired entry.
6. "Start guidance"
Entertainment
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the instrument panel has the
following buttons.
Button Function
Turn the button to adjust the
volume.
Press the button to switch off
the sound output. Pressing the
button again restores the pre-
vious volume setting.
Change the entertainment
source.
Press once: changes the sta-
tion/track.
Press and hold: fast for-
ward/rewind the track.
Using the mobile phone
General information
After the mobile phone is connected once to
the vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated
using iDrive and the steering wheel buttons.
Activate Bluetooth® on the mobile phone.
Connecting via Bluetooth®
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
Mobile phones in range are displayed on
the control display.
5. Select the desired mobile phone.
6. Compare the control number displayed on
the control display with the control number
in the display of the mobile phone, and con-
firm that they match.
7. If necessary, select the connection mode:
"Use Bluetooth"
The device is connected and displayed in the
device list.
Accepting a call
Depending on the equipment, incoming calls
can be answered in several ways.
▷ Via iDrive:
"Accept"
▷
Press the button on the steering wheel.
▷ Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel
to select from the list in the instrument clus-
ter: "Accept"
Dialing a number
1.
Communication menu
2. "More"
3. "Dial number"
4. Enter the numbers.
5. Select the icon. The connection is es-
tablished via the mobile phone to which this
function has been assigned.
Seite 22
QUICK REFERENCE
Set-up and use
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
On the road
Driving
Drive-ready state
Turning on the drive-ready state
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Turning off drive-ready state
1.
Apply brake and engage the selector lever
in position P.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The READY indicator goes out and a signal
tone sounds.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.
The engine starts automatically under the fol-
lowing preconditions:
▷
By releasing the brake pedal.
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on
the accelerator pedal.
Steptronic transmission
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R, S
▷ D is drive.
▷ N is neutral.
▷ Reverse R.
▷ S Sport mode.
To prevent the vehicle from moving after en-
gaging drive or reverse, maintain pressure on
the brake pedal until you are ready to drive off.
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Sport program: the gearshift behavior is de-
signed for a sportier driving behavior.
Engaging selector lever position P
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Press button P.
Seite 23
On the road
QUICK REFERENCE
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Parking brake
Setting the parking brake
Pull the switch.
The LED on the switch and the indica-
tor light in the instrument cluster are
illuminated.
Releasing the parking brake
With drive-ready state switched on:
Press the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P
is set.
The LED and the indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Parking
Make sure the parking brake is engaged.
Light and view
Turn signal, high beams, headlight
flasher
Turn signal
▷ Flashing: press the lever past the resist-
ance point.
▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the
lever up or down.
▷ Brief flashing: press the lever to the resist-
ance point and hold it there for as long as
you want the turn signal to flashing.
High beams, headlight flasher
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷
High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams illuminate when the low
beams are switched on.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Seite 24
QUICK REFERENCE
On the road
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Lights and lighting
Buttons in the vehicle
Icon Function
Front fog lights
Exterior lighting off.
Daytime driving lights.
Parking lights.
Automatic headlight control.
Adaptive lighting functions.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
Window wiper system
Turning on window wiper system
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷
Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Rain sensor, position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
Turning off the window wiper system
and flick wipe
Press the lever down.
▷ Turning off: press the lever down until it
reaches the 0 position.
▷ Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0
position.
The lever automatically returns to its 0 po-
sition when released.
Activating/deactivating rain sensor
Enable: press lever up once from the 0 posi-
tion, arrow 1.
Disable: press lever back into the 0 position.
Seite 25
On the road
QUICK REFERENCE
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
Climate control
Climate control functions
Functions in the Climate menu
Icon
Function
Automatic program.
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
Icon Function
Maximum cooling.
Air recirculation mode.
Automatic recirculated-air con-
trol.
Fresh air.
Air flow.
Air distribution.
SYNC program.
Seat heating.
Active seat ventilation.
Buttons, automatic climate control
Seite 26
QUICK REFERENCE
On the road
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Icon Function
Defrost function.
Rear window defroster.
Buttons, rear automatic climate control
Icon Function
Automatic program.
Temperature.
Air distribution.
Switching off.
Intermediate stop
Refueling
Fuel cap
1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Seite 27
On the road
QUICK REFERENCE
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Wheels and tires
Tire pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure specifications can be
found in the tire inflation pressure table in the
printed Owner's Manual.
After correcting the tire pressure
If equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor, the
corrected tire pressures are applied automati-
cally. Make sure that the correct tire settings
have been made. With tires that cannot be
found in the tire pressure values on the control
display, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM).
If equipped with a flat tire monitor, reinitialize
the flat tire monitor.
Checking the tire pressure
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and
correct it as needed:
▷ At least twice a month.
▷ Before embarking on an extended trip.
Cleaning the wheels
The friction during hard braking may produce
brake dust and make the rims dirty. Brake dust
can be removed by cleaning the rims. BMW
recommends using vehicle care and cleaning
agents from BMW.
Electronic oil measurement
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after ap-
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving with the
combustion engine running.
Displaying the engine oil level
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
Adding engine oil
General information
Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-
ready state before adding engine oil.
Adding engine oil
1. Opening the hood.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
4. Close the lid.
Providing assistance
Hazard warning system
Hazard warning system button
Seite 28
QUICK REFERENCE
On the road
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
ConnectedDrive
BMW Assistance
Contact BMW Assistance for information and
support for all aspects of the vehicle.
1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "BMW Assistance"
4. Select the desired service.
Follow the displays on the control display.
A voice connection is established.
BMW Teleservices
Teleservices are services that help to maintain
vehicle mobility.
Teleservices can comprise the following serv-
ices:
▷ BMW Roadside Assistance.
▷ BMW Accident Assistance.
▷ Teleservice Call.
▷ Your authorized service center.
Seite 29
On the road
QUICK REFERENCE
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Dashboard
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows, individual 93
2 Seating comfort features
Memory function 111
3 Exterior mirror adjustment button 108
4 Central locking system 88
Unlocking
Locking
5 Lights
Front fog lights 162
Light switch 156
Seite 30
CONTROLS
Dashboard
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Exterior lights off
Daytime driving lights 159
Parking lights 157
Automatic headlight control 156
Adaptive lighting functions 159
Automatic High Beam Assistant
160
Low beams 157
Instrument lighting 162
Right roadside parking light 157
Left roadside parking light 157
6 Pitman arm, left
Turn signal 130
High beams, headlight flasher
130
Automatic High Beam Assistant
160
Trip data 150
G-Meter 152
7 Shift paddles 123
8 Steering wheel buttons, left
Manual Speed Limiter 200
Depending on the equipment:
Cruise Control on/off 202
Depending on the equipment:
Active Cruise Control on/off 205
With Steering Assistant 215:
Cruise Control, Distance Control
and lane guidance on/off
Cruise Control: store the speed
Speed Limit Assistant: accept
suggested speed 212
Interrupt or continue cruise control
Active Cruise Control: increase
distance
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis-
tance
Cruise Control rocker switch
9 Instrument cluster 135
10 Steering wheel buttons, right
Displaying menu bar in instru-
ment cluster 135
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Voice activation system 51
Selecting menu contents in instru-
ment cluster 135
Changing the station/track, see
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 6
Seite 31
Dashboard
CONTROLS
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Thumbwheel for selecting con-
figuration menus for instrument
cluster and Head-up display 135
Using infotainment selection lists
in the instrument cluster 146
11 Pitman arm, right
Wipers 131
Rain sensor 132
Cleaning the windshield 133
12 Horn, entire surface
13 Steering wheel heating 111
14 Adjusting the steering wheel 110
15 Unlocking the hood 316
16 Opening and closing cargo area
81
17 Fold-out compartment 263
Seite 32
CONTROLS
Dashboard
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control display 46
2 Ventilation 251
3 Hazard warning system 331
Climate control 244
Defrost function 250
Rear window defroster 250
Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communi-
cation 6
Adjusting the volume
Station/title forward
Station/title back
4 Button for glove compartment 262
5 Controller with buttons 48
6 Automatic Hold 128
Parking brake 127
7 Driving Dynamics Control 125
SPORT drive mode
COMFORT drive mode
ECO PRO drive mode
8 Turning drive-ready state on/off
118
Seite 33
Dashboard
CONTROLS
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
9 Auto Start/Stop function 118
Parking assistance systems 223
Panorama view 230
Dynamic Stability Control 195
10 Selector lever 120
In the vicinity of the headliner
1 Emergency Call, SOS 333
2 Operating the electric glass sun-
roof 95
3 Indicator light, front passenger
airbag 167
4 Reading lights 163
5 Interior lights 163
Seite 34
CONTROLS
Dashboard
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Sensors of the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Overview
Depending on the equipment, the following
cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi-
cle:
▷ Front camera.
▷ Camera behind the windshield.
▷ Top view cameras.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Front radar sensor.
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
Cameras
Front camera
The front camera is located in the radiator
grille.
Camera behind the windshield
The camera behind the windshield is located
near the interior mirror.
Seite 35
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Top view cameras
One exterior mirror camera is located at the
bottom of each exterior mirror housing.
Rearview camera
The rearview camera is located in the emblem
on the rear end.
Functional requirement of the
cameras
The areas of the cameras are clean and clear.
Additional information:
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 338.
▷ Vehicle care, refer to page 339.
System limits of the cameras
The function of the cameras can be limited or
may indicate something wrong, for instance in
the following situations:
▷
In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
▷ When the camera field of view is covered,
for instance by a fogged up windshield or
labels.
▷ If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
▷ With open doors or open cargo area.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections, e.g., because of a setting sun.
▷ When it is dark outside.
▷ The camera has overheated due to exces-
sive temperatures and temporarily turned
off.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi-
ately after vehicle delivery.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
Radar sensors
Safety information
Warning
The vehicle radar sensors and thus also the
driver assistance systems can be impaired by
external influences, e.g., interference. There
is a risk of accident. Watch the surrounding
traffic situation closely, be ready to take over
steering and braking at any time, and actively
intervene where appropriate.
Seite 36
CONTROLS
Sensors of the vehicle
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Front radar sensor
The front radar sensor is located in the front
bumper.
Radar sensors, side, front
The radar sensors are located to the side in
the front bumper.
Radar sensors, side, rear
The radar sensors are located on the side in
the rear bumper.
Functional requirement of the radar
sensors
The areas of the radar sensors are clean and
clear.
Additional information:
▷ Washing the vehicle, refer to page 338.
▷ Vehicle care, refer to page 339.
System limits of the radar sensors
The function of the radar sensors can be lim-
ited or not available, for instance in the follow-
ing situations:
▷ In case of dirty sensors.
▷ In case of iced-up sensors.
▷ If sensors are covered, such as by labels,
films or a license-plate carrier.
▷ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-
stance due to parking damage.
▷ If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.
▷ When the field of view of the sensors is cov-
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow
hills, vehicles or trailers.
▷ After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
▷ On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the
road.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
Seite 37
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Ultrasonic sensors
Ultrasonic sensors, front
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-
tance systems are located in the front bumper.
Ultrasonic sensors, rear
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-
tance systems are located in the rear bumper.
Ultrasonic sensors, side
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-
tance systems are located on the side in the
front and rear bumpers.
Functional requirement of the
ultrasonic sensors
The areas of the ultrasonic sensors are clean
and clear.
Additional information:
▷ Washing the vehicle, refer to page 338.
▷ Vehicle care, refer to page 339.
System limits of the ultrasonic
sensors
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in
the following situations:
▷ If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by
stickers.
▷ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-
stance due to parking damage.
▷ After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in-
stance jacket.
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
▷ In case of external interference with the
ultrasonics, for instance from passing ve-
hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic
sources.
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high
moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex-
treme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
Seite 38
CONTROLS
Sensors of the vehicle
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ For objects with a fine surface or objects
such as wire mesh fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can be outside of the detection
ranges of the sensors.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷ With plants and bushes.
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In the event of uneven floors, e.g. speed
bumps.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
ultrasonic sensors.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
Seite 39
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Operating condition of the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
General information
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in
one of the three states:
▷ Idle state.
▷ Standby state.
▷ Drive-ready state.
Idle state
Principle
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched
off.
General information
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening
from the outside and after exiting and locking.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷
Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Establishing the sleep mode
automatically
The sleep mode is established automatically,
such as in the following situations:
▷
After several minutes, if no operation takes
place on the vehicle.
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is
low.
▷ Depending on the configuration via iDrive:
one or both front doors will be opened after
driving when exiting the vehicle.
Seite 40
CONTROLS
Operating condition of the vehicle
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
In some situations, the idle state is not set au-
tomatically, for instance during a phone call or
when the low beams are switched on.
Establishing idle state when
opening the front doors
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established
by opening the front doors. For this purpose,
all passengers must exit the vehicle.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. "Turn off after opening door"
Establishing the sleep mode
manually
To establish idle state in the vehicle after com-
pletion of trip:
Press and hold the button on
the radio until the OFF indicator
on the instrument cluster goes
out.
Standby state
Principle
When standby state is switched on, most func-
tions can be used while the vehicle is station-
ary. Desired settings can be adjusted.
General information
The vehicle is in the standby state after the
front doors are opened from the outside.
Manually setting to standby
General information
Standby can be switched back on after the ve-
hicle is automatically set to idle state.
Via button on the radio
Press the button on the radio.
The control display and the in-
strument cluster illuminate.
Via start/stop button
Press the Start/Stop button. The
control display and the instru-
ment cluster illuminate.
Display in the instrument cluster
OFF is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
switched off and standby state
switched on.
Drive-ready state
Principle
Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to
starting the engine.
General information
Some vehicle functions can only be used with
the drive-ready state switched on.
Seite 41
Operating condition of the vehicle
CONTROLS
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-
trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain
pollutants which are colorless and odorless.
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
NOTICE
Repeated attempts to start the engine or re-
peated starting of the vehicle in rapid suc-
cession can cause the starter to overheat.
This also results in unburned or inadequately
burned fuel, and can cause the catalytic con-
verter to overheat. There is a risk of damage
to property. Avoid repeated starting of the
vehicle, particularly repeated starting in rapid
succession.
Turning on the drive-ready state
General information
Drive-ready state is switched on
via the Start/Stop button.
Turning on the drive-ready state
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-
gine starts.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in-
strument cluster illuminate for a varied length
of time.
Gasoline engine
Depending on the motorization, the full drive
power may not be available for approximately
30 seconds after starting the engine. In this
case, the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.
Additional information:
Power gauge, refer to page 147.
Display in the instrument cluster
The activated drive-ready state is indicated
in the instrument cluster, depending on the
equipment, by the display of information re-
quired for driving or the READY display.
Turning off drive-ready state
1.
Engage selector lever position P with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off. The vehicle
switches into standby state.
Seite 42
CONTROLS
Operating condition of the vehicle
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
BMW iDrive
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Display and operating
concept
Principle
BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and oper-
ating concept and includes a wide range of
functions.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions
can be operated as follows:
▷ Via the control display.
▷ Via the Controller.
▷ Via the touchpad.
▷ Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.
▷ Via the operating elements on the steering
wheel.
Additional information:
Instrument cluster, refer to page 135.
Safety information
Warning
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possi-
ble to lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or
devices when the traffic situation allows. As
warranted, stop and use the systems and de-
vices while the vehicle is stationary.
Main menu
General information
The main menu is divided into different areas.
Overview
1 Menu bar
2 Widgets
3 Status information
4 Climate bar, climate 244
Menu bar
Menu Apps
Access to apps and vehicle functions. A
filter can be selected. The last selected filter
is stored. If necessary, change the filter to see
the apps you want.
▷
"All apps": All apps and functions are dis-
played.
▷ "Infotainment apps": Only infotainment
apps are displayed.
▷ "Vehicle apps": Only vehicle adjustment
functions are displayed.
Seite 43
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Media menu
Access to entertainment system functions,
e.g., radio stations or external device pairing.
Communication menu
Access to telephone and message function
as well as pairing and management of mobile
devices, e.g., smartphones.
Navigation menu
Access to navigation system, destination
entry, and traffic information. Configurable
map views and other functions, such as points
of interest.
Apple CarPlay© menu
Depending on national-market version with
associated function: Access to Apple CarPlay.
Apple CarPlay enables the secure use of cer-
tain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone via
iDrive.
Android Auto© menu
Depending on national-market version with
associated function: Access to Android Auto.
Android Auto enables the secure use of certain
functions of a compatible Android smartphone
via iDrive.
Widgets
Widgets show real-time information and dy-
namic content such as the navigation map.
The widgets also serve as buttons and allow
jumping to the relevant menu.
Status information
General information
The status field can be found in the upper area
of the control display. Status information is dis-
played in the form of icons. Depending on the
equipment and national-market version, differ-
ent icons are available.
Telephone status information
Icon Meaning
Active call.
Signal strength.
SIM card missing.
Entertainment status information
Icon Meaning
USB audio.
Bluetooth audio.
Smartphone audio.
Connected Music with Spotify.
Time shift.
Wi-Fi.
Apple CarPlay.
Android Auto.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Status information for notifications
Icon
Meaning
Number of notifications.
Check Control message.
Suppress private information.
Do not disturb.
Notification.
Additional information:
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
Seite 44
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Other status information
Icon Meaning
Sound output active.
Sound output deactivated.
Activation word active.
BMW ID or driver profile.
Destination guidance active.
Go to quick access.
Wireless charging active.
Park Distance Control: sound active.
Park Distance Control: sound deacti-
vated.
Input and display
Letters and numbers
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
controller, touchpad, control display, or voice
control, depending on vehicle equipment.
Icon
Function
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Enter a blank space.
Switching between languages.
Use voice control.
Confirm entry.
Shift the input area to the left
or right.
Entry comparison
When entering data from a database such as
contacts, the selection is gradually narrowed
down for each character entered, with charac-
ters being added as necessary.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Some menu items are preceded by an icon.
Selecting the menu item enables or disables
the function.
Icon Meaning
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Enabling/disabling audible feedback
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Sound"
5. Select the desired setting.
Quick access
The quick link provides access to shortcuts,
certain settings, and app recommendations.
Input Operation
Show
quick link.
Swipe from top to bottom on the
control display.
Slide the controller up.
Tap the icon on the status
bar.
Hide
quick link.
Swipe from the bottom up on the
control display.
Slide the controller down.
Activating/deactivating pop-ups
For some functions, pop-ups are displayed
automatically on the control display. Some of
these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Pop-ups"
5. Select the desired setting.
Seite 45
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Shortcuts
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the
shortcuts and called up directly, for instance
radio stations, navigation destinations, phone
numbers and menu entries.
Storing a function
1. Select the desired function.
2. Press and hold the desired function.
3. "Add to shortcuts"
Shortcuts can only be created with an active
BMW ID or a driver profile.
Executing a function
1.
Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display.
2. Tap the desired shortcut.
The function will work immediately. This
means for instance that the connection is es-
tablished when a phone number is selected.
Deleting shortcuts
1.
Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display.
2. Press and hold the desired shortcut.
3. "Delete shortcut"
BMW Curved Display
Principle
The BMW Curved Display is a single-screen
display in the vehicle that is curved towards
the driver. The BMW Curved Display comprises
the instrument cluster on the driver’s side and
the control display on the center console.
General information
Follow instructions for cleaning the BMW
Curved Display in the Care chapter.
Additional information:
Caring for special components, refer to
page 341.
Overview
1 Instrument cluster 135
2 Control display 46
Control display
Principle
The iDrive functions are displayed on the con-
trol display.
Safety information
Warning
Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable,
such as mobile phones or loose objects, can
be thrown through the vehicle interior while
driving, such as in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury. Secure loose objects or devices that
are connected to the vehicle via a cable.
Seite 46
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Warning
Objects in the area in the front of the control
display can slip and damage the control dis-
play. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-
age to property. Do not place objects in the
area in front of the control display.
Overview
Control display
Switching the control display on/off
automatically
The control display is turned on automatically
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the
control display is needed for operation.
In certain situations, the control display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-
eral minutes.
Switching the control display on/off
manually
1.
Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display.
2. "Screen off"
Tap the control display to turn it on again.
Setting the brightness
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Make the desired setting.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright-
ness control may not be clearly visible.
System limits
In the case of very high temperatures on the
control display, for instance due to intense so-
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
down to complete deactivation. Once the
temperature is reduced, for instance through
shade or air conditioning system, the normal
functions are restored.
Controller
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly.
Overview
Controller
Buttons on the Controller
Button
Function
Call up the main menu.
Call up the Media/Radio menu.
Seite 47
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Button Function
Go to Phone menu.
Call up the navigation map.
Call up the destination input menu
for navigation.
Go to previous menu.
Call up the Options menu.
Operation
▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex-
ample.
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example.
▷ Slide in four directions to switch between
menus, for example.
Operating via the Controller
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
Selecting menu items
1.
Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Selecting a widget
1.
Slide the Controller in the main menu to the
right.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget
is selected.
3. Press the Controller.
Switching between menus
A new display opens after a menu item is se-
lected.
▷
Slide the Controller to the left.
The current menu closes and the previous
menu is displayed.
▷ Press the button.
The current menu closes and the previous
menu is displayed.
Seite 48
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Entering letters and numbers
Input
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num-
bers.
2. : confirm entry.
Setting the system language, refer to
page 53.
Deleting an entry
Icon Function
Press Controller: delete a letter or num-
ber.
Hold the Controller down: delete all let-
ters or numbers.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can
be displayed in a text box.
1.
Turn the Controller to the left or right
quickly.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-
played in the list.
Operation via touchpad
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, some iDrive
functions can be operated with the controller
touchpad.
Selecting functions
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Touchpad"
5. Select the desired setting.
Entering letters and numbers
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the control display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
as accents or periods, so that the letter can
be clearly recognized.
▷ The set language determines what input
is possible. Where necessary, enter special
characters via the Controller.
Setting the system language, refer to
page 53.
Entering special characters
Function Operation
Delete a charac-
ter.
Swipe to the left on the
touchpad.
Enter a blank
space.
Swipe to the right in the
center of the touchpad.
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touch-
pad.
Enter an under-
score.
Swipe to the right in the
lower area of the touch-
pad.
Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be
moved via the touchpad.
Tap the map on the control display and then
continue operation using the touchpad.
Function
Operation
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di-
rection.
Display menu. Tap once.
Seite 49
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Using alphabetical lists
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries
permit a direct jump to letters for which an en-
try exists.
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed
in the list.
Operation via control display
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the con-
trol display is equipped with a touchscreen.
You can tap on menu items and widgets.
Touch the control display with your fingers. Do
not use any objects.
Opening the main menu
Tap on the icon.
The main menu is displayed.
Adjusting widgets
The widgets can be adjusted in the main
menu. The adjustments can only be performed
when the vehicle is stationary.
1.
If necessary, tap the icon.
2. Press and hold the widget.
3. Make the desired adjustment:
▷ Tap on the icon.
A new widget can be selected.
▷ Tap on the icon.
The widget is deleted.
▷ Press and hold the widget and drag to
the left or right.
The widget is moved to the desired po-
sition.
Sorting apps
To resort the app icons, press and hold the de-
sired icon and move it to the desired location.
Switching between menus
A new display opens after a menu item is se-
lected.
Swipe from left to right on the control display.
The current menu closes and the previous
menu is displayed.
Calling up the context menu
Depending on the menu item, a context menu
with additional options can be displayed.
Press and hold the desired menu item.
The menu consists of various areas, for in-
stance:
▷ "General help": Go to the Integrated Own-
er's Manual.
▷ "Add to shortcuts": define menu item as
shortcut.
Entering letters and numbers
Input
1.
If necessary, tap the icon or control
display.
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.
Deleting an entry
Icon
Function
Tap icon: delete a letter or a number.
Press and hold the icon: delete all let-
ters or numbers.
Using the map
The navigation map can be moved on the con-
trol display.
Seite 50
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Function Operation
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate
direction.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin-
gers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can
be displayed in a text box.
1.
Tap the letter in front of the list.
A letter box is displayed.
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-
played in the list.
BMW Intelligent Personal
Assistant
Principle
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a
personal assistant that enables natural voice
operation of various vehicle functions. The
Personal Assistant makes it easier to operate
the vehicle by providing proactive suggestions
and automating habits.
General information
▷
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail-
able depending on national-market version.
▷ The system includes special microphones
on the driver side and the front passenger
side.
▷ Say commands at a normal volume.
Speaking directly into the microphone does
not improve voice recognition.
▷ Say the commands and numbers fluently
as well as with normal volume, emphasis,
and speed.
▷ ›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-
ken.
Functional requirements
▷ A language that is supported by the Per-
sonal Assistant must be set via iDrive.
Setting the system language, refer to
page 53.
▷ Always say commands in the configured
system language.
For the full range of functions, the following
functions should be activated, set or booked:
▷ Online speech processing, refer to
page 54.
▷ For all settings under
Data protection, refer to page 62.
▷ Activation word, refer to page 52.
▷ BMW ID or a driver profile.
▷ Relevant ConnectedDrive services from the
ConnectedDrive Store.
▷ Get suggestions, refer to page 54.
Activating the voice control system
General information
There are various methods for activating the
voice control feature:
▷
Press the button on the steering
wheel briefly.
The microphone on the driver's side is ac-
tive.
▷ Speaking the activation word.
The microphones on the driver's or front
passenger's side are active with the follow-
ing voice control, depending on where the
activation word was spoken.
Seite 51
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Then say the command. The activation word
and the command can be spoken without
pause in one sentence.
Microphone button on steering wheel
1. Press button briefly.
2. Say the command.
Activation word
General information
Saying the activation word will start the Per-
sonal Assistant. The Personal Assistant lis-
tens.
Preset activation word
›Hello BMW‹: The default activation word can
be activated and deactivated.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Wake word"
7. ""Hello BMW""
Personal activation word
In addition to the preset activation word, a
personal activation word can be set up with
an active BMW ID or a driver profile. The per-
sonal activation word can also be changed or
deleted.
The activation word should consist of multiple
syllables to ensure good recognition.
›Hello‹: The additional phrase is not necessary
for the activation word and does not need to
be spoken.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Wake word"
7. "Personal wake word"
8. "Set"
9. "Start recording"
Activation word from third-party providers
Depending on the national-market version,
some third-party providers provide digital voice
assistants such as Siri or Amazon Alexa.
To use Siri, the smartphone must be con-
nected via Apple CarPlay.
Supported voice assistants can be used with a
connected smartphone in the vehicle.
The activation word from connected third-
party providers can be used in addition to your
preset or personal activation word from BMW.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Additional speech assistants"
6. Select the desired setting.
Canceling voice control
▷
Press the button on the steering
wheel again.
▷ ›Cancel‹
▷ Slide the Controller to the right or left.
▷ Press the Controller.
Possible commands
General information
Commands can be used to give instructions
or ask questions, with the Personal Assistant
providing assistance.
Seite 52
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
For example, you can call contacts, navigate
to an address, apply settings, or ask questions
about a vehicle function.
Most content on the control display can be
spoken as commands, e.g., menu items or list
entries.
Help for voice control
▷ ›Voice commands‹: have possible example
commands suggested.
▷ ›General information on voice control‹: have
information on the operating principle of the
voice control announced.
▷ ›Help‹: have tips and example commands
for voice control announced.
▷ Additional example commands for the cur-
rent context are displayed in the widget of
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.
Sample commands
▷ ›Call John Smith‹
▷ ›Drive me to JFK airport‹
▷ ›Play a classical music station‹
▷ ›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹
▷ ›Activate the climate control‹
▷ ›Increase the ACC distance‹
▷ ›Sport mode‹
Additional example commands can be dis-
played on the control display.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Personal assistant"
4. "Help"
5. "Example commands"
Sample commands for the current context are
displayed in the BMW Intelligent Personal As-
sistant widget.
Additional information:
Adjust widgets, refer to page 50.
Menu items
The Personal Assistant can bring up menu
items directly. Say the menu items as they are
displayed on the control display. You do not
have to follow the order of the menu items
when speaking them out loud.
1. Activate the voice control system.
2. ›Media‹
3. ›Presets‹
The stored stations are displayed on the
control display.
Owner's Manual via voice operation
You can ask simple questions about vehicle
functions and the operation of the vehicle.
The voice activation system and the feed-
back it provides do not replace the printed
or Integrated Owner's Manual. The function
is available depending on the national-market
version. The speech recognition and quality of
the feedback may vary.
Example command: ›How can the passenger
airbag be deactivated?‹
The Personal Assistant returns feedback.
When stationary, the section of the integrated
Owner's Manual is displayed on the control
display.
Settings
Setting the system language
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Language"
5. Select the desired setting.
Setting the response length
You can set the Personal Assistant to use
standard dialog or a short version. In case of
the short version, the announcements by the
Seite 53
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Personal Assistant are played back in an ab-
breviated version.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Response length"
7. Select the desired setting.
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
Personal Assistant. The function can be dis-
abled if requests are often canceled uninten-
tionally, for instance due to background noise
or conversations in the vehicle.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Speaking during voice output"
Suggestions
General information
The Personal Assistant helps with individual
suggestions.
Activating/deactivating suggestions
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Receive suggestions"
Adapting suggestions
Suggestions can be adapted, for example, by
category or to output a signal tone.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. Select the desired setting.
Online speech processing
Online speech processing improves the quality
of the speech recognition and search results
for points of interest. To use the functions,
data is transmitted to a service provider via an
encrypted connection and stored locally there.
An active ConnectedDrive contract is required
for online voice processing. ConnectedDrive is
available depending on the national-market
version. Online speech processing is not avail-
able in all languages.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Online speech processing"
Voice control from third-party
providers
Depending on vehicle equipment, third-party
voice control can be enabled by pressing and
holding the microphone button on the steering
wheel.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Long press"
6. Select the desired setting.
Seite 54
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the voice guid-
ance until the desired volume is set.
The volume remains constant even if the vol-
ume of other audio sources is changed.
Using the voice activation of the
smartphone
Depending on the device, a smartphone con-
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice
control.
The device must be connected via Apple Car-
Play or Android Auto.
1.
Press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
The voice activation of the smartphone is
activated.
If activation is successful, a confirmation
appears on the control display.
2. Press and hold the button on the
steering wheel to cancel voice control of the
smartphone.
Amazon Alexa Car Integration
Principle
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is available de-
pending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version. Alexa is a digital assistant
from Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Integra-
tion, Alexa can be used in the vehicle. For
safety reasons, some Alexa functions may not
be fully available in the vehicle when driving.
Functional requirement
▷
A BMW ID or driver profile is activated.
▷ An active Amazon account must exist.
Activating Amazon Alexa Car
Integration
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in
the vehicle and My BMW app if necessary.
Follow the instructions from the Amazon Alexa
app to set it up in the vehicle.
1. Apps menu
2. "Amazon Alexa"
After setting it up, use Amazon Alexa in the
vehicle as follows:
Say the activation word "Alexa" and the de-
sired command.
Information about the active function is dis-
played on the control display. If the function
is restricted, reconnect Bluetooth and Wi-Fi as
necessary.
Automating routines
General information
The Personal Assistant can automate routines,
for instance the automatic opening of windows
in the same place. Rules are created for this
purpose, which can be activated and deacti-
vated at any time.
Activating/deactivating routines
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Automate habits"
4. Select the desired setting.
System limits
▷
The Personal Assistant provides informa-
tion about vehicle functions that may not be
installed in the vehicle.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
▷ Certain noises can be detected and may
lead to problems. Keep the doors and win-
dows closed.
Seite 55
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Noises from the front passenger or occu-
pants can impair the system. Avoid making
other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
▷ Major language dialects can cause prob-
lems with the speech recognition feature.
▷ A poor data connection influences the re-
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and
the Search.
Connecting mobile devices
to the vehicle
Principle
Various connection types are available for us-
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec-
tion type to select depends on the mobile de-
vice and the desired function.
General information
Detailed information on the functions and con-
nection types can be found in the following
media in the Owner's Manual under the speci-
fied keyword:
▷
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Printed Owner’s Manual for navigation,
communication and entertainment.
The following information sources can also be
used:
▷ Driver’s Guide app.
▷ Driver’s Guide Web.
Safety information
Warning
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possi-
ble to lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or
devices when the traffic situation allows. As
warranted, stop and use the systems and de-
vices while the vehicle is stationary.
Overview
The following overview shows possible func-
tions and the suitable connection types for
them. The range of functions depends on the
vehicle equipment and the mobile device.
Function Connection type Icon on the con-
trol display
Making calls via the hands-free sys-
tem.
Using phone functions via iDrive.
Keyword: calling via Bluetooth.
Bluetooth.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.
Playing music from a mobile device.
Keyword: audio.
Bluetooth audio.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.
Calling without a mobile phone.
Keyword: calling with the Personal
eSIM.
Personal eSIM.
Keyword: Personal eSIM.
Seite 56
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Function Connection type Icon on the con-
trol display
Data exchange between mobile de-
vice and vehicle.
Wi-Fi.
Keyword: vehicle WLAN.
Use Internet access via the personal
hotspot.
Wi-Fi via personal hotspot.
Keyword: personal hotspot.
Using Apple CarPlay via iDrive and
via voice control.
Keyword: Apple CarPlay preparation.
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and
vehicle Wi-Fi.
Using Android Auto via iDrive and via
voice control.
Keyword: Android Auto preparation.
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and
vehicle Wi-Fi.
Playing music from a USB device.
Keyword: audio.
USB.
Keyword: USB connection.
Additional information:
USB port, refer to page 259.
Seite 57
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
BMW Remote Software
Upgrade
Principle
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-
date the entire software of the vehicle. This
makes new functions, functional enhance-
ments or quality improvements available.
General information
BMW recommends performing the Remote
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes
available.
Safety information
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Functional requirements
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ Cellular network reception.
▷ Consent to transmit the corresponding data
was given in the Data Protection menu.
Additional information:
Data protection, refer to page 62.
Search for an upgrade
Functional requirement
Standby must be turned on to search for a
Remote Software Upgrade.
Automatic search
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in
the background.
Manual search
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Search for upgrades"
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Seite 58
CONTROLS
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Download of an upgrade
Automatic download
If available, the data for a Remote Software
Upgrade is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. No download consent is required.
Via BMW app
If an upgrade is available, information about
the new software version is displayed in the
BMW app.
The data for the upgrade can then be down-
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an
existing WLAN connection.
The data can then be transmitted from the
mobile device to the vehicle.
This transmission method accelerates the
download of the data, for instance in areas
with limited mobile network availability.
1.
Download the upgrade in the BMW app to
the smartphone.
2. Follow the instructions in the BMW app.
3. Establish connection to the vehicle.
▷ iOS: Connect Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.
▷ Android: Connect Bluetooth audio and
Wi-Fi.
The data transfer of the upgrade from the
mobile device to the vehicle occurs in the
background only while driving.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Additional information:
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle,
see Owner’s Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, Communication.
Information about the version
General information
The information about the version contains a
description of the updates included in the Re-
mote Software Upgrade. During the download
and after the installation has been successfully
completed, the information about the version
can be displayed on the control display.
This information is also available in the Con-
nectedDrive customer portal.
Displaying information
Display in the vehicle:
1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5.
▷ Display currently installed version:
"Installed version:"
▷ Display new available version:
"Information on version"
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:
www.bmw-connecteddrive.com.
Installing the upgrade
General information
▷
Installation of the Remote Software Up-
grade may result in the deletion of software
changes, e.g., performance increases not
made by the manufacturer of the vehicle.
▷ Modifications to the electrical system of the
vehicle, for instance to control units, that
have not been made by the vehicle manu-
facturer can lead to an interruption of the
installation.
▷ The installation does not occur until the
consent was given.
▷ The installation may take around 20 mi-
nutes.
▷ The installation cannot be terminated.
Seite 59
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ The vehicle cannot be used during the in-
stallation.
▷ The vehicle can be exited during the instal-
lation.
Prerequisites for the installation
▷ The state of charge of the vehicle battery is
sufficient.
▷ The outside temperature is above
14 ℉/-10 ℃.
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-
tion.
▷ The hazard warning system is turned off.
▷ The selector lever position P is engaged.
▷ The engine is turned off and sufficiently
cooled down.
If applicable, follow the notes for further pre-
requisites on the control display.
If the prerequisites are not met, such as a suffi-
cient vehicle battery charge state, the upgrade
will not be offered for installation.
Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g.,
after longer trips.
Preparing the vehicle
▷
Park the vehicle safely away from the public
road.
▷ Cellular network reception must be ensured
so that a fault message can be sent to the
vehicle manufacturer, for instance if the in-
stallation is terminated.
▷ Close the windows.
▷ Close the glass sunroof.
▷ Close the trunk.
▷ Remove energy consuming devices, such
as a mobile phone.
▷ The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-
cle for the consent for installation.
▷ Switch off the exterior lighting.
▷ Remove the devices connected to the diag-
nostic socket.
Installing immediately
The upgrade can be installed immediately
when all prerequisites have been met.
1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Start upgrade now"
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Installing with timer
When the trip is completed, a timer can be
used to install the upgrade automatically at
a configured time, such as during the night.
A later installation may make sense to meet
functional requirements, e.g., a sufficiently
cooled down engine.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. Select the desired settings.
The installation starts automatically when:
▷
All prerequisites for the installation have
been established correctly.
▷ All prerequisites continue to be met at the
time of installation.
The timer is turned off when the drive-ready
state is turned on.
Functional limitations
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is
temporarily unavailable, for instance:
▷
Hazard warning system.
▷ Central locking system and, if necessary,
Comfort Access.
▷ Parking lights.
▷ Horn.
Seite 60
CONTROLS
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Alarm system.
▷ Emergency call.
▷ Power windows.
▷ Glass sunroof.
▷ Checking the fuel filler flap lock.
▷ Operate the tailgate or trunk lid.
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
from the outside using the integrated key.
After successful upgrade
The vehicle can be used again immediately.
Booked services such as. Advanced Real Time
Traffic Information or Remote Services are au-
tomatically reactivated during the next trip.
After an extended stationary period, charge
the vehicle battery with an extended drive.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-
structions on the control display or in the BMW
app.
If the malfunction cannot be corrected, contact
an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Validity of the Owner's Manual
Production of the vehicle
At the time of production at the plant, the
printed Owner's Manual is the most current
resource.
After a software update in the vehicle
After a vehicle software update, such as via
Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated
Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the
latest information.
Seite 61
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Personal settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Data protection
Data transfer
Principle
The vehicle offers different services, whose
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv-
ice provider.
General information
The data transfer can be deactivated for some
services. When the data transfer is deacti-
vated, the respective service cannot be used.
Settings
The data transfer can be configured in different
stages or individually for separate services.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.
Deleting personal data in the vehicle
Principle
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
This personal data can be permanently de-
leted using iDrive.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the following
data is deleted:
▷ BMW IDs or driver profiles.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored shortcuts.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destina-
tions.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
▷ Office data, for instance voice memos.
▷ Login accounts.
▷ Digital key.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take
up to 15 minutes. In addition, the vehicle is re-
moved from the My BMW App and Connected-
Drive customer portal so that remote functions
can no longer be used.
Functional requirements
▷
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
▷ The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.
Deleting data
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted
when the vehicle is reset to the factory set-
tings.
Additional information:
Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 62.
Reset vehicle data
All individual settings can be reset to the fac-
tory settings when the drive-ready state is
Seite 62
CONTROLS
Personal settings
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
switched off. Data can only be deleted while
stationary. The vehicle key must be in the vehi-
cle.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Reset vehicle data"
5. "Reset vehicle data"
If setting synchronization has been activated
for a BMW ID in the vehicle, personal settings
are kept in the BMW Cloud.
BMW ID/driver profiles
Principle
In ConnectedDrive countries, the BMW ID is
the personal login for all relevant offers for the
BMW brand. The BMW ID can be used in the
vehicle to store and activate personal vehicle
settings.
In non-ConnectedDrive countries, the personal
vehicle settings can be stored in driver profiles.
General information
The BMW ID must be registered once. A BMW
ID can be registered via the BMW app, in the
ConnectedDrive Portal, or with an authorized
service center.
A driver profile is created in the vehicle.
If a vehicle is used by several people, each
person can create their own BMW ID or driver
profile in order to save their personal settings.
If a BMW ID or driver profile is activated, the
settings stored for it are applied in the vehicle.
Many of the settings that are stored for a BMW
ID in the vehicle can be synchronized with the
BMW Cloud. This makes these settings availa-
ble in any vehicle where the same BMW ID is
used to log in.
The vehicle can store three BMW IDs or three
driver profiles.
A BMW ID or driver profile can be activated
while unlocking. For this purpose, the driver
recognition must be assigned to the BMW ID
or the driver profile via a vehicle key or a digital
key.
If no BMW ID or driver profile is activated when
the vehicle is unlocked, the vehicle loads the
guest profile.
Functional requirements
When a BMW ID or driver profile is created,
changed, deleted, or edited, the vehicle must
move no faster than at walking speed.
Logging in the vehicle with a BMW ID and
synchronization with the BMW Cloud are only
possible when the vehicle has cellular network
reception.
Welcome window
After unlocking the vehicle, a Welcome window
is shown on the control display. The type of
the welcome depends on the following prereq-
uisites:
▷
The vehicle does not have a stored BMW
ID or driver profile:
The welcome is neutral. An option to add a
BMW ID or create a driver profile is offered.
▷ The vehicle key or the digital key has not
been assigned to a BMW ID or a driver pro-
file:
The welcome is neutral. The stored BMW
IDs or the stored driver profiles are offered
for selection. Additionally, it is possible to
add a new BMW ID or create a new driver
profile.
▷ A BMW ID or driver profile has been as-
signed to the vehicle key or digital key:
The welcome is personalized, the stored
settings are activated. The BMW ID or the
driver profile can be changed.
As soon as the drive-ready state is turned on
or the control display is tapped outside of the
Welcome window, the welcome will be hidden.
Seite 63
Personal settings
CONTROLS
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Registering your BMW ID
To use a BMW ID, proceed as follows:
▷ Register your BMW ID.
▷ Activate the BMW ID.
▷ Add or confirm the BMW ID in the vehicle.
Registration of your BMW ID in the vehicle can
be started via the BMW app.
1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2. "Add BMW ID"
3. "Register now"
4. Scan the QR code shown in the display.
The BMW ID is created on the smartphone.
Alternatively, the BMW ID can be registered by
the authorized service center and added to the
vehicle. The BMW ID must then be confirmed
on the control display in the corresponding ve-
hicle.
Adding the BMW ID
An existing BMW ID can be added to the vehi-
cle:
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2. "Add BMW ID"
3.
▷ "Log in with My BMW App"
▷ "Log in with BMW ID"
4.
▷ Scan the QR code shown on the display.
The BMW ID is copied from the BMW
app.
▷ Enter the access data for the BMW ID.
5. Depending on the national-market version,
the following settings can be selected:
▷ "Synchronize BMW ID"
The settings stored in the BMW Cloud
are applied.
▷ "Transfer settings"
If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the
settings of the guest profile will be ap-
plied.
▷ "Continue"
The vehicle is added to the user’s BMW app.
Confirming a BMW ID
If the BMW ID has been created by an author-
ized service center and added to the vehicle,
the BMW ID must then be confirmed in the
vehicle:
1. Select the BMW ID.
2. Select the desired confirmation:
▷ Scan the displayed QR code with the
BMW app.
▷ Enter the password for the BMW ID.
BMW app
If a BMW ID has been added to a vehicle,
the vehicle is automatically added to the BMW
app. This means that BMW app functions can
be used for this vehicle. To do so, the BMW
app must be used with the same BMW ID.
Alternatively, a vehicle can be added to the
BMW app by the authorized service center. In
this case, the BMW ID must then be confirmed
on the control display in the corresponding ve-
hicle.
In rare cases, the use of BMW app functions
for this vehicle may be restricted. More infor-
mation is shown on the control display.
Creating a driver profile
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2. "Add driver profile"
3. Enter the name for the driver profile.
4. Select the desired setting:
"Transfer settings"
If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the set-
tings of the guest profile will be applied.
Seite 64
CONTROLS
Personal settings
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Primary user
The primary user is the person who first enters
their BMW ID into the vehicle and the vehicle
into the BMW app. Alternatively, the primary
user can be defined by an authorized service
center.
The primary user has access to the following
settings, for example:
▷ Removing BMW IDs stored in the vehicle.
▷ Transferring the primary user role to an-
other BMW ID.
▷ Change vehicle-wide data protection set-
tings.
▷ Create the main digital key.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 86.
Specifying driver detection
Driver detection and a PIN can be set up for a
BMW ID or a driver profile.
The driver detection offers the following ad-
vantages:
▷
The BMW ID or the driver profile with saved
settings is activated automatically.
▷ The settings are not accessible to other
persons.
The driver detection is specified immediately
following the addition of the BMW ID or after
creating the driver profile.
Prior to the selection of the driver detection, a
PIN must be created.
▷
"Set PIN"
The PIN can be used to activate the
BMW ID or the driver profile, even if the
assigned vehicle key or the assigned digital
key is not available.
▷ "Vehicle key"
The vehicle key that is recognized in the
vehicle interior is assigned to the BMW ID
or the driver profile.
▷ "Digital Key"
The digital key that is recognized in the ve-
hicle interior is assigned to the BMW ID or
the driver profile.
Automatic driver recognition
If driver recognition has been established, au-
tomatic activation of the BMW ID or driver pro-
file is triggered by the following actions:
▷ By unlocking the vehicle using the button
on the assigned vehicle key.
▷ By unlocking the vehicle using an external
door handle. The assigned vehicle key or
the assigned Digital Key must be carried
with you.
▷ By automatic unlocking when approaching
the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the
assigned Digital Key must be carried with
you. Depending on the country, it may not
be possible to recognize the Digital Key.
If there are several vehicle keys or Digital Keys
in the vicinity of the vehicle, activation of the
BMW ID or driver profile is done according to
the following priority:
▷
The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers
the activation of the assigned BMW ID or
the assigned driver profile.
The guest profile is activated when the ve-
hicle is unlocked using a key that is not as-
signed to a BMW ID or driver profile.
▷ If a vehicle key and a Digital Key are
detected at the same time, the Digital
Key triggers the activation of the assigned
BMW ID or the assigned driver profile.
▷ If another key is detected on the driver's
door after activating the BMW ID or the
driver profile, the BMW ID or the driver pro-
file of the last key detected is activated.
If no BMW ID and no driver profile are as-
signed to this key, the guest profile is acti-
vated.
Seite 65
Personal settings
CONTROLS
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Setting synchronization
If synchronization is switched on, settings from
the following areas, for example, are continu-
ously synchronized:
▷ BMW ID, e.g., profile picture.
▷ Navigation, e.g., recent destinations, home
address, or map settings.
▷ Media, e.g., favorites or saved radio sta-
tions.
▷ iDrive, e.g., main menu configuration, lan-
guage, or units.
▷ Personal Assistant, e.g., suggestions or ac-
tivation word.
▷ Exterior lighting, e.g., flashing indicator and
home lights.
Settings from the following areas are only
synchronized when you log in for the first time:
▷ Seating and climate comfort, e.g., driver’s
seat position or temperature setting.
▷ Data protection menu.
Selecting the BMW ID/driver profile
If the BMW ID or driver profile could not be
recognized when unlocking the vehicle, select
the BMW ID or driver profile on the welcome
window.
The BMW ID or driver profile can be changed
at any time via iDrive:
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2.
▷ "Change BMW ID"
▷ "Change driver profile"
3. Select the BMW ID or driver profile.
4. If necessary, enter the PIN.
The BMW ID or the driver profile are activated,
the stored settings are loaded.
Guest profile
The guest profile can be activated and
changed by anyone.
In the following cases the guest profile is auto-
matically active:
▷ A BMW ID has not yet been added or a
driver profile has not yet been created.
▷ No BMW ID or driver profile has been as-
signed to the vehicle key or the digital key
that was used to unlock the vehicle.
The following limitations apply to the guest
profile:
▷ Selected functions that edit personal data
are not available in the guest profile. This
includes functions of the navigation and
the saving of favorites. More information
on data processing is available in the Con-
nectedDrive data protection notes / service
descriptions.
▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed.
▷ It is not possible to assign a PIN to the
guest profile.
▷ It is not possible to assign driver detection
to the guest profile.
▷ In ConnectedDrive countries, the synchroni-
zation with the BMW Cloud is not possible.
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome
screen or via iDrive:
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2.
▷ "Change BMW ID"
▷ "Change driver profile"
3. "Continue as guest"
Deleting the BMW ID/driver profile
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2.
▷ "Change BMW ID"
▷ "Change driver profile"
3. Tap the icon of the desired BMW ID or
the desired driver profile.
Removing a BMW ID from the vehicle causes
the vehicle to be removed from the BMW app.
If the BMW ID has been synchronized with the
Seite 66
CONTROLS
Personal settings
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
BMW Cloud, the data stored in the BMW Cloud
is retained after the BMW ID is deleted. If the
currently active BMW ID is removed, the guest
profile is activated.
Removing a vehicle from the BMW app re-
moves the corresponding BMW ID from the
vehicle. If the BMW ID was synchronized with
the BMW Cloud, the BMW ID data stored in the
BMW Cloud will be retained.
If the vehicle is removed from the primary us-
er’s BMW app, it will also be removed from
the other users’ BMW apps. The correspond-
ing BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.
If the vehicle is reset to factory settings, the
vehicle is removed from all users’ BMW apps
and all BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.
Transfer of the vehicle key
A vehicle key that is assigned to a BMW ID or
a driver profile can be used to view or change
the stored personal settings.
Before a vehicle key is transferred to other per-
sons, any assigned driver detection should be
canceled. Changes to the driver detection can
be made in the settings of the BMW ID or the
driver profile.
The BMW Digital Key provides the option to
transfer a digital key to permit other persons
the use of your own vehicle.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 86.
Settings
General information
Settings added when adding a BMW ID or cre-
ating a driver profile can be changed.
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2. "Settings"
The following settings are available for the
BMW ID:
▷
The type of driver detection.
▷ The profile picture.
▷ The synchronization with the BMW Cloud.
▷ The personal salutation.
The following settings are available for the
driver profile:
▷ The type of driver detection.
▷ The profile picture.
▷ The profile name.
Selecting a profile picture
The profile picture can be selected from the
predefined profile pictures:
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2. "Settings"
3. "Manage profile picture"
4. "Select profile picture"
For a BMW ID, the personal profile picture can
be taken from the profile in the BMW app.
This requires that the synchronization with the
BMW Cloud is activated in the settings. After
the profile picture from the BMW app has
been applied, you can only select from the
predefined pictures if the profile picture in the
BMW app is deleted or synchronization is de-
activated.
System limits
A clear driver detection via the vehicle key or
the digital key may not always be possible in
the following cases, for example:
▷
The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
▷ When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-
tal keys with an assigned BMW ID or driver
profile are located in the outer area on the
driver's side of the vehicle.
▷ When the vehicle was unlocked from the
BMW app.
Seite 67
Personal settings
CONTROLS
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The use of personal settings that are stored for
a BMW ID in other vehicles is subject to techni-
cal limitations. For example, settings may be
stored for a system that is not available, or
available in a non-compatible version, in other
vehicles.
Seite 68
CONTROLS
Personal settings
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Vehicle key
General information
Two vehicle keys are included in the scope of
delivery, each containing an integrated key.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-
tery.
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, various settings are possible
for the button functions.
A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal set-
tings can be assigned to a vehicle key.
To provide information on maintenance rec-
ommendations, the service data is stored in
the vehicle key.
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle
key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting
the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning
The vehicle key has a button cell battery.
Batteries or button cell batteries can be swal-
lowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries
within two hours, for example due to internal
burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key
and batteries out of reach of children. Imme-
diately seek medical help if there is any sus-
picion that a battery or button cell battery has
been swallowed or is located in any part of
the body.
Overview
Buttons on the vehicle key.
Icon Meaning
Unlock.
Lock.
Stationary climate control, refer to
page 253.
Open the cargo area.
Panic mode.
Pathway lighting, refer to page 158.
Additional vehicle keys
Additional vehicle keys are available from an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 69
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Loss of vehicle keys
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-
placed by an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned BMW ID
or driver profile, the connection to this vehicle
key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can
then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver pro-
file.
Replacing the battery
NOTICE
Improper batteries in a battery-operated de-
vice can damage the device. There is a risk
of damage to property. Always replace the
discharged battery with a battery with the
same voltage, the same size and the same
specification.
1.
Remove the integrated key from the vehicle
key.
2. Place the integrated key underneath the
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and
lift the lid with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2.
3. Push battery in arrow direction using a
pointed object and lift it out.
4. Insert a CR2032 3V battery with the posi-
tive side facing up.
5. Press the lid closed.
6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key
until the integrated key engages.
Have old batteries disposed of by an
authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop,
or take them to a collection point.
Integrated key
General information
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked with-
out the vehicle key using the integrated key.
Depending on the national-market version, the
integrated key will fit in the glove compart-
ment.
Safety information
Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
If persons spend a lengthy time in the vehicle
and are thereby exposed to extreme temper-
atures, there is a risk of injury or danger to
life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there are people in it.
Seite 70
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Removing the integrated key
1. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
2. Pull off frame from integrated key.
Unlocking/locking via the door lock
1.
Pull and hold the door handle outward with
one hand.
2. Guide one finger of your other hand from
the back under the cover cap and push the
cover cap out.
Use the thumb for counter support to pre-
vent the cover cap from falling out of the
door handle.
3. Remove the cover cap.
4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked using the
central locking button or manually from the in-
side.
Alarm system
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-
tem will be triggered when the door is opened.
In this case, use the vehicle key emergency
detection to switch off the alarm.
If the vehicle is locked with the integrated key
via the door lock, the alarm system will not be
activated.
Seite 71
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Emergency detection of the vehicle
key
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the vehicle key has not been detected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1.
Hold the rear of the vehicle key against the
mark on the steering column. Pay attention
to the display in the instrument cluster.
2.
▷ If the vehicle key is detected:
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-
onds.
▷ If the vehicle key is not detected:
Slightly change the position of the vehi-
cle key and repeat the procedure.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable.
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-
function under the following circumstances:
▷
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission
towers or other equipment with high trans-
mitting power.
▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the vehicle key together
with metal objects.
▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-
ity to the vehicle key.
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-
imity to other electronic devices.
▷ Fault of radio transmission by a charging
process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
▷ The vehicle key is located in direct proximity
of the wireless charging tray.
Place the vehicle key in a different location.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the integrated key. Use the Emergency detec-
tion of the vehicle key to turn on drive-ready
state.
BMW display key
General information
The Display Key is available with pre-heating.
The Display Key may not be available depend-
ing on the country. In this case, independent
heating can be operated via the BMW app.
An additional mechanical key is included with
the Display Key. If the display key is used, the
mechanical key should be carried with you, for
instance in the wallet. The mechanical key is
used like the integrated key.
The display key supports all functions of the
standard vehicle key.
In addition, the following functions are also
available:
▷
Display status of doors and windows.
▷ Display status of the alarm system.
▷ Display service information.
▷ Call up range with available fuel.
▷ Operate pre-heating.
Additional information:
Integrated key, refer to page 70.
Seite 72
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-
hicle can be opened from the outside.
Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
If persons spend a lengthy time in the vehicle
and are thereby exposed to extreme temper-
atures, there is a risk of injury or danger to
life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there are people in it.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Overview
Buttons on the BMW Display Key.
Icon Meaning
Unlock.
Lock.
Open the cargo area.
Panic mode.
Pathway lighting, refer to page 158.
Turn the display on/off.
Micro-USB charging port.
Back.
Reception range
The number of available display key functions
depends on the distance from the vehicle.
Seite 73
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ When you are in close proximity to the ve-
hicle, all functions of the display key are
available.
▷ When you are in the extended reception
range, you can access status information
and operate the pre-heating.
▷ Outside of the reception range of the ve-
hicle, you can display the last transmitted
status information from the vehicle.
The icon is shown on the display if one of
the buttons is pressed outside of the reception
range.
Display
General information
The display is divided into the upper status
line, the information area, and the lower status
line.
Upper status line
The upper status line displays the following
information:
▷
/ Vehicle secured/vehicle unse-
cured.
▷ Set time in the vehicle.
▷ Charge state of the display key bat-
tery.
Information area
The information area can be used to access
information and perform additional functions.
If the information area contains more than one
page, then page indicators are shown beneath
the information.
A solid indicator denotes the current
page.
Swipe to the right or left with a finger to
change between the pages.
If further information is available on a page,
tap the appropriate icon.
To return to the original page:
tap on the
icon beneath the display.
Lower status line
The lower status line indicates whether or not
the display key is within reception range.
▷ "Connected": the display key is within re-
ception range.
▷ "Updated": the display key is not within re-
ception range. It indicates when the last
data transfer from the vehicle took place.
Turning on/off
The display will go out automatically after a
short time to conserve battery power.
Hiding the display on the display manually:
press the button on the left side of the display
key.
To show the display:
1.
Press the button on the left side of the dis-
play key.
2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom to
top to unlock the screen lock.
To turn off the display to increase the usable
battery life:
1.
If necessary, cancel the screen lock.
2. Press and hold the button on the left side of
the display key for longer than 4 seconds.
3. "OK"
To turn the display on:
Press the button on the left side of the display
key.
Operating concept
The following information shows how to ac-
cess the information and functions using the
main menus.
Seite 74
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Main menu Information/Function
"Security
information"
/
Door status.
Alarm system status.
After alarm activation:
date, time, and reason
for the alarm activation.
Window status.
Glass sunroof status.
"Vehicle
information"
Maintenance indicators
of Condition Based Serv-
ice CBS.
Status of the roadside
parking lights.
"Mobility info" Range with available
fuel.
"Preconditioning
setting"
Operate pre-heating.
Display key battery
General information
Follow the following information:
▷
If the charge state of the display key battery
declines, the display is switched off auto-
matically. The battery must be recharged
so that the display can be switched back
on. The operability of the standard buttons
is retained until the battery is completely
discharged.
▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours
before using the display key for the first
time or if the key has not been used for an
extended period.
▷ The display key can be used while it is be-
ing charged via the USB port. If the battery
is fully discharged, it may take some time
before the display key can be used again.
▷ Due to the large number of USB charg-
ers available on the market, it cannot be
guaranteed that every charger will function
properly. The charging time depends on the
charger used.
▷ Charging via the USB port may heat up the
charger and the display key.
Charging in the wireless charging tray may
heat up the tray and the display key.
At higher temperatures, the charge current
through the display key may be reduced,
and in isolated cases the charging process
may be interrupted temporarily.
▷ When inserting the display key into the
wireless charging tray, make sure there
are no objects between it and the wireless
charging tray.
Safety information
Warning
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the
wireless charging tray, any metal objects on
the tray together with the device can become
very hot. If storage media or electronic cards,
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips,
or cards that transmit signals, are placed on
the tray together with the device, they may
not function correctly. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. When charg-
ing mobile devices, make sure there are no
objects on the tray together with the device.
Charging
Via USB
Connect the display key via the micro-USB
charging interface to a USB port.
Seite 75
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
In the center console
1. Open the tray cover.
2. Place the display key into the middle of the
wireless charging tray in front of the cup
holders.
Ensure that the display is facing up.
3. Close the tray cover.
LED displays
Color Meaning
Blue The display key is charging.
The blue LED stays illuminated once
the inserted display key is fully
charged.
Or-
ange
The display key is not charging.
Temperature on the display key
possibly too high or foreign object in
charging tray.
Red The display key is not charging.
Contact an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
BMW display key detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷
The battery of the display key is dis-
charged.
▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission
towers or other equipment with high trans-
mitting power.
▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal
objects.
▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-
ity.
▷ Fault of radio transmission by a charging
process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
Do not transport the display key together with
metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the mechanical key.
Turning on drive-ready state via
emergency detection of the BMW
display key
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the display key has not been detected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1.
Hold the display key with its rear against
the mark on the steering column. Pay at-
tention to the display in the instrument
cluster.
2. If the display key is detected:
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-
onds.
Seite 76
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
If the display key is not detected, slightly
change the position of the display key and re-
peat the procedure.
Resetting the BMW display key
If the charged display key cannot be turned on
anymore or if the display does not respond to
entries anymore, the display key can be reset.
Press and hold the following buttons on the
display key at the same time for at least
10 seconds until the display is switched off and
then on again:
▷
▷
Access to vehicle interior
Safety information
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-
hicle can be opened from the outside.
Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
If persons spend a lengthy time in the vehicle
and are thereby exposed to extreme temper-
atures, there is a risk of injury or danger to
life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there are people in it.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Actions during unlocking
Depending on the settings, the following func-
tions are performed when unlocking the vehi-
cle:
▷
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
will be unlocked or all access to the vehicle
will be unlocked.
▷ The unlocking of the vehicle can be con-
firmed with a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ The welcome light can be turned on when
the vehicle is being unlocked.
In addition, the following functions are exe-
cuted:
▷
If a BMW ID or a driver profile was assigned
to the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver
profile will be activated.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off.
▷ Depending on vehicle equipment, folded-in
exterior mirrors are folded out.
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the
button in the vehicle interior, they will not
be folded out during unlocking.
Seite 77
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Anti-theft protection is switched off.
▷ The alarm system is switched off.
Additional information:
▷ Settings, refer to page 90.
▷ Welcome lights, refer to page 158.
▷ BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 63.
Actions during locking
Depending on the settings, the following func-
tions are performed when locking the vehicle:
▷ The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ Depending on vehicle equipment, the exte-
rior mirrors can be folded in automatically
when locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers
are switched on.
▷ Pathway lighting can be activated during
locking.
The following functions are executed:
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
are locked.
▷ Anti-theft protection is switched on. This
prevents the doors from being unlocked us-
ing the lock button or door opener.
▷ The alarm system is switched on.
If the drive-ready state is still turned on when
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must
be switched off by means of the Start/Stop
button.
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 90.
With the vehicle key
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key.
If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have
been unlocked due to the settings in place,
press the button on the vehicle key again to
unlock the other vehicle access points.
After opening one of the front doors, the vehi-
cle is ready for operation.
The lighting functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
Locking the vehicle
1. Close the driver's door.
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.
All vehicle access points are locked.
On the external door handle
Principle
The vehicle can be accessed without operating
the vehicle key.
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.
Functional requirements
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be
outside of the vehicle near the doors.
▷ After locking, approx. 2 seconds must
elapse before unlocking is possible.
Seite 78
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Unlock vehicle
Fully grasp the handle of a door.
Locking the vehicle
1.
Close the driver's door.
2. When a door is closed, touch the grooved
surface on the door handle with your finger
for approx. 1 second without gripping the
handle.
Malfunction
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-
ing request detection on the external door han-
dles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key
or use the integrated key.
Touchless unlocking/locking of the
vehicle
Principle
When the driver approaches the locked vehicle
with the vehicle key, the vehicle is unlocked.
When the driver walks away from the unlocked
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be
locked.
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.
The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-
ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking
zone.
The unlocking zone is located within a radius
of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the side and rear
of the vehicle.
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key
leaves the locking zone.
The locking zone is located within a radius of
approx. 9 ft/3 m around the side and rear of
the vehicle.
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking
zone for an extended period of time without
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati-
cally.
If a passenger is detected in the front passen-
ger seat during locking and the seat belt of
the front passenger is engaged in the seat belt
buckle during locking:
▷
The vehicle will be locked but not secured
against theft.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Actions during unlocking
If the settings specify that only the driver's
door and the fuel filler flap will be unlocked,
note the following:
The driver's door and fuel filler flap will only
be unlocked when the driver approaches the
vehicle on the driver's side.
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 90.
Seite 79
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Functional requirements
▷ Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
▷ Unlocking: when entering the unlocking
zone, the doors and cargo area must be
closed.
▷ Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the
doors and cargo area must be closed.
▷ Automatic unlocking and locking must be
activated in the settings.
▷ The drive-ready state must be turned off.
▷ For contactless locking of the vehicle, no
second vehicle key may be within a radius
of 18 ft/6 m around the vehicle.
▷ If the vehicle has been in the idle state for
several days, contactless unlocking/locking
will only be available after the vehicle has
been driven.
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 90.
With the Key Card
Principle
The Key Card is a chip card on which the digi-
tal key is installed. The Key Card can be used
to unlock and lock the vehicle.
Additional information:
Key Card, refer to page 84.
General information
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle
Hold activated Key Card directly on the center
of the external door handle of the driver's door.
When locking the vehicle with the Key Card,
make sure that all doors and the trunk are
closed.
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change
the position of the Key Card and repeat the
procedure.
With the BMW Digital Key
Principle
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, a digital key can be installed
on a compatible smartphone and used to un-
lock and lock the vehicle.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 86.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle
Hold the near field communication antenna of
the smartphone directly and centered on the
external door handle of the driver's door. The
Seite 80
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
position of the near field communication an-
tenna depends on the smartphone model.
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,
make sure that all doors and the trunk are
closed.
Frequently Asked Questions
What precautions can be taken to be able to
open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in
the vehicle key?
▷ The app’s remote services offer the option
to lock and unlock a vehicle.
This requires an active BMW Connected-
Drive contract, and the app must be instal-
led on a smartphone.
▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
required.
Access to the cargo area
General information
It may not be possible to open the cargo area
when the vehicle is in valet parking mode.
Additional information:
Valet parking mode, refer to page 89.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is
clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the travel path of the trunk lid
is clear during opening and closing.
With the vehicle key
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the following settings can be
changed:
▷ Unlocking the cargo area with the vehicle
key also unlocks the doors.
▷ Before unlocking the cargo area with the
vehicle key, first unlock the vehicle.
Functional requirements
Selector lever position P must be engaged to
open the cargo area with the vehicle key.
You must enable the setting for opening with
the vehicle key.
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 90.
Opening the trunk
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key for approx. 1 second.
On the trunk
General information
With Comfort Access, the cargo area can be
accessed without activating the vehicle key.
The key is automatically detected near the ve-
hicle.
Seite 81
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Functional prerequisite
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
Opening the trunk
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-
ton on the trunk.
▷ With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key
with you and press the button on the trunk.
Locked doors are not unlocked.
Closing the cargo area manually
Pull down the cargo area using the recessed
grips.
Depending on the equipment: press
the button on the cargo area.
The vehicle is locked after closing the
cargo area. To do so, the driver's door must be
closed and the vehicle key must be outside of
the vehicle near the cargo area.
Closing the cargo area automatically
▷
Press the button on the trunk.
▷ Press the button on the trunk.
The vehicle is locked after closing
the cargo area. To do so, the driv-
er's door must be closed and the vehicle
key must be outside of the vehicle near the
cargo area.
In the interior
Functional prerequisite
The vehicle key or digital key must be located
inside the vehicle in order to close the cargo
area using the button in the vehicle interior.
Opening the trunk
Press the button in the driver's door.
Closing the cargo area
Depending on the equipment:
Press the button in the driver's door.
An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk is
closed.
Interruption of the opening
procedure
The opening procedure is interrupted in the
following situations:
▷
When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
the cargo area. Pressing it again closes the
cargo area again.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
cargo area. Pressing it again closes the
cargo area again.
▷ By pressing the button on the vehicle key.
Seite 82
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Pressing the button again continues the
opening process.
▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the
driver's door. Pressing again continues the
opening procedure.
Interruption of the closing procedure
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol-
lowing situations:
▷ If the vehicle drives off with a jerky move-
ment.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the
cargo area again.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the
cargo area again.
▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door.
Pulling again and holding continues the
closing motion.
Opening and closing the cargo area
contactlessly
Principle
Touchless opening and closing of the cargo
area is possible when carrying the vehicle key
on your person.
Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot
movement in the central rear area and the
cargo area is opened and closed.
General information
Function availability depends on vehicle equip-
ment and national-market version.
If the vehicle key is within the sensor range, the
cargo area may open or close inadvertently if
you unintentionally move your foot or if a foot
movement is detected.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear area.
If contactless opening is used for the cargo
area, the locked doors will not be unlocked.
Safety information
Warning
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may
be touched, such as the hot exhaust system.
There is a risk of injury. When moving your
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and
do not touch the vehicle.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is
clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the travel path of the trunk lid
is clear during opening and closing.
Functional requirements
▷
To open the cargo area contactlessly, no
towing hitch can be mounted.
▷ To open the cargo area contactlessly, se-
lector lever position P must be engaged.
▷ Contactless opening and closing of the
trunk must be activated in the settings.
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 90.
Seite 83
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Opening the cargo area
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at
approx. one arm's length away from the
rear of the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the driving
direction and immediately pull it back. With
this movement, the leg must pass through
the ranges of both sensors.
Before the cargo area opens, the hazard warn-
ing system flashes.
Moving a foot again will stop the opening proc-
cedure. The subsequent foot movement will
close the cargo area again.
Closing the cargo area
Perform the foot movement for opening the
cargo area.
The hazard warning system flashes and an
acoustic signal sounds.
Moving a foot again will stop the closing proc-
ess. The subsequent foot movement will open
the cargo area again.
System limits
The detection of the foot movement may be
limited due to the following external conditions:
▷
Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.
▷ Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle.
Movement in range of the sensors may cause
unintended opening of the cargo area, for in-
stance due to water running down when clean-
ing the vehicle or with heavy rainfall. To pre-
vent such unintended opening of the cargo
area in such cases, keep the vehicle key at a
sufficient distance from the rear of the vehicle.
Malfunction
In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper-
ate the unlocked trunk manually with a slow
and smooth motion.
Trunk emergency unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The trunk is unlocked.
Key Card
Principle
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked
and locked, as well as started.
General information
Key Card availability depends on vehicle equip-
ment and national-market version.
A digital key that has already been paired with
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The
digital key must be activated via iDrive.
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key
Card or take the Key Card with you because
the active Key Card can be used to start the
vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to
a service appointment.
Seite 84
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
NOTICE
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the
wireless charging tray at the same time, the
Key Card could become damaged. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not place the
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the
same time as a mobile device.
Activating/deactivating Key Card in
the vehicle
General information
When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the
vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the
vehicle key.
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
Functional requirement
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to
activate and deactivate the Key Card.
Activating Key Card
1.
Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
2. Place Key Card in the center of the smart-
phone tray.
3. Follow instructions on the control display.
Deactivating Key Card
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Digital Key"
5. "Key Card"
6. "Deactivate Key Card"
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with
the activated Key Card.
Additional information:
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 77.
Turning on the drive-ready state
1.
Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
2. Place activated Key Card in the center of
the smartphone tray.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
After drive-ready state is switched on, the Key
Card can be removed from the tray.
Malfunction
The detection of the Key Card by the vehicle
may be disrupted by objects between the sen-
sors and the Key Card, such as a wallet or a
smartphone cover.
Seite 85
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
BMW Digital Key
Principle
BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un-
locked and locked, as well as started, with a
compatible smartphone.
General information
BMW Digital Key availability and functionality
depend on vehicle equipment and national-
market version.
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compat-
ible smartphone or other compatible mobile
devices.
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible
smartphone, this function must be offered by
the smartphone manufacturer. The My BMW
app can be used to check if the smartphone
and vehicle are compatible and which func-
tions are supported.
A BMW ID or a driver profile with individual
settings can be assigned to a digital key.
When using a smartphone as a Digital Key,
always carry a vehicle key or the activated Key
Card with you. This ensures access to the ve-
hicle, even in the event of a smartphone fail-
ure. It is also helpful to have the vehicle key
or Key Card with you if the vehicle needs to
be handed over to another person. You can
then hand over the vehicle key or the Key Card
instead of your smartphone.
Always take the vehicle key with you to a serv-
ice appointment.
Additional information:
▷
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 63.
▷ Key Card, refer to page 84.
▷ www.bmw.com/digitalkey
Functional requirements
▷ The smartphone is compatible with BMW
Digital Key
▷ The vehicle is linked with the Connected-
Drive account of the vehicle owner.
▷ The rechargeable battery of the smart-
phone has a sufficient charge. The neces-
sary minimum charge of the rechargeable
battery depends on the smartphone.
Enabling the main digital key
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a
main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle
owner must prove his authorization for the ve-
hicle for this purpose.
You can begin the authorization process us-
ing the My BMW app or using your activation
code in the corresponding smartphone func-
tion, e.g., the Wallet app. Both vehicle keys
must be in the vehicle during activation.
Follow the activation instructions in the Digital
Key menu in the app or on the control display.
Sharing digital keys
General information
Digital key allows the sharing of digital keys
with other people. This option is available via
the smartphone that is enabled as main digital
key. This function must be supported by the
smartphone.
Forwarding authorization
To share the digital key, select the correspond-
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in
the Wallet app.
As soon as a digital key is shared with another
person, the person will receive an invitation.
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.
Seite 86
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Limiting the range of functions
Certain functions of the digital key can be lim-
ited before handing it over. For instance, if the
Digital Key is passed on to a novice driver, the
switch-off for driving stability control systems
can be disabled and the engine power can
be reduced. For more information, refer to the
ConnectedDrive Portal and My BMW app.
Authentication
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone
model, an authentication may be required for
security and safety reasons.
An authorized vehicle key, the main digital key
or another method may be used for authenti-
cation. Follow the corresponding instructions
on the smartphone or the control display.
Deleting digital keys
General information
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the
list of enabled digital keys.
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.
Deleting the main digital key
The main digital key can be deleted from the
smartphone or via iDrive.
The deletion of the main digital key is com-
pleted immediately.
Deleting a shared key
Shared keys can be deleted using the smart-
phone with the master Digital Key, using the
smartphone with the shared key to be deleted,
or via iDrive.
The deletion via the smartphone using the
main digital key will not be performed until the
vehicle is used with a key other than the key to
be deleted.
If the smartphone associated with a shared
key or iDrive is used to delete a shared key, it
will be deleted immediately.
Deletion via iDrive
To delete a digital key via iDrive, there must be
an authorized vehicle key in the vehicle, or the
master Digital Key must be in the smartphone
tray.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Digital Key"
5. If necessary, select the digital key.
6. Delete the Digital Key.
Resetting the function
To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au-
thorized vehicle key must be located in the ve-
hicle.
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function,
all digital keys including the main digital key
will be deleted. The Key Card digital key is not
deleted.
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be
unlocked, locked or started with a digital key.
The main digital key must be enabled again to
be able to use BMW Digital Key again.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Digital Key"
5. "Reset function"
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked using
the external door handle.
Additional information:
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 77.
Seite 87
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Turning on the drive-ready state
Using the smartphone tray
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
2. Place smartphone in the center of the
smartphone tray.
Ensure that the display is facing up.
3. Close the cover of the smartphone tray.
4. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on the
drive-ready state.
Sale of the smartphone
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior
to selling the smartphone. This ensures that
the smartphone can no longer be used for the
vehicle.
Changing smartphones
To use a new smartphone as a master Digital
Key, activate the new smartphone according to
the instructions for the master Digital Key. The
previous master key is deleted when the new
smartphone is activated.
Sale of the vehicle
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital
Key function or remove the vehicle from the
ConnectedDrive account of the current vehicle
owner.
When the vehicle is removed from the Con-
nectedDrive account, all digital keys for the ve-
hicle will be deleted. The Key Card digital key is
not deleted.
System limits
The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen-
sor of the alarm system cannot be switched off
with a digital key.
Additional information:
Alarm system, refer to page 91.
Malfunction
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal-
function under the following circumstances:
▷ The smartphone is shielded from the sen-
sors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover
that is not suitable.
▷ Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card
are located between the smartphone and
the smartphone cover.
▷ Fault of the connection from transmission
towers or other equipment with high trans-
mitting power.
▷ Shielding of the smartphone due to build-
ings or metal objects.
Buttons for the central
locking system
General information
The vehicle is automatically locked when driv-
ing off.
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle
is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights are illuminated.
Seite 88
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Overview
The central locking buttons are located on the
front door.
Locking the vehicle
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button.
Opening the door
▷
Press the button to unlock all the
doors.
Pull the door opener above the arm-
rest.
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the
door to open the door. The other doors re-
main locked.
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle
on the door to be opened; the first time
unlocks the door, the second time opens it.
The other doors remain locked.
Valet parking mode
Principle
In the valet parking mode, the control display is
disabled.
E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle
is handed over for valet parking.
General information
Depending on the national-market version, the
valet parking mode may not be available.
Valet Parking mode has the following restric-
tions:
▷ Vehicle settings cannot be changed via
iDrive.
▷ Settings stored to a BMW ID or guest pro-
file cannot be changed.
▷ Personal data cannot be displayed.
▷ The volume of the audio system is limited.
▷ The integrated Universal Remote Control is
deactivated.
▷ Dynamic Stability Control cannot be turned
off.
▷ The availability of certain settings of the
driving modes is limited.
Additional information:
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 63.
Functional requirement
The driver has registered in the vehicle with a
BMW ID.
Activating the valet parking mode
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Valet parking mode"
The cargo area is locked and disconnected
from the central locking system.
5. If necessary, "PIN"
Seite 89
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
If the active BMW ID does not have an as-
signed PIN, this PIN must be set now. The
PIN is needed to deactivate the valet park-
ing mode.
6. If necessary, enter the PIN.
7. "Activate valet parking mode"
Deactivating valet parking mode
1. Select the desired BMW ID on the lock
screen.
2.
▷ Enter the assigned PIN for the BMW ID.
If you have forgotten the PIN: enter the
access data for the BMW ID.
▷ If the selected BMW ID does not have
an assigned PIN: enter the access data
for the BMW ID.
Settings
General information
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, various settings for opening
and closing are possible.
Unlocking and locking
Doors
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. "Unlock"
6. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un-
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Touchless unlocking/locking
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Comfort access"
5. Select the desired setting.
Automatic unlocking
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Unlock doors at end of trip"
▷ "Unlock doors when in P"
After drive-ready state is switched off, the
locked vehicle is unlocked automatically by
pressing the start/stop button or engaging se-
lector lever position P.
Automatic locking
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. "Lock after a short time"
The vehicle locks automatically after a short
period of time if no door is opened after un-
locking.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Flash on lock/unlock"
Seite 90
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Unlocking is signaled by flashing twice,
locking by flashing once.
▷ With alarm system:
"Sound on lock/unlock"
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound
signals, locking is confirmed with one
sound signal.
Folding mirrors in automatically
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. "Fold mirrors on lock/unlock"
Cargo area
Cargo area and doors
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Tailgate"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Tailgate"
Depending on the equipment, the cargo
area will be unlocked or opened.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
Depending on the equipment, the trunk
will be unlocked or opened and the
doors are unlocked.
▷ "Tailgate will only open if vehicle is
already unlocked"
The vehicle must be unlocked before
the cargo area can be operated with the
vehicle key.
▷ "Lock tailgate button"
Operating the cargo area with the vehi-
cle key is disabled.
Opening/closing the cargo area
contactlessly
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Tailgate"
5. Select the desired setting.
Alarm system
Principle
The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic
signal when someone attempts to open the
locked vehicle incorrectly.
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
▷ Opening a door, the hood, or the cargo
area.
▷ Movements in the interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle inclination, such
as during attempts at stealing a wheel or
when towing the vehicle.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD on-
board diagnostics.
▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con-
nected to the diagnostic socket.
The alarm system signals these changes visu-
ally and acoustically:
▷
Acoustic alarm:
Depending on local regulations, the acous-
tic alarm may be suppressed.
▷ Optical alarm:
By flashing of the hazard warning system
and headlights, where required.
Do not modify the system to ensure function of
the alarm system.
Seite 91
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Turning the alarm system on/off
The alarm system is activated or deactivated
as soon as the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
If the vehicle is locked remotely using the My
BMW app, the alarm system is not switched
on.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door
is opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Opening the cargo area with the
alarm system switched on
The cargo area can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
After closing the cargo area, the cargo area will
be locked and monitored again. The hazard
warning system flashes once during closing.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the vehi-
cle key three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Indicator light on the interior mirror
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ The indicator light flashes for approx.
10 seconds, then flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
When the remaining open access points
are closed, the interior motion sensor and
tilt alarm sensor will be turned on.
▷ The indicator light flashes even though all
access points have been closed:
Alarm system error.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking
until drive-ready state is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
The alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The inclination of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi-
cle is towed.
Interior motion sensor
The vehicle interior is monitored.
Seite 92
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The alarm system responds when movement
is detected in the vehicle interior.
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unau-
thorized action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles,
at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of re-
fueling.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
sensor can be switched off in such situations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the vehicle key
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehi-
cle is locked.
The indicator light illuminates for approx.
2 seconds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Ending the alarm
Unlock the vehicle.
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
key, the drive-ready state must subsequently
be turned on via the emergency detection of
the vehicle key.
Window
General information
When a window is frequently opened to the
same position, this task can be performed by
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. This is
useful if you frequently use the same parking
garage, for example.
Additional information:
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
page 51.
Safety information
Warning
When operating the windows, body parts and
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in-
jury or risk of damage to property. Make sure
that the travel path of the windows is clear
during opening and closing.
With the vehicle key
Opening windows
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key after unlocking.
The windows open for as long as the button
on the vehicle key is pressed.
Closing the windows
With Comfort Access: press and hold
the button on the vehicle key after lock-
ing.
The windows close for as long as the button
on the vehicle key is pressed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
Seite 93
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
On the external door handle
Principle
The windows can be closed using the external
door handle without operating the vehicle key.
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.
Functional prerequisite
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance in
your pants pocket.
Closing the windows
Touch the grooved surface on the external
door handle of a closed door with your finger
and hold it there without grasping the door
handle.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass
sunroof with sun protection will be closed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
In the interior
Overview
Power windows
Functional requirements
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
The vehicle key or a digital key must be inside
of the vehicle.
Opening windows
▷
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch
is being held.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
The window opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Closing the windows
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch
is being held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
The window closes automatically.
Pulling again stops the motion.
Seite 94
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Jam protection system
Principle
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door
frame and window while a window is being
closed.
General information
If resistance or blockage is detected while a
window is being closed, the closing will be in-
terrupted.
Safety information
Warning
Accessories on the windows such as anten-
nas can impact jam protection. There is a
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if icing
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-
lows:
1.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
The window closes with limited jam protec-
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific
threshold, closing is interrupted.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and
hold it there.
The window closes without jam protection.
Glass sunroof
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and
closing.
With the vehicle key
Opening glass sunroof
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key after unlocking.
The glass sunroof with sun protection will be
opened for as long as the button on the vehicle
key is pressed.
Closing glass sunroof
With Comfort Access: press and hold
the button on the vehicle key in close
range of the vehicle after locking.
The glass sunroof with sun protection will be
closed for as long as the button on the vehicle
key is pressed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
On the external door handle
Principle
The glass sunroof can be closed using the ex-
ternal door handle without operating the vehi-
cle key.
Seite 95
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.
Functional prerequisite
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance in
your pants pocket.
Closing glass sunroof
Touch the grooved surface on the external
door handle of a closed door with your finger
and hold it there without grasping the door
handle.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass
sunroof with sun protection will be closed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
In the interior
Functional requirements
The glass sunroof and sun protection can be
operated under the following conditions.
▷
Standby state is switched on.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
The vehicle key must be in the car's interior.
General information
The glass sunroof and the sun protection are
operated using the same switch.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Opening/closing the glass sun-
roof/sun protection.
Lifting/closing glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
▷
The closed glass sunroof tilts
and the sun protection opens
slightly.
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in the tilted
position. The sun protection
does not move.
▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sun protection separately
▷
Slide switch back to the re-
sistance point and hold.
Holding down the switch
opens the sun protection. If
the sun protection is already
Seite 96
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
fully open, the glass sunroof
opens.
▷ Slide switch forward to the resistance point
and hold.
The glass sunroof closes while the switch
is being held. If the glass sunroof is already
closed or in the tilted position, the sun pro-
tection closes.
▷ Slide the switch back past the resistance
point.
The sun protection opens automatically. If
the sun protection is already fully open, the
glass sunroof opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
▷ Push the switch forward past the resistance
point.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If
the glass sunroof is already closed or in
the tilted position, the sun protection closes
automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sun protection together
▷
Briefly press out the switch
twice in succession toward
the rear past the resistance
point.
The glass sunroof and sun
protection open together.
Pressing the switch again
stops the motion.
▷ Briefly press out the switch twice in succes-
sion toward the front past the resistance
point.
The glass sunroof and sun protection close
together.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's
interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is
not fully open. In these models, the automatic
function initially only opens the glass sunroof
up to this comfort position.
Pressing the switch in the vehicle interior again
opens the glass sunroof fully.
Jam protection system
Principle
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts from becoming jammed between the
roof frame and glass sunroof while the glass
sunroof is closing.
General information
If a resistance or blockage is detected while
the glass sunroof is closing, the closing opera-
tion is interrupted once the roof reaches the
half-open position, or it is stopped when clos-
ing from the tilted position.
Closing from the open position without
jam protection
If an external hazard or ice prevents normal
closure, proceed as follows:
1.
Close all doors.
2. Switch on drive-ready state or stop a mov-
ing vehicle.
3. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
protection. If the closing force exceeds a
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.
4. Push the switch forward again past the re-
sistance point and hold until the glass sun-
Seite 97
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
roof closes without jam protection. Make
sure that the closing path is clear.
Closing from the lifted position without
jam protection
In case of danger from the outside or if icing
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Close all doors.
2. Switch on drive-ready state or stop a mov-
ing vehicle.
3. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
Initializing after a power interruption
General information
After a power interruption during the opening
or closing process, the glass sunroof can only
be operated to a limited extent. Initializing the
system can help in this case.
The system can be initialized under the follow-
ing conditions:
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-
tion.
▷ The vehicle will not be moved until the initi-
alization is completed.
▷ The drive-ready state is established.
▷ The outside temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing path is clear.
Initializing the system
Press the switch up and hold
it until the initialization is com-
plete:
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.
▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then
closes again.
▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
then opens and closes again.
▷ The sun protection is initialized in the
closed position.
Initialization is complete once the glass sun-
roof and the sun protection have opened then
closed again.
Seite 98
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Sitting safely
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of
the occupants can make a vital contribution to
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seat
position plays an important role. Follow the in-
formation in the following chapters.
Additional information:
▷ Seats, refer to page 99.
▷ Seat belts, refer to page 104.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 106.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 165.
Seats
Safety information
Warning
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con-
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident.
Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when
the vehicle is stationary.
Warning
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear,
the protective effect of the seat belt can no
longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding
under the seat belt in an accident. There is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat
prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest
so that it is in the most upright position as
possible and do not adjust again while driv-
ing.
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
adjustment.
Manually adjustable seats
Overview
The levers for setting the seats are located on
the front seats.
Seite 99
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Setting the longitudinal direction
Warning
Unexpected movements of the seat while
driving may occur if the seat is unlocked. Ve-
hicle control could be lost. There is a risk of
accident. After adjusting, move the seat for-
ward or back slightly, making sure the seat
engages properly.
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
Adjusting seat tilt
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as
needed until the seat has reached the desired
inclination.
Adjusting the height
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as
needed until the seat has reached the desired
height.
Adjusting backrest tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Electrically adjustable seats
General information
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function.
Seite 100
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Overview
The switches for setting the seats are located
on the front seats.
Setting the longitudinal direction
Press switch forward or backward.
Adjusting the height
Press switch up or down.
Adjusting seat tilt
Tilt switch up or down.
Adjusting backrest tilt
Tilt switch forward or backward.
Adjusting the seat position
automatically
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
in the active BMW ID or in the active driver
profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is
reactivated at a later time, the saved position
will be called up automatically.
Activate/deactivate the function
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select driver’s seat.
5. "Set automatically"
6. Select the desired setting.
Seite 101
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Thigh support
Sport seat
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push
the thigh support forward or back.
Lumbar support
Principle
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright sitting position.
Adjusting the lumbar support
▷
Press the front/rear section of the
button:
The curvature is increased/de-
creased.
▷ Press the upper/lower section of the but-
ton:
The curvature is shifted up/down.
Functional limitations
It may not be possible to adjust the lumbar
support at very high and very low tempera-
tures.
Backrest width
Principle
Adjusting the backrest width may improve side
support when cornering.
General information
The backrest width is changed by adjusting
the side sections of the backrest.
Adjusting the backrest width
▷ Press the front section of the but-
ton:
The backrest width decreases.
▷ Press the rear section of the button:
The backrest width increases.
Functional limitations
It may not be possible to adjust the backrest
width at very high and very low temperatures.
Entering the rear
Safety information
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
adjustment.
Warning
Unexpected movements of the rear seat
backrest while driving may occur if the rear
seat backrest is unlocked. Vehicle control
could be lost. There is a risk of injury. Fold
back and lock the backrests before driving.
Make sure the backrest engages correctly by
slightly moving forward and back.
Seite 102
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Manual longitudinal setting
Fold the seat backrest forward
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold the seat backrest forward.
3. Push the seat forward.
Push the seat backrest rearward
1.
Push the seat back into the initial position.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
Electric longitudinal setting
Fold the seat backrest forward
1.
Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold the seat backrest forward.
To make the entry to the rear easier, the seat
will automatically move to the most forward
position.
The process will be terminated when the
switch for the forward/back direction adjust-
ment is pressed or the backrest is reclined.
Push the seat backrest rearward
Push the seat backrest rearward and lock it.
The seat moves automatically to the last seat
position that was stored.
Calibrating the front seats
General information
As soon as the electric seat setting no longer
functions precisely, a Check Control message
is displayed on the control display.
To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-
ting, the front seats must be calibrated.
Safety information
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
adjustment.
Calibrating the front seat
1.
Press the longitudinal direction switch for-
ward until the seat stops.
2. Press the switch forward again until the
seat stops.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
As soon as the message on the control dis-
play disappears, the calibration is complete.
If the message remains active, repeat the cali-
bration.
If the message is still shown after repeated
calibration, have the vehicle checked by a
qualified authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 103
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Seat belts
General information
The vehicle is fitted with four seat belts to en-
sure occupant safety. However, they can only
offer protection when adjusted correctly.
Always make sure that seat belts are being
worn by the occupants before driving off. The
airbags supplement the seat belts as an ad-
ditional safety device. The airbags do not re-
place seat belts.
All seat belt anchorage points are designed to
achieve the best possible protective effect for
the seat belts when used properly and with the
correct seat settings.
Additional information:
Notes on sitting safely, refer to page 99.
Safety information
Warning
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one
person will potentially defeat the ability of
the seat belt to serve its protective function.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Do not strap in more than one person per
single seat belt. Infants and children are not
allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be
transported and secured in designated child
restraint systems.
Warning
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.
Warning
With a rear seat backrest that is not locked,
the protective effect of the middle seat belt
is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life. If you are using the middle seat
belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.
Warning
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, may not be fully functional or fail in
the following situations:
▷ The seat belts or seat belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any
other way.
▷ Seat belt tensioners or roll-up mecha-
nism were modified.
Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Do not modify seat
belts, seat belt buckles, seat belt tension-
ers, roll-up mechanisms, or belt anchors and
keep them clean. After an accident, have the
seat belts checked by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Correct use of seat belts
▷
Wear the seat belt tight to your body over
your lap and shoulders, without twisting it.
▷ Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The seat belt must not press on
your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the seat belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard
or fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward
around your upper body area.
Seite 104
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Seat-belt extender
Principle
The seat-belt extender makes it easier to put
on the seat belt.
General information
The seat-belt extender extends automatically
and keeps the seat belt ready to put on, arrow.
After the belt is put on, it goes back into the
resting position.
If the seat belt has not yet been applied, the
seat-belt extender goes back under the follow-
ing circumstances:
▷
Waiting period of approx. five minutes.
▷ Opening the respective door.
▷ After a short distance travelled.
▷ Locking the vehicle from the outside.
When the respective door is closed, the seat-
belt extender extends again.
Functional requirements
▷
Door is closed.
▷ Vehicle key detected in the car's interior.
Jam protection system
Warning
When extending and retracting the seat-belt
extender, body parts and objects can be jam-
med. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-
age to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat-belt extender is clear.
If the belt carrier encounters resistance when
extending or retracting, the seat-belt extender
moves back somewhat in the respective op-
posite. Following an attempt, the seat-belt ex-
tender will stop in this position.
To reactivate the seat-belt extender, eliminate
the resistance and open and close the respec-
tive door.
Buckling the seat belt
1.
Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder
and hip to put it on.
2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt
buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage
audibly.
To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help
position the buckle when not in use.
Unbuckling the seat belt
1.
Hold down the seat belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.
3. Guide the seat belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Seite 105
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Seat belt reminder
General information
Make sure that the seat belts are positioned
correctly.
The seat belt reminder becomes active in the
following situations:
▷ When the seat belt on the driver's side or
on the passenger's side is not fastened.
▷ When the seat belt is unfastened while driv-
ing.
▷ When objects are lying on a seat.
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-
minates after turning on the drive-ready state
when the seat belt reminder is active.
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable. Check whether the seat belt has
been fastened correctly.
Icon Meaning
Seat belt on the driver's seat is
not buckled.
Seat belt on the passenger
seat or another seat in the ve-
hicle is not buckled.
Seat belt is buckled on the cor-
responding seat.
Seat belt is not buckled on the
corresponding seat.
Rear Occupant Alert
Principle
At the end of a trip, the system informs the
driver of the possible presence of occupants on
the rear seats.
General information
If a door with access to the rear row seating
is operated within 30 minutes before starting
off, a message appears on the control display
when the trip is completed and a signal tone
sounds.
If the trip is continued within 30 minutes, the
message is displayed again after the trip has
been completed.
Activate/deactivate the function
1. Apps menu
2. "System settings"
3. "Rear Occupant Alert"
4. Select the desired setting.
Safety mode
In critical driving situations, for instance during
emergency braking, the front seat belts tighten
automatically.
If the driving situation passes without an acci-
dent occurring, the belt tension relaxes.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati-
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the seat
belt using the red button in the seat belt
buckle. Fasten the seat belt before continuing
to drive.
Front head restraints
Safety information
Warning
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
Seite 106
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re-
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-
tective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de-
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Adjusting the height
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Adjusting the height: M sport seat
Press switch up or down.
Seite 107
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Adjusting the distance
▷ Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
front.
After setting the distance, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Adjusting the distance: M Sport seat
The distance to the back of the head is ad-
justed via the backrest inclination.
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
Removing the head restraints
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Raise the head restraint up against the re-
sistance.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
Removing the head restraints: M
Sport seat
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Installing head restraints
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
Exterior mirrors
General information
The front passenger's side exterior mirror is
more curved than the driver's side mirror.
The exterior mirror adjustment is stored in the
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated
at a later time, the stored position is called up
automatically.
The current exterior mirror adjustment can be
stored using the memory function.
Safety information
Warning
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. The distance to the road users
behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in-
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk
of accident. Estimate the distance to the traf-
fic behind by looking over your shoulder.
Seite 108
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Overview
Icon Meaning
Fold the exterior mirror in and out.
Adjust the exterior mirrors.
Select exterior mirror, Automatic Curb
Monitor.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Press the button.
The selected exterior mirror moves
along with the button movement.
Selecting the exterior mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
exterior mirror by pressing on the edges of the
mirror glass.
Folding in/folding out the exterior
mirrors
NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in car washes. There is a
risk of damage to property. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
Press the button.
Folding is possible up to a speed of approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is help-
ful in the following situations:
▷ In car washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Exterior mirrors that were folded in are folded
out automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
as needed and when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
Automatic dimming
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is au-
tomatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior
mirror are used to control this.
Automatic Curb Monitor
Principle
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the passenger's side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other low-
lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
Seite 109
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Activating the Automatic Curb Monitor
1. slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating the Automatic Curb
Monitor
Slide the switch to the front passenger's side
exterior mirror position.
Interior mirror, manually
dimmable
To reduce the blinding glare of the interior mir-
ror, flip the lever forward.
Interior mirror, automatic
dimming feature
General information
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
Photocells are used for control:
▷
In the mirror glass.
▷ On the rear of the mirror.
Overview
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
Warning
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move-
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
a risk of accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.
Manual steering wheel adjustment
1.
Fold the lever down completely.
2. Grip the steering wheel with both hands
and move the steering wheel to the prefer-
Seite 110
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
red height and angle to suit your seat posi-
tion.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Steering wheel heating
Overview
Button for steering wheel heating
Turning the steering wheel heating
on/off
Press the button.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes
after an intermediate stop, the steering wheel
heating turns on automatically if the function
was turned on at the completion of the last trip.
Memory function
Principle
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-
tion:
▷
Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror adjustment.
▷ Height of the Head-up display.
General information
Two memory locations with different settings
can be set for each driver profile.
The following settings are not stored:
▷ Backrest width.
▷ Lumbar support.
Safety information
Warning
Using the memory function while driving can
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
adjustment.
Overview
The memory buttons are located on the front
doors.
Seite 111
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Storing settings
1. Set the desired position.
2. Press the button. The LED illumi-
nates.
3. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
while the LED is illuminated. A signal
sounds.
Calling up settings
Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.
The stored position is called up.
The procedure stops when a seat setting
switch or one of the memory buttons is
pressed again.
The adjustment of the seat position on the
driver's side is interrupted after a short time
while driving.
Seat climate control
Various climate control functions are available
for the seats.
Additional information:
Climate operation, refer to page 244.
Seite 112
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
The right place for children
Safety information
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Warning
A hot vehicle may result in death to persons,
especially children, or animals. There is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave
persons, especially children, or animals unat-
tended in the vehicle.
Warning
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child
restraint systems and their components to
become very hot. Persons may sustain burn
injuries when touching the hot components.
There is a risk of injury. Do not expose
the child restraint system to direct sunlight
or cover where necessary. If necessary, let
the child restraint system cool down before
transporting a child. Do not leave children un-
attended in the vehicle.
Children in the rear seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Children younger than 13 years of age or
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported
in the rear seat in suitable child restraint sys-
tems designed for the age, weight and size
of the child. Children 13 years of age or older
must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable
child restraint system can no longer be used
due to their age, weight, or size.
Safety information
Warning
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly
on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without
suitable additional child restraint systems.
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life. Secure children
Seite 113
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child
restraint systems.
Children on the front passenger
seat
General information
Before using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
knee, and side airbags on the passenger's side
are deactivated.
Additional information:
For automatic deactivation of front passenger
airbags, refer to page 167.
Safety information
Warning
Active front passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air-
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front passenger airbags
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.
Installing child restraint
systems
General information
Pay attention to the specifications and the op-
erating and safety information of the child re-
straint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
Safety information
Warning
The protective effect of child restraint sys-
tems and their fastening systems which have
been damaged or exposed to an accident
can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-
erly restrained in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life.
Do not use child restraint systems which
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
dent.
If attachment systems have been damaged
or strained by an accident, have them
checked and replaced by an authorized serv-
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is
limited or compromised with incorrect seat
setting or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the
height of the head restraints or remove them.
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating the airbags
Warning
Active front passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air-
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front passenger airbags
Seite 114
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.
Before installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the passenger's side
are deactivated.
Additional information:
For automatic deactivation of front passenger
airbags, refer to page 167.
Seat position and height
After installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go and, if possible, bring it up to the highest
position. This seat position and height ensure
the best possible position for the belt and of-
fers optimal protection in the event of an acci-
dent.
After mounting a universal child restraint sys-
tem, adjust the tilt of the seat backrest so that
the belt is not constrained.
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt
is located in front of the belt guide of the child
restraint seat, move the front passenger seat
carefully forward until the best possible belt
guide position is reached.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: Before installing a
child restraint system on the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Child seat security
The seat belts in the rear and the front pas-
senger seat belt can be permanently locked to
fasten child restraint systems.
Locking the seat belt
1.
Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
seat belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
The seat belt is disabled.
Unlocking the seat belt
1.
Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com-
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-
dren.
Pay attention to the specifications, operating
tips and safety instructions from the child re-
straint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using LATCH child restraint fix-
ing systems.
Seite 115
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Mounts for lower anchors
General information
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
Warning
If the lower mountings of the child restraint
system are not correctly engaged, the protec-
tive effect of the child restraint system is lim-
ited. There is a risk of injury or danger to
life. Make sure that the lower mountings are
correctly engaged and that the child restraint
system fits securely against the backrest.
Warning
The mounts for the lower mountings and at-
tachment points of the child restraint system
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the
mounts or attachment points can be dam-
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-
age to property. Only attach child restraint
systems at the corresponding mounts for the
lower mountings or attachment points.
Position
Icon Meaning
The corresponding icon shows
the mounts for the lower
LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower
mountings are marked with a
pair (2) of LATCH icons.
For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
It is not recommended to use
the inner lower mountings of
standard outer LATCH posi-
tions to fasten a child restraint
system on the middle seat.
Use the vehicle seat belt in-
stead for the middle seat.
Before attaching child restraint
systems
Pull the seat belt away from the area of the
child seat mountings.
Installing child restraint systems
1.
Mount child restraint system, see manufac-
turer's information.
2. Make sure that the child restraint system
mount is correctly engaged in the lower an-
chor on both sides.
Child restraint systems with
tether strap
General information
When attaching child restraint systems to the
upper attachment points, observe the specifi-
cations and the operating and safety informa-
tion of the child restraint system manufacturer.
Seite 116
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
Warning
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
for the child restraint system, the protective
effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. En-
sure that the upper retaining strap is guided
to the upper attachment point without twist-
ing and not over sharp edges.
Warning
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the
protective effect of the child restraint system
is limited or nonexistant. In certain situations,
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of
an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold
forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to
life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests
are locked.
Warning
The mounts for the lower mountings and at-
tachment points of the child restraint system
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the
mounts or attachment points can be dam-
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-
age to property. Only attach child restraint
systems at the corresponding mounts for the
lower mountings or attachment points.
Attachment points for upper
retaining strap
Icon Meaning
The respective icon shows the
attachment point for the upper
retaining strap. Seats with an
upper top tether are marked
with this icon. It is located on
the rear seat backrest, the rear
shelf or the rear seat.
Routing the retaining strap
1 Driving direction
2 Upper retaining strap
3 Head restraint
4 Rear shelf
5 Attachment point
6 Hook for upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap
to the attachment point
1.
Open the attachment point cover.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap over the
head restraint to the anchor.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
attachment point.
4. Tighten the retaining strap.
Seite 117
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Start/Stop button
Principle
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches drive-
ready state on or off.
General information
Drive-ready state is switched on when you de-
press the brake pedal while pressing the Start/
Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
the drive-ready state back off and standby
state is switched back on.
Additional information:
▷
Drive-ready state, refer to page 41.
▷ Standby state, refer to page 41.
Driving off
1.
Turn on drive-ready state.
2. Apply gear position.
3. Driving off.
Auto Start/Stop function
Principle
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.
The engine starts automatically for driving off.
General information
After each engine start using the Start/Stop
button, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready.
The function is activated at low speeds.
Engine stop
Functional requirements
The engine is switched off automatically when
stopping under the following conditions:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi-
tion D.
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while
the vehicle is at a standstill or the vehicle is
held by Automatic Hold.
▷ The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv-
er's door is closed.
Manual engine stop
If the engine was not switched off automati-
cally when the vehicle stopped, the engine can
be switched off manually:
▷
Depress the brake pedal forcefully again
from the current pedal position.
▷ Engage selector lever position P.
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled,
the engine switches off.
Air conditioning system when the
engine is switched off
The air flow from the air conditioning system is
reduced when the engine is switched off.
Seite 118
CONTROLS
Driving
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Display in the instrument cluster
The display in the instrument
cluster indicates that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready for
an automatic engine start.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.
▷ The brake pedal was not pressed hard
enough.
▷ When the ambient temperature is high and
automatic climate control is switched on.
▷ The vehicle interior has not yet been
heated or cooled as desired.
▷ When window condensation is possible and
automatic climate control is switched on.
▷ Engine or other parts are not at operating
temperature.
▷ Engine cooling is required.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ Hood is unlocked.
▷ The Automatic Parking Assistant is acti-
vated.
▷ For stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Selector lever in position N, S, or R.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Using fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
Functional requirements
The engine starts automatically under the fol-
lowing preconditions:
▷
By releasing the brake pedal.
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on
the accelerator pedal.
Driving off
Accelerating as usual after starting the engine.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
▷ The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is open.
▷ Hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights illuminate for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
System limits
Even if driving off was not intended, the deac-
tivated engine starts up automatically in the
following situations:
▷
With excessive warming of the interior
when cooling is turned on.
▷ With excessive cooling of the interior when
heating is turned on.
▷ When window condensation is possible and
automatic climate control is switched on.
▷ Without mild hybrid technology:
In case of a steering operation.
▷ When changing selector lever position from
D or P.
▷ In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat-
tery.
▷ When starting an oil level measurement.
Deactivating the system manually
Principle
The engine is not automatically switched off.
Seite 119
Driving
CONTROLS
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The engine is started during an automatic en-
gine stop.
Without mild hybrid technology: via
button
Press the button.
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop
function is deactivated.
▷ LED off: Auto Start/Stop function is ena-
bled.
Without mild hybrid technology: via
iDrive
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "Auto Start/Stop"
6. Select the desired setting.
Via selector lever position
The Auto Start/Stop function is also disabled
in selector lever position S.
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deacti-
vated in SPORT driving mode of the Driving
Dynamics Control.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
If the engine stops automatically, the vehicle
can be parked safely, for example to leave it.
1. Press the Start/Stop button.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged au-
tomatically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func-
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea-
sons, for instance if no driver is detected.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. You may con-
tinue driving. Have the vehicle checked by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Steptronic transmission
Principle
The Steptronic transmission is the vehicle's
automatic transmission. With shift paddles, it
offers the option of manual shifting if needed.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehi-
cle against rolling away, e.g. by applying the
parking brake.
Seite 120
CONTROLS
Driving
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Selector lever positions
Gear position D
Selector lever position for normal driving. All
gears for forward travel are activated automat-
ically.
R reverse
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without
power, for instance in car washes, in selector
lever position N.
Parking position P
General information
Selector lever position, for instance for parking
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive
in selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
P is engaged automatically
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-
cally in situations such as the following:
▷
After drive-ready state is switched off, if se-
lector lever position R, D, or S is engaged.
▷ After standby is switched off, if selector
lever position N is engaged.
▷ The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is opened, without pressing
the brake pedal, while the vehicle is station-
ary and selector lever position D, S, or R is
engaged.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se-
lector lever position P is engaged and the
parking brake is engaged. Otherwise, the vehi-
cle may begin to move.
Additional information:
Parking brake, refer to page 127.
Engaging selector lever positions
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a gear position or reverse, main-
tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to drive off.
Functional requirements
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible
to change from selector lever position P to an-
other selector lever position.
The selection lever position P cannot be
changed until all technical prerequisites are
met.
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R
1.
Fasten driver's seat belt.
2. Tilt or pull the selector lever into the desired
direction, past a resistance point, if needed.
The selector lever automatically returns to
the center position when released.
Seite 121
Driving
CONTROLS
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Engaging selector lever position P
Press button P.
The transmission lock is engaged.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to
roll without its own power for a short distance,
for instance in a car wash or to be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en-
gaged when standby state is switched off.
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk
of damage to property. Do not switch off
standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g.,
in a car wash.
1.
Switch on drive-ready state while pressing
on the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake and
switch off Automatic Hold.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Engage selector lever position N.
5. Switch off drive-ready state.
In this way, standby state remains switched
on, and a Check Control message is dis-
played.
The vehicle can roll.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-
cally after approximately 35 minutes.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able
to change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed.
Additional information:
Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock,
refer to page 123.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re-
sistance point at the full throttle position.
S Sport mode
Principle
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for sportier han-
dling. The transmission, for instance shifts up
later and the shifting times are shorter.
Activating the Sport program
Pull the selector lever from selector lever posi-
tion D to D/S.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti-
vated.
Seite 122
CONTROLS
Driving
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Ending the Sport program
Pull the selector lever to D/S.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is
displayed, for example P.
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
General information
Unlock the transmission lock electroni-
cally, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of a
hazardous area in the event of a malfunction.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, secure
the vehicle against rolling away, for instance
with a wheel chock.
Engaging selector lever position N
1.
Quickly press the Start/Stop button three
times without stepping on the brake.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the selector lever to position N.
An appropriate Check Control message is
displayed.
Position N is indicated on the selector lever.
4. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous
area and secure it against rolling away.
Shift paddles
Principle
The shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to change gears manually.
General information
Shifting
The vehicle only shifts at suitable RPM and
road speeds.
Even in manual mode, the transmission shifts
automatically in certain situations, e.g., when
speed limits are reached.
Temporary manual mode
In selector lever position D, pulling a shift pad-
dle switches into manual mode temporarily.
The engaged gear is also displayed in the in-
strument cluster, for instance D1.
After conservative driving in manual mode
without acceleration or shifting via the shift
paddles for a certain amount of time, the
transmission switches back to automatic
mode.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:
▷ Pull and hold the right shift paddle until D is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
pull the left shift paddle.
Continuous manual mode
In Sport program S, pulling a shift paddle
switches to manual mode M permanently.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance M1.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:
▷
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until S is
displayed on the instrument cluster.
▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
pull the left shift paddle.
▷ Pull the selector lever to D/S.
When M2 is set manually while the vehicle is
stationary, the transmission will no longer shift
back to M1. This shift behavior is maintained
until M1 is engaged manually or manual mode
M is exited.
Seite 123
Driving
CONTROLS
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Shifting
▷ Upshifting: pull the right shift paddle.
▷ Downshifting: pull left shift paddle.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in-
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Advanced mode
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Step-
tronic Sport transmission offers an advanced
mode with adapted shift characteristics.
▷ Automatic downshift to lowest possible
gear.
If the left shift paddle is pulled and held, the
Steptronic transmission automatically shifts
down to the lowest possible gear.
▷ Avoid automatic upshifting in manual
mode.
In manual mode, the Steptronic transmis-
sion does not shift up automatically when
speed limits are reached.
▷ There is no downshifting for kickdown.
Enabling advanced mode
Advanced mode is active in manual mode.
"SPORT": The driving mode must be selected
and configured depending on vehicle equip-
ment.
Launch Control
Principle
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on roads with good traction under dry sur-
rounding conditions.
General information
Using Launch Control causes premature com-
ponent wear since this function represents a
very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not turn the steering wheel when driving off
with Launch Control.
Do not use Launch Control when breaking in
the vehicle.
Additional information:
Break-in, refer to page 270.
Functional requirement
Launch Control can be used when the engine
is at operating temperature. The engine is at
operating temperature after an uninterrupted
trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.
Driving off with Launch Control
1.
Turn on drive-ready state.
2. Press the button.
3. Activate TRACTION on the control display.
4. Engage selector lever position S.
5. With the left foot, press down forcefully on
the brake.
6. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throt-
tle position, kickdown.
A destination flag is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
Seite 124
CONTROLS
Driving
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
7. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait
briefly until the engine speed is constant.
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.
8. Release the brake within 3 seconds after
the destination flag illuminates.
The vehicle accelerates.
Upshifting occurs automatically as long as
the destination flag is displayed and the ac-
celerator pedal is not released.
Repeated use during a trip
After Launch Control has been used, the trans-
mission must cool down for a short time before
Launch Control can be used again. Launch
Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions
when used again.
After using Launch Control
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic
Stability Control as soon as possible.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF without
Launch Control mode.
Steptronic Sport
transmission: sprint function
Principle
Depending on the equipment, the Sprint func-
tion can be used for an upcoming acceleration
process. The Sprint function prepares the driv-
etrain for the acceleration process.
General information
When the Sprint function is activated, the re-
sponse characteristics of the vehicle will be-
come more dynamic.
Activating
1. Keep the left shift paddle pulled until
SPRINT is displayed in the instrument clus-
ter.
▷ The transmission shifts down to the
lowest possible gear and switches to
manual operation M.
▷ A dynamic setting has been activated
for the drivetrain.
2. Change gears manually.
Automatic deactivation
The Sprint function is ended automatically
when driving moderately for a defined period
of time.
Manual deactivation
▷ Keep the right shift paddle pulled until
SPRINT is no longer displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
pull the left shift paddle.
▷ Press the selector lever from selector lever
position S to D.
Driving Dynamics Control
Principle
The Driving Dynamics Control influences,
among other things, the vehicle's driving dy-
namics.
The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the
situation using various driving modes.
General information
The following systems may be affected, for in-
stance:
▷
Drivetrain.
▷ Chassis.
▷ Steering.
Seite 125
Driving
CONTROLS
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
▷ Cruise control.
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Button Driving mode
SPORT
SPORT PLUS
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
COMFORT
ECO PRO
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selected driving mode is
displayed in the instrument clus-
ter.
Activating/deactivating drive modes
Press the button for the desired drive mode
repeatedly until the desired drive mode is dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
When changing the drive mode, the current
drive mode is deactivated.
Driving modes in detail
COMFORT
The COMFORT driving mode is a balanced
setting between sporty and consumption-opti-
mized driving.
SPORT
The SPORT driving mode is a dynamic setting
for more agility with an optimized suspension.
SPORT PLUS
The SPORT PLUS driving mode is a dynamic
setting for maximum agility with an adjusted
drive.
ECO PRO
In ECO PRO driving mode, consumption is op-
timized.
INDIVIDUAL configuration
General information
For some driving modes, there is another
mode that can be adjusted individually.
The individual configuration set last is acti-
vated directly when the driving mode is called
up again.
Configuring and resetting
E.g., ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL drive mode:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
6. Select the desired setting.
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
Seite 126
CONTROLS
Driving
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Enabling INDIVIDUAL
Press the button for the desired driving mode
several times.
Parking brake
Principle
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-
cle from rolling away when it is parked.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Parking brake
Setting the parking brake
With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.
The LED illuminates.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates red.
The parking brake is set.
While driving
Use while driving serves as an emergency
braking function.
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle
brakes hard while the switch is being
pulled.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,
and the brake lights illuminate.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Seite 127
Driving
CONTROLS
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The parking brake is engaged when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
With Emergency Stop Assistant
Briefly pull the switch to trigger the
Emergency Stop Assistant.
Additional information:
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 185.
Releasing the parking brake
Releasing the parking brake manually
1.
Turn on drive-ready state.
2. Press the switch while stepping on
the brake pedal or selector lever position P
is set.
The LED and the indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Releasing the parking brake
automatically
The parking brake is released automatically
when you drive off.
The LED and the indicator light go out.
Malfunction
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, se-
cure the vehicle so that it does not roll away
before you exit.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in-
stance with a wheel chock, after getting out of
the vehicle.
After a power interruption
To reestablish parking brake operability after
a power interruption, an initialization may be
required.
1.
Turn on standby state.
2. Pull the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is
set and then push.
This process may take a few seconds. Some
mechanical sounds associated with this proc-
ess are normal.
The indicator light is no longer illumi-
nated as soon as the parking brake is
ready for operation again.
Automatic Hold
Principle
Automatic Hold assists the driver by automati-
cally setting and releasing the brake, such as
when moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehi-
cle from rolling back when driving off.
General information
The parking brake is automatically engaged
under the following conditions:
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehi-
cle is stationary.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand-
still using the parking brake.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
Seite 128
CONTROLS
Driving
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
NOTICE
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold
engages the parking brake and prevents the
vehicle from rolling in a car wash. There is a
risk of damage to property. Deactivate Auto-
matic Hold prior to entering the car wash.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Automatic Hold
Activating Automatic Hold
1.
Turn on drive-ready state.
2. Press the button.
The LED illuminates.
The indicator light illuminates green.
Automatic Hold is activated.
After every vehicle restart, the last se-
lected setting is active.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
Automatic Hold is activated and the driver’s
door is closed.
After stopping, the vehicle is automat-
ically secured against rolling away as
soon as the indicator light illuminates
green.
Driving off
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.
The brake is released automatically and the
indicator light of the parking brake is no longer
illuminated.
Seite 129
Driving
CONTROLS
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Automatic parking brake application
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle
is exited.
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set automatically if
the drive-ready state was switched off while
the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is
temporarily deactivated in this case.
Deactivate Automatic Hold
Press the button.
The LED goes out.
The indicator light goes out.
Automatic Hold is switched off.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
also press on the brake pedal when switching
off.
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors so that the turn signal
lamps on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Flashing
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.
Brief flashing
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
High beams,
headlight flasher
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.
Seite 130
CONTROLS
Driving
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams illuminate when the low
beams are switched on.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates when the high
beams are turned on.
Window wiper system
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded-away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.
NOTICE
The wiper blades can wear out or become
damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry
window for a longer period of time. The wiper
motor can overheat. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Do not use the wipers when
the window is dry.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.
There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost
the windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
Turning on window wiper system
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Rain sensor, position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When the journey is interrupted with the win-
dow wiper system turned on: when the journey
continues, the wipers resume at their previous
speed.
Seite 131
Driving
CONTROLS
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Turning off the window wiper
system and flick wipe
Press the lever down.
▷ Turning off: press the lever down until it
reaches the 0 position.
▷ Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0
position.
The lever automatically returns to its 0 po-
sition when released.
Rain sensor
Principle
The rain sensor automatically controls the
wiper operation depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in car washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti-
vate the rain sensor in car washes.
Activating rain sensor
Press lever up once from the 0 position, ar-
row 1.
Wiping operation is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not
start.
Deactivating rain sensor
Press lever back into the 0 position.
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity
of the rain sensor.
▷
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.
▷ Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.
Seite 132
CONTROLS
Driving
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Windshield washer system
Safety information
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window
at low temperatures and obstruct the view.
There is a risk of accident. Only use the
washer systems if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if
needed.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the washer pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not use the washer system when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The washer fluid is sprayed onto the wind-
shield directly in front of the wiper blade when
the wiper moves upward.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Principle
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be
folded out from the windshield, which is impor-
tant, for instance, when changing the wiper
blades or for folding away under frosty condi-
tions.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded-away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.
There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost
the windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
Seite 133
Driving
CONTROLS
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Folding out the wipers
1. Turn on standby state.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down until
the wipers stop in a nearly vertical position.
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the
windshield.
Folding in the wipers
1.
Fold the wipers back in onto the windshield.
2. Switch on standby state and press and
hold the wiper lever down again.
Wipers return to their resting position and
are ready again for operation.
Seite 134
CONTROLS
Driving
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Instrument cluster
Principle
The instrument cluster comprises various digi-
tal displays, e.g., a speedometer, time, range,
temperatures as well as indicator and warning
lights.
General information
The layout of the instrument cluster adapts to
the respective driving mode. The positions of
some displays may vary, e.g., the selector lever
display.
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's
Manual.
Safety information
Warning
If the displays on the instrument cluster fail,
do not use the vehicle. There may be a risk
of accidents or risk of damage to property.
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe man-
ner. If drive-ready state is switched off and
on again, the malfunction may be rectified
and it may be possible to continue driving.
If the malfunction cannot be corrected, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Overview
Instrument cluster
Display ranges on the instrument
cluster
1 Speedometer
2 Driver assistance systems 198
3 Driver Attention Camera 193
4 Check Control 145
Selector lever display 120
Gear shift indicator 146
Selection lists 146
Using ECO PRO efficiently 277
5 Power gauge 147
Tachometer 147
6 Engine temperature 148
Seite 135
Displays
CONTROLS
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
7 Outside temperature 148
8 Central display range 149
Shift lights 149
9 Drive mode 125
10 Speed Limit Info 198
Speed Limit Assistant 212
11 Time 152
12 Fuel gauge 153
Range 153
Additional information:
Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 138.
Operating elements on the steering
wheel
Operating
element
Function
Display the menu bar on the
instrument cluster.
Press the corresponding arrow
key to move the selection.
Turn knurled wheel: scroll se-
lection up or down.
Press knurled wheel: confirm
selection.
Configuring the layout
In COMFORT drive mode, the layout in the in-
strument cluster can be individually configured
and displayed.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
2. "LAYOUT"
Select the menu using the arrow buttons on
the steering wheel where applicable.
3. Select the desired setting using the thumb-
wheel on the steering wheel.
Settings
Specific displays can be configured individu-
ally, e.g., a second actual speed.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument cluster"
5. Select the desired setting.
Live Vehicle
Principle
Live Vehicle is a virtual representation of your
own vehicle with different information, e.g., ve-
hicle status or energy flow indicators.
General information
Appropriate information is shown on the con-
trol display depending on the driving situation.
Fault statuses are not taken into account.
Adaptive content
The following content is displayed in alternat-
ing order and, if necessary, depending on the
selected drive mode:
▷
Vehicle status, refer to page 153.
▷ Current driving condition, refer to page 154.
▷ Sport displays, refer to page 154.
▷ Driving style analysis, refer to page 278.
▷ Trip data, refer to page 150.
Static information
The following information may be shown per-
manently on the control display regardless of
the driving situation and driving mode set.
Seite 136
CONTROLS
Displays
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Vehicle status.
▷ Trip data.
Adjusting the display
In the Live Vehicle menu, you can choose be-
tween an adaptive display and static content.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Live Vehicle"
4. "Content"
5. Select the desired setting.
BMW Head-up display
Principle
The Head-up display projects important infor-
mation in the driver's field of view, for instance
the speed.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the height of
the Head-up display can be stored using the
memory function.
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up
display in the Vehicle Care chapter.
Overview
Head-up display views are projected onto the
windshield using protective glass. The protec-
tive glass is located between the steering
wheel and windshield.
Configuring a view
The views for the Head-up display can be set
independently of the display on the instrument
cluster, e.g., a reduced view.
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
2. "HEAD-UP"
Select the menu using the arrow buttons on
the steering wheel where applicable.
3. Select the desired setting using the thumb-
wheel on the steering wheel.
Display
Turning the Head-up display on/off
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Head-up display"
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up display:
▷
Vehicle speed.
▷ Navigation instructions.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Sport displays.
▷ Shift lights.
▷ Lists and messages.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Seite 137
Displays
CONTROLS
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Visibility of the display
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
display is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Objects on the protective glass of the
Head-up display.
▷ Dust or dirt on the protective glass of the
Head-up display.
▷ Windshield dirty on inside or outside.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet road.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic set-
tings checked by an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Settings
Individual settings can be entered for the
Head-up display, such as for the height, bright-
ness or illustration. In addition, individual dis-
plays in the Head-up display can be set up
separately such as for Driver Assistance.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. Select the desired setting.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape and coating of the special wind-
shield enable the system to function.
If damaged, have the special windshield re-
placed by an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Indicator/warning lights
Principle
The indicator and warning lights on the instru-
ment cluster show the status of some vehicle
functions. The indicator and warning lights in-
dicate faults in monitored systems.
General information
The indicator and warning lights can illuminate
in various combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and illuminate temporarily when
drive-ready state is turned on.
Red lights
Seat belt reminder
Seat belt on the driver's seat is not
buckled.
Additional information:
Seat belt reminder, refer to page 106.
Airbag system
Warning light illuminates briefly: Indi-
cates that the entire airbag system and
seat belt tensioners are operational
when drive-ready state is switched on.
Warning light illuminates continuously: There
is a malfunction. Have the vehicle checked im-
mediately by an authorized service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Additional information:
Airbags, refer to page 165.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
Additional information:
Parking brake, refer to page 127.
Seite 138
CONTROLS
Displays
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Brake system
Brake linings are worn or there is a
malfunction in the brake system.
The braking assistance may not be op-
erational. A higher pedal force may be
required for braking.
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Emergency Stop Assistant
The Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-
gered.
Additional information:
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 185.
Pedestrian Warning
Warning light illuminates: Risk of col-
lision with a pedestrian has been
detected. Increased awareness is re-
quired.
Warning light flashes and acoustic signal
sounds: Collision with a pedestrian is immi-
nent. Intervene immediately by braking or
make an evasive maneuver.
Additional information:
Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Mitiga-
tion, refer to page 174.
Forward Collision Warning
Warning light illuminates: Risk of colli-
sion, e.g., with a vehicle, is detected.
Increased awareness is required.
Warning light flashes and acoustic signal
sounds: Risk of imminent collision with a vehi-
cle is detected. Intervene immediately by brak-
ing or make an evasive maneuver.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Warning with light braking
function, refer to page 173.
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle
detected from the right
Warning light illuminates: Risk of colli-
sion with vehicle crossing from the right
has been detected. Increased aware-
ness is required.
Warning light flashes and acoustic signal
sounds: Collision with a crossing vehicle is im-
minent. Intervene immediately by braking or
make an evasive maneuver.
Additional information:
Intersection warning with City light braking
function, refer to page 175.
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle
detected from the left
Warning light illuminates: Risk of colli-
sion with vehicle crossing from the left
has been detected. Increased aware-
ness is required.
Warning light flashes and acoustic signal
sounds: Collision with a crossing vehicle is im-
minent. Intervene immediately by braking or
make an evasive maneuver.
Additional information:
Intersection warning with City light braking
function, refer to page 175.
Intersection warning: vehicle from
undetectable direction of travel
Warning light illuminates: Risk of col-
lision with vehicle from unrecogniza-
ble direction of travel. Increased aware-
ness is required.
Warning light flashes and acoustic signal
sounds: Collision is imminent. Intervene imme-
diately by braking or make an evasive maneu-
ver.
Additional information:
Intersection warning with City light braking
function, refer to page 175.
Seite 139
Displays
CONTROLS
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Active Cruise Control with Distance
Control
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-
nal sounds: Brake and evade as neces-
sary.
Additional information:
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re-
fer to page 205.
Steering Assistant
Depending on national-market version:
The warning light flashes or illumi-
nates. A signal sounds:
The system is switched off.
Additional information:
Steering Assistant, refer to page 215.
Steering and Lane Control Assistant:
hands not on steering wheel
Warning light illuminates and acoustic
signal sounds:
Hands are not grasping the steering
wheel. Yellow: System interruption is immi-
nent.
The system reduces the speed to a standstill if
applicable.
It is possible that the system will not execute
any supporting steering movements.
Grab the steering wheel with your hands.
Additional information:
Steering Assistant, refer to page 215.
Yellow lights
Antilock Braking System
The system may not be operational.
The Antilock Braking System system is
not available.
The ability to steer may be restricted during full
braking.
Have checked immediately by an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Additional information:
Antilock Braking System, refer to page 194.
Steering Assistant
Warning light illuminates and acoustic
signal may sound: A system interrup-
tion is imminent.
Warning light flashes: Lane boundary has
been crossed.
Additional information:
Steering Assistant, refer to page 215.
Steering and Lane Control Assistant:
hands not on steering wheel
Hands are not grasping the steering
wheel. The system is still active.
Grab the steering wheel with your
hands.
Additional information:
Steering Assistant, refer to page 215.
Forward Collision Mitigation is limited
or has malfunctioned
Depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version: Function re-
striction detected, e.g., due to system
limits of the cameras or because the system
has malfunctioned. You may continue driving.
If necessary, follow the instructions from Check
Control messages.
Additional information:
Seite 140
CONTROLS
Displays
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to
page 170.
Front Collision Warning switched off
Depending on the equipment and na-
tional-market version: the system is
turned off.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 170.
Dynamic Stability Control
Warning light pulsates: Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control is regulating the drive and
brake forces. The vehicle is stabilized.
Reduce the vehicle speed and adjust your driv-
ing style to the road conditions.
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability
Control has malfunctioned or is initializing.
Driving stabilization is restricted or has failed.
If the warning light illuminates continuously,
have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Additional information:
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 195.
The Dynamic Stability Control
deactivated or the Dynamic Traction
Control activated
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated
or Dynamic Traction Control is acti-
vated.
Additional information:
▷
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 195.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control, refer to
page 196.
Flat tire monitor
Warning light illuminates: Flat Tire
Monitor is indicating a flat tire or tire
pressure loss.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Additional information:
Flat tire monitor, refer to page 308.
Tire pressure monitor
Warning light illuminates: Tire Pressure
Monitor is indicating a flat tire or tire
pressure loss. Follow the information in
the Check Control message.
Warning light flashes then illuminates continu-
ously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot
be detected.
▷ Fault caused by systems or devices with
the same radio frequency: after leaving the
area of the interference, the system auto-
matically becomes active again.
▷ In the case of tires with special appro-
val: the tire pressure monitor was unable
to complete the reset. Reset the system
again.
▷ Wheel without wheel electronics installed:
Have it checked by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by
an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Additional information:
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 300.
Steering system
The steering system may be faulty.
Have the vehicle checked by an author-
ized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 141
Displays
CONTROLS
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Emissions
▷ The warning light illuminates:
Worsening emissions, e.g., due to
an incorrectly fitted fuel cap. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos-
sible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir-
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir-
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the ve-
hicle checked immediately; otherwise, se-
rious engine misfiring within a brief pe-
riod can seriously damage emission control
components, in particular the catalytic con-
verter.
Additional information:
Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics, refer to
page 326.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal is on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
Additional information:
Turn signal, refer to page 130.
Parking lights
Parking lights are switched on.
Additional information:
Parking lights, low beams, refer to
page 157.
Low beams
Low beams are switched on.
Additional information:
Parking lights, low beams, refer to page
157.
Automatic High Beam Assistant
Low beams are switched on and the
Automatic High Beam Assistant is acti-
vated.
High beams are switched on and off automati-
cally depending on the traffic situation.
Additional information:
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to
page 160.
Lane departure warning
Depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version:
The indicator light illuminates: the sys-
tem is switched on. At least one lane boundary
has been detected on one side of the vehicle.
The system is ready to intervene and issue
warnings.
Indicator light flashes: the system is perform-
ing a steering intervention.
Additional information:
Lane departure warning, refer to page 177.
Automatic Hold: vehicle is held
automatically
Automatic Hold is ready to use. The
vehicle is automatically held in place
when it is stationary.
Additional information:
Automatic Hold, refer to page 128.
Automatic Hold: vehicle secured
against rolling away
The vehicle is automatically secured
against rolling away after stopping.
Additional information:
Automatic Hold, refer to page 128.
Seite 142
CONTROLS
Displays
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Manual Speed Limiter
The indicator light illuminates: the sys-
tem is switched on.
The indicator light flashes: the set
speed limit has been exceeded.
Additional information:
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to page 200.
Cruise Control
The system is active.
Additional information:
Cruise control, refer to page 202.
Active Cruise Control with Distance
Control
Indicator light illuminates: Vehicle has
been detected ahead of you. The vehi-
cle icon goes out if no vehicle in front is
detected.
Indicator lamp is flashing: vehicle ahead is
driving off.
Additional information:
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re-
fer to page 205.
Speed Limit Assistant activated
Depending on vehicle equipment, the
indicator light illuminates green, to-
gether with the icon for a cruise control
system. Speed Limit Assistant is active and
detected speed limits can be applied manually
for the displayed system.
Additional information:
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 212.
Speed Limit Assist: Apply speed limit
The detected speed limit can be ap-
plied with the SET button. As soon as
the speed limit has been applied, a green
checkmark is displayed.
Additional information:
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 212.
Steering Assistant
The system is activated and helps to
keep the vehicle in the lane.
Additional information:
Steering Assistant, refer to page 215.
Automatic Lane Change Assistant:
lane change in progress
Arrow icon for lane change green: the
system carries out a lane change.
Additional information:
Automatic Lane Change Assistant, refer to
page 220.
Automatic Lane Change Assistant:
lane change not possible
Gray line for lane boundary on the ap-
propriate side: system detected a lane
change request. Lane change not cur-
rently possible.
Additional information:
Automatic Lane Change Assistant, refer to
page 220.
Automatic Lane Change Assistant:
functional requirements not met
Depending on the national-market ver-
sion:
Arrow icon for lane change gray: lane
change not possible; functional requirements
not met.
Additional information:
Automatic Lane Change Assistant, refer to
page 220.
Seite 143
Displays
CONTROLS
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
The system is active.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to
page 218.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
Alternative display, depending on vehi-
cle equipment.
The system is active.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to page 218.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams have been switched on.
Additional information:
▷ High beams, refer to page 130.
▷ Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to
page 160.
Gray lights
Seat belt reminder
Seat belt on the passenger seat or an-
other seat in the vehicle is not buckled.
Additional information:
Seat belts, refer to page 104.
Manual Speed Limiter
The system is interrupted.
Additional information:
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to
page 200.
Cruise Control
The system is interrupted.
Additional information:
Cruise control, refer to page 202.
Active Cruise Control with Distance
Control
Indicator light is illuminated: the system
is interrupted.
Indicator light flashes: Conditions are
not adequate for the system to work. The sys-
tem was deactivated but applies the brakes
until you actively resume control by pressing
on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Additional information:
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re-
fer to page 205.
Steering Assistant
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering movements.
System activates automatically as soon
as all function conditions are fulfilled.
Additional information:
Steering Assistant, refer to page 215.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
The system is interrupted and will acti-
vate automatically as soon as all func-
tional requirements are met.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to page 218.
White lights
Cruise Control with Distance Control
No Distance Control displayed since
the accelerator pedal is being pressed.
Additional information:
Seite 144
CONTROLS
Displays
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re-
fer to page 205.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
The system can be activated.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to
page 218.
Check Control
Principle
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the
monitored systems.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
text messages in the instrument cluster and, if
applicable, in the Head-up display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and
a text message may appear on the control dis-
play.
Hiding Check Control messages
An arrow icon next to the Check Control
message indicates whether the Check Control
message can be hidden.
To hide Check Control messages, press
the left arrow button on the steering
wheel.
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the fault
is eliminated. If several faults occur at once,
the messages are displayed consecutively.
Permanently displayed Check Control mes-
sages can be hidden temporarily. These mes-
sages are automatically displayed again after
approx. 8 seconds.
Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The
Check Control messages are stored and can
be displayed again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Check Control"
5. Select the desired text message.
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or stored.
Text messages
Text messages in combination with an icon
in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con-
trol message and the meaning of the indica-
tor/warning lights.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as the cause of a
fault or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
With urgent text messages, the added text will
be automatically displayed on the control dis-
play.
Depending on the Check Control message, fur-
ther help can be selected.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Seite 145
Displays
CONTROLS
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Check Control"
5. Select the desired text message.
6. Select the desired setting.
Messages after trip completion
Certain messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after drive-ready state is
switched off.
Selection lists
Principle
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used
for certain functions in the instrument cluster or
the Head-up display.
▷ Entertainment source.
▷ Current audio source.
▷ List of most recent telephone calls.
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open
on the control display.
Displaying and using the list
The selection lists can be displayed and op-
erated using the operating elements on the
steering wheel.
Control ele-
ments
Function
Turn the knurled wheel: display
the entertainment list or scroll
up or down in the list.
Press knurled wheel: confirm
selection.
Press the corresponding arrow
key to change the entertain-
ment source.
Show list of most recent tele-
phone calls.
Display
An example:
To change the track or entertainment source
after bringing up the entertainment list, use the
arrow buttons on the steering wheel. Press the
thumbwheel to confirm the selection.
Turn the thumbwheel up or down to select the
desired entry in the list. Press the thumbwheel
to confirm the selection.
Depending on the equipment version, the list
in the instrument cluster may differ from the
illustration.
Gear shift indicator
Principle
The shift point indicator recommends the gear
that best suits the current driving situation. Us-
ing the optimal gear supports an efficient driv-
ing style.
General information
The gear shift indicator is active in manual
mode M depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version.
Displays
Information on upshifting, downshifting, or en-
gaged gear is displayed on the instrument
cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Seite 146
CONTROLS
Displays
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Example Description
In continuous manual mode M:
Optimal gear is engaged.
With shift paddles: temporary
manual mode.
With shift paddles: Sport program.
Shift information.
Additional information:
Shift paddles, refer to page 123.
Power gauge
Principle
The power gauge indicates the currently
drawn drive power as a percentage.
Enabling/disabling the power gauge
The power display or tachometer is shown de-
pending on the driving mode selected or the
individual configuration of the layout.
Display
Needle in range of arrow 1: display for energy
recovery such as while decelerating CHARGE.
Needle in range of arrow 2: the drive power in
percent, POWER.
Reduced drive power
The available power may be reduced due to
certain factors. The power gauge is automati-
cally adjusted accordingly.
In addition, the icons on the power gauge and
tachometer indicate reduced drive power.
Icon Description
Blue icon: cold drivetrain.
White icon: increased drive sys-
tem temperature, for instance
due to sustained or high
power demand when driving
on mountain roads.
Depending on vehicle equip-
ment and national-market ver-
sion:
Drive power limitation defined
via the BMW Digital Key.
System-related functional limi-
tation.
A Check Control message is
displayed in addition where ap-
plicable.
Tachometer
General information
Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In
this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect
the engine.
Activating/deactivating the
tachometer
The tachometer is displayed depending on the
selected drive mode or the individually config-
ured layout.
Seite 147
Displays
CONTROLS
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The tachometer display changes depending
on the selected driving mode.
Reduced engine speed range
The available engine speed range may be re-
duced due certain factors such as a cold drive
system. The tachometer display is automati-
cally adjusted depending on the available en-
gine speed range.
Standby state and drive-
ready state
OFF is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
switched off and standby state
switched on.
READY is displayed in the
instrument cluster. The Auto
Start/Stop function is ready for
automatic engine start.
Additional information:
▷
Operating condition of the vehicle, refer to
page 40.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 118.
Engine temperature
Display
▷
Cold engine: the needle
is in the blue temperature
range, close to the stop of
the temperature display, and
the word WARM-UP is dis-
played.
Drive at moderate RPM and
vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating temperature: the needle
is in the middle or in the left half of the
temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the needle is in the red temper-
ature range. In addition, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Additional information:
Coolant level, refer to page 322.
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
A red indicator light is displayed.
Outside temperature
General information
If the indicator drops to +37℉/+3℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Safety information
Warning
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of the road. There
is a risk of accident. Modify your driving style
to the weather conditions at low tempera-
tures.
Seite 148
CONTROLS
Displays
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Shift lights
Principle
Shift lights indicate the suitable upshift point at
which optimal acceleration can be achieved.
General information
The shift lights are active in manual mode M
and can be displayed on the instrument cluster
or on the Head-up display in combination with
the tachometer.
Functional requirements
▷ "SPORT": The driving mode must be se-
lected depending on vehicle equipment.
▷ To display the shift lights on the Head-up
display, select Sport view.
▷ Manual mode M must be activated.
▷ Advanced mode must be activated.
Additional information:
Advanced mode, refer to page 124.
Display
Successive fields illuminating yellow indicate
an upcoming shift point.
▷
Shift when all fields illuminate red at the
latest.
▷ When the maximum RPM is reached, the
entire display flashes red and the fuel sup-
ply is interrupted in order to protect the en-
gine.
Central display range
Displayable content
The following settings can be selected:
▷ Reduced display.
▷ Trip data, refer to page 150.
▷ Assisted View, refer to page 151.
▷ Navigation system route preview.
▷ Navigation system map view.
▷ G-Meter, refer to page 152.
▷ Entertainment.
▷ Android Auto©.
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, select functions of
a compatible smartphone can also be dis-
played, e.g., map views.
Some contents for the central display range
can also be configured as a view in the Head-
up display.
Additional information:
Head-up display, refer to page 137.
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
Configuring the central display
range
The content of the central display range on the
instrument cluster can be configured individu-
ally, for instance the trip data display.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
2. "CONTENT"
Select the menu using the arrow buttons on
the steering wheel where applicable.
3. Select the desired setting using the thumb-
wheel on the steering wheel.
Seite 149
Displays
CONTROLS
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Trip data
Principle
The trip data display provides various informa-
tion about the trip, e.g., average consumption
or trip distance.
General information
The trip data can be displayed on the control
display and in the instrument cluster.
Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle
menu, the trip data is shown dynamically or
permanently on the control display.
The values can be displayed and reset de-
pending on different intervals.
Display on the control display
General information
The following trip data is shown on the control
display:
▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data.
▷ Average fuel consumption depending
on the configured interval.
▷ Travel time depending on the config-
ured interval.
▷ Distance traveled depending on the
configured interval.
▷ Distance traveled in Coasting mode.
Displaying trip data continuously
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Live Vehicle"
4. "Content"
5. "Trip data"
Display in the instrument cluster
Information on consumption and distance cov-
ered can be displayed in the instrument clus-
ter.
▷ Current consumption, arrow 1.
▷ Average consumption, arrow 2.
▷ Distance traveled depending on the config-
ured interval, arrow 3.
The icon is displayed when the vehicle
is in Coasting mode.
▷ Total mileage, arrow 4.
Current consumption
The current fuel consumption display allows
you to check the current fuel consumption, e.g.,
to drive economically and in an environmen-
tally-friendly manner.
Average consumption
The average fuel consumption is displayed de-
pending on how the intervals for displaying trip
data are configured.
Adjusting the display of the trip data
The intervals for the display of the trip data
in the instrument cluster and on the control
display are adjustable.
Using the button on the left steering column
switch:
1.
Press the button.
Seite 150
CONTROLS
Displays
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The trip data is displayed.
2. Press button repeatedly until the desired
setting is displayed.
Via iDrive:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Time period for trip data"
5. "Values"
6. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Since start of trip ( )": the values are au-
tomatically reset approx. four hours af-
ter the vehicle has come to a standstill.
▷ "Since last refuel ( )": the values are au-
tomatically reset after refueling with a
larger quantity of fuel.
▷ "Since factory": the values since the
time of the factory delivery are dis-
played.
▷ "Since Individual ( )": the values since
the last manual reset are displayed. The
values can be reset at any time.
Resetting average values manually
The following interval can be reset manually at
any time:
"Since Individual ( )"
Using the button on the left steering column
switch:
1.
Press the button.
The trip data is displayed.
2. Press and hold the button until the values
are reset.
Via iDrive:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Time period for trip data"
5. "Reset Individual"
The average values and counters are reset.
Once the average values and counters have
been reset, the following interval is automati-
cally activated:
"Since Individual ( )"
Assisted View
Principle
With Assisted View, information on driver as-
sistance systems can be displayed on the in-
strument cluster with a vehicle animation.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
Seite 151
Displays
CONTROLS
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
General
You can configure how Assisted View is dis-
played on the central display range.
Additional information:
Central display area, refer to page 149
Display
An example with active Driver Assistance: the
indicator and warning lights for the distance
control and the Automatic Lane Change Assis-
tant indicate a lane change to the next lane.
At the same time, the lane change to the next
lane is shown with animation in the Assisted
View.
System limits
The system's detection capability is limited.
Only objects that are detected by the system
are taken into account.
The system may indicate something wrong.
Additional information:
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
G-Meter
General information
The G-Meter indicates the forces that are ap-
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction
on the vehicle occupants while driving.
The display can be configured on the central
display range of the instrument cluster.
The values are automatically reset whenever
you start a new drive.
Additional information:
Central display area, refer to page 149
Manually reseting G-Meter values
1.
Display the G-Meter on the instrument
cluster.
2. Press and hold the thumbwheel on
the steering wheel until the values are re-
set.
Date and time
Various settings can be applied for the date
and time display such as the date format.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the time zone can be set and
automatic time setting can be activated. With
automatic time setting, the time, date and, if
necessary, the time zone are updated auto-
matically.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. Select the desired settings.
Seite 152
CONTROLS
Displays
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Fuel gauge
Principle
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-
played.
General information
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to
vary.
Additional information:
Refueling, refer to page 282.
Display
An arrow beside the fuel pump
icon shows which side of the ve-
hicle the fuel filler flap is on.
The current range is displayed
as numerical value.
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Range
Principle
The range indicates the distance that can still
be covered with the current tank of fuel.
General information
The estimated range with remaining fuel is
permanently displayed on the instrument clus-
ter.
With a low remaining range, a Check Control
message is briefly displayed. A low remaining
range means that engine functions cannot al-
ways be ensured for sporty driving, e.g., when
cornering at speed.
The Check Control message appears
continuously below a range of approx.
30 miles/50 km.
Safety information
NOTICE
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the
engine may no longer have sufficient fuel.
Engine functions are not ensured anymore.
There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel
promptly.
Display
The current range is displayed
as a numerical value next to the
fuel gauge.
Setting the units of
measurement
Depending on the national-market version, you
can set the units of measurement for some
values, for instance consumption, distances,
and temperature.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Units"
5. Select the desired setting.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per-
formed for several systems, such as for Check
Control.
Seite 153
Displays
CONTROLS
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Displaying vehicle status
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
Overview
Icon Description
"Flat Tire Monitor": Status of
the flat tire monitor, refer to
page 308.
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status
of the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 300.
"Engine oil level": electronic
oil measurement, refer to
page 320.
"Check Control": displaying
stored Check Control mes-
sages, refer to page 145.
"Required services": displaying
service notifications, refer to
page 155.
Current driving condition
General information
The current driving condition is displayed dy-
namically while driving in the Live Vehicle
menu on the control display.
The following states can be displayed:
▷
Driving.
▷ Coasting mode: "EFFICIENT COASTING"
▷ "CHARGING BATTERY"
With mild hybrid technology:
▷
Adaptive recuperation.
▷ Efficient rolling with engine switched off.
Additional information:
▷
Adaptive recuperation, refer to page 278.
▷ Coasting, refer to page 279.
Functional requirements
▷ COMFORT or ECO PRO driving mode is se-
lected.
▷ The following setting is selected for Live
Vehicle:"Adaptive content"
Display
An example:
The adaptive recuperation is active, arrow 1.
The vehicle battery is charged when the vehi-
cle decelerates, arrow 2.
Sport displays
Principle
The Sport displays especially support a sporty
driving style.
Functional requirements
▷
SPORT driving mode is selected.
▷ The following setting is selected for Live
Vehicle:"Adaptive content"
Display
The sport displays are displayed in the Live
Vehicle menu on the control display.
The following information is displayed:
Seite 154
CONTROLS
Displays
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Torque.
▷ Power.
▷ Boost pressure.
▷ Engine oil temperature.
Service notifications
Principle
The function displays the service notifications
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
General information
After turning on, the next service appointment
or the distance remaining until the next servic-
ing is displayed briefly on the instrument clus-
ter.
A service advisor can read out the current
service notifications from the vehicle key.
Display
More information on the type of service re-
quired may be displayed on the control display.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Required services"
Maintenance work and legally mandated
inspections are displayed.
5. Select the desired entry.
Entering appointment dates
Dates for mandatory vehicle inspections can
be entered.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Required services"
5. "Vehicle inspection"
6. "Date:"
7. Select the desired setting.
Seite 155
Displays
CONTROLS
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Lights
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Lights and lighting
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Icon Function
Front fog lights
Exterior lighting off.
Daytime driving lights.
Parking lights.
Automatic headlight control.
Adaptive lighting functions.
Icon Function
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
Buttons on the vehicle key
Icon Function
Interior lighting.
Parts of the exterior lighting.
Pathway lighting.
Automatic headlight control
Principle
The low beams are switched on and off au-
tomatically depending on the ambient bright-
ness, for example in tunnels, in twilight or if
there is precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be turned on.
If the low beams are switched on manually, the
automatic headlight control is deactivated.
Seite 156
CONTROLS
Lights
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Activate automatic headlight control
Press the button on the light switch.
The LED in the button illuminates.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot re-
place your personal judgment of lighting condi-
tions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn
the lights on manually.
Parking lights, low-beams
and roadside parking lights
General information
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting
is automatically switched off after a period of
time.
Parking lights
General information
The parking lights can only be switched on in
the low speed range.
Turning on parking lights
Press the button on the light switch.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates.
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe-
riods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle
battery and it would then be impossible to
switch on drive-ready state.
Turning off parking lights
The following options are available to turn off
the parking lights:
▷ Press the button on the light switch.
▷ Turn on drive-ready state.
After the drive-ready state is switched on,
the automatic headlight control will be acti-
vated.
Low beams
Turning on low beams
Press the button on the light switch.
The low beams illuminate when drive-ready
state is switched on.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates.
Press the button again to switch on the low
beams when the standby state is switched on.
Turning off low beams
Depending on the national-market version, the
low beams can be turned off in the low speed
range:
▷
Press the button on the light switch.
Roadside parking lights
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-
side parking light can be switched on.
Seite 157
Lights
CONTROLS
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Button Function
Right roadside parking light on.
Left roadside parking light off.
Switching off the roadside parking light:
Press the button on the light switch or
turn on drive-ready state.
Welcome lights
Principle
The welcome light turns on automatically for
a limited period of time when approaching or
unlocking the vehicle.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the exterior
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.
Activating/deactivating welcome
light
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. Depending on the equipment, select the
following setting:
▷ "Welcome and goodbye"
When unlocking the vehicle, individual
lighting functions are turned on.
Turning on the welcome light
▷ Automatically on approach.
▷ During unlocking.
▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
with the vehicle locked.
Depending on the settings, the interior
lighting and parts of the exterior lighting will
be turned on.
The function is not available for the first
10 seconds after locking.
LED light carpet
The light source is located in the position indi-
cated.
Keep the light source clean and unobstructed.
Pathway lighting
Principle
For the pathway lighting, the exterior lighting
turns on for a certain period of time after leav-
ing the vehicle in order to illuminate the area
surrounding the vehicle.
Switching pathway lighting on
▷
After switching off the drive-ready state,
briefly push the turn signal lever forward.
▷ Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
Seite 158
CONTROLS
Lights
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Setting the duration
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.
Daytime driving lights
General information
The daytime driving lights illuminate when
drive-ready state is switched on.
Activating/deactivating daytime
driving lights
In some countries, daytime driving lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti-
vate the daytime driving lights in front.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. Depending on vehicle equipment or na-
tional-market version:
▷ "Daytime driving lights"
▷ "Rear daytime driving lights"
Adaptive lighting functions
Principle
Adaptive lighting functions enable dynamic il-
lumination of the road.
General information
The adaptive lighting functions may consist of
one system or multiple systems, depending on
the equipment version:
▷
Adaptive Light Control.
▷ Cornering light.
Activating the adaptive lighting
functions
Press the button on the light switch.
The LED in the button illuminates.
The adaptive lighting functions are active
when the drive-ready state is switched on.
Adaptive Light Control
General information
Depending on the steering-wheel angle and
other parameters, the light from the headlight
follows the course of the road.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap-
tive Light Control does not swivel to the oppo-
site lane when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Cornering light
Principle
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional cornering
light is switched on that illuminates the inside
of the curve when the vehicle is moving below
a certain speed.
General information
The cornering light is automatically switched
on depending on the steering-wheel angle or,
where applicable, the use of turn signals.
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights
may be automatically switched on regardless
of the steering-wheel angle.
Seite 159
Lights
CONTROLS
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Adaptive headlight range
control
The adaptive headlight range control feature
balances out acceleration and braking proc-
esses as well as the vehicle load conditions in
order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic.
Automatic High Beam
Assistant
Principle
The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects
other road users early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation.
General information
The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures
that the high beams are switched on, when-
ever the traffic situation allows. In the low
speed range, the high beams are not switched
on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cit-
ies.
The high beams can be switched on and off
manually at any time.
Functional requirements
▷
Automatic headlight control is activated.
▷ Low beams are switched on.
Activating Automatic High Beam
Assistant
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
The headlights are automatically changed be-
tween low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster illuminates when the sys-
tem switches on the high beams.
Interruption of the journey with activated Au-
tomatic High Beam Assistant: the Automatic
High Beam Assistant remains activated when
continuing the journey.
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is de-
activated when manually switching the high
beams on and off.
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis-
tant, press the button on the turn signal lever.
Seite 160
CONTROLS
Lights
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Deactivating Automatic High Beam
Assistant
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Sensitivity of the Automatic High
Beam Assistant
General information
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam
Assistant can be adjusted.
Safety information
Warning
If adjustments have been made or the sen-
sitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic
may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk
of accident. If adjustments have been made
and the sensitivity has been modified, make
sure that oncoming traffic is not momentarily
blinded. Switch off the high beams manually
if required.
Functional requirements
▷
Setting at standstill only.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
▷ Light is turned off.
Increasing sensitivity
Push the turn signal lever to the front for ap-
proximately 10 seconds.
A Check Control message is displayed. The
system responds more sensitively.
Resetting the sensitivity
Push the turn signal lever to the front again
for approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-
ready state.
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam
Assistant is reset to the factory settings.
System limits
The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot
replace the driver's personal judgment of when
to use the high beams. In situations that re-
quire this, therefore dim manually.
The system is not fully functional in the follow-
ing situations, and driver intervention may be
necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncom-
ing traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres-
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged up, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Laser high beams
Principle
The headlight range of the high beams is in-
creased and provides better illumination of the
road.
Seite 161
Lights
CONTROLS
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
General information
The laser high beams are integrated into the
headlights and emit from there.
When the high beams are turned on, starting
with a speed of approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, the
laser high beams are automatically turned on
in addition to the LED high beams.
Depending on the national-market version, ad-
ditional information can be taken from the la-
ser sign on the headlight.
Safety information
The respective info label is located in or on
the headlight and is visible from the outside or
when the hood is open.
Laser radiation.
Do not look into the beam.
Laser class 2.
Fog lights
Front fog lights
Principle
The front fog lights work alongside the low
beams to illuminate a wider area of the road-
way.
Functional requirement
▷ Low beams are switched on.
Front fog light on/off
Press the button.
The green indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster illuminates if the front fog
lights are switched on.
If the automatic headlight control is activated,
the low beams will come on automatically
when you switch on the front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
The brightness can only be adjusted when the
parking lights or low beams are turned on.
Setting the brightness
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Seite 162
CONTROLS
Lights
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Interior lighting
General information
Depending on the equipment version, interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically
controlled.
Overview
Reading lights
Interior lights
Turning interior lights on/off
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle
can be switched on and off independently. The
button is located in the rear headliner.
Turning reading lights on/off
Press the button.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read-
ing lights are located next to the interior lights
in the front and rear.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's
interior.
Activating/deactivating ambient
light
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Ambient lighting"
Turning ambient light on/off
The ambient light is switched on when the ve-
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,
it will not be turned on when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Selecting the color
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Color"
6. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Brightness"
6. Select the desired setting.
Seite 163
Lights
CONTROLS
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Dynamic light
Individual actions, for example incoming calls
or opened doors, are indicated by light effects.
If the ambient light is disabled, the light effects
are still displayed.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Dynamic light"
6. Select the desired setting.
Reduced for night drive
Some lights of the interior lighting are reduced
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Reduced for night driving"
Seite 164
CONTROLS
Lights
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and the
front passenger by responding to frontal im-
pacts in which seat belts alone would not pro-
vide adequate protection.
Side airbag
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag
protects the side of the body in the chest and
lap area.
Depending on the national-market version:
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag
in the rear protects the chest and lap area on
Seite 165
Safety
CONTROLS
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
the side of the bodies of the occupants in the
outer rear seats.
Head airbag
In the event of a side collision, the head airbag
protects the head.
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
collision events.
Knee airbag
Depending on the national-market version:
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event
of a frontal impact.
Protective effect
General information
Airbags are not deployed in every impact sit-
uation, e.g., in less severe accidents.
Information on optimum protective
effect of the airbags
Warning
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy-
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot provide protection as
intended and may cause additional injuries
due to deployment. There is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Follow the information on
achieving the optimum protective effect of the
airbag system.
▷
Keep a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep the
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low
as possible when the airbag is deployed.
▷ Adjust seat and steering wheel so that
hands can be crossed over the steering
wheel. Select the settings so that the
shoulder rests against the backrest when
crossing the hands and the upper body
is as far back as possible while still main-
taining a comfortable grip on the steering
wheel.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit-
ting correctly, i.e., with their feet and legs in
the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ There should be no additional persons, an-
imals or objects between an airbag and a
person.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the pas-
senger's side must stay clear - do not at-
tach adhesive film or coverings and do not
attach brackets or cables, for instance for
navigation devices or mobile phones.
▷ Do not bond the airbag cover panels with
adhesive, do not cover them or modify
them in any way.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the passenger's side as a storage area.
▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects to the front seats that are not
specifically suited for seats with integrated
airbag versions.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Do not modify individual components or
wiring. This also applies to steering wheel
covers, the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not disassemble the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
Seite 166
CONTROLS
Safety
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The ignition and inflation noise may lead
to short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabil-
ities may affect the air bag system; contact
BMW Customer Relations for further informa-
tion.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Operational readiness of the airbag
system
Safety information
Warning
Individual components can be hot after de-
ployment of the airbag system. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch individual components.
Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional deployment of
the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc-
tion, the airbag system might not deploy as
intended despite the accident severity. There
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the
airbag system checked, repaired, disassem-
bled, and scrapped by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Display in the instrument cluster
When drive-ready state is turned on,
the warning light in the instrument
cluster illuminates briefly, thereby indi-
cating the operational readiness of the entire
airbag system and the seat belt tensioners.
Malfunction
▷ Warning light does not come on
when drive-ready state is turned on.
▷ The warning light illuminates con-
tinuously.
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Setting the front seat positions
The power that deploys the driver's/front pas-
senger airbags depends on the position of the
driver's/front passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function, cali-
brate the electrical front seats as soon as a re-
spective message appears on the control dis-
play.
Additional information:
Seats, refer to page 99.
Automatic deactivation of
the front passenger airbags
Principle
The system reads if the front passenger seat
is occupied by measuring the human body's
resistance.
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas-
senger's side are activated or deactivated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front pas-
senger seat, refer to the safety information and
instructions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
Seite 167
Safety
CONTROLS
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
Warning
To ensure the front passenger airbag func-
tion, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front pas-
senger seat. The entire seat surface must
be used for this purpose. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Make sure that the
front passenger keeps his or her feet in the
footwell.
Functional requirements
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied
seat surface:
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger seat.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
can press against the seat from below.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys-
tem is to be installed on it.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator light for the front
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbag in the headliner indicates the operating
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
The light indicates whether the airbags are ei-
ther activated or deactivated.
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light
shortly illuminates and then indicates whether
the airbags are either activated or deactivated.
▷
The indicator light illuminates
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint
system or when the seat is
empty. The airbags on the
passenger's side are not ac-
tivated.
▷ The indicator light does not illuminate
when, for instance, a correctly seated per-
son of sufficient size is detected on the
seat. The airbags on the passenger's side
are activated.
Fault of the automatic deactivation
system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front passenger airbags may be deacti-
vated in certain seat positions. In this case, the
indicator light for the front passenger airbags
illuminates.
In this case, change the seat position so that
the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear seat.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children seated
in a child restraint system, particularly in child
restraint systems required by NHTSA at the
point in time when the vehicle was manufac-
tured. After installing a child restraint system,
make sure that the indicator light for the front
passenger airbags illuminates. This indicates
that the child restraint system has been de-
tected and the front passenger airbags are not
activated.
Collision warning systems
General information
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle has
different systems that can help prevent an im-
minent collision.
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to
page 170.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 177.
Seite 168
CONTROLS
Safety
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
page 180.
▷ Side collision mitigation, refer to page 183.
▷ Rear-end collision preparation, refer to
page 184.
▷ Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to
page 185.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate.
Turning on/turning off collision
warning systems
Depending on national-market version, some
of the systems are automatically activated
whenever you start driving.
The following functions are adjustable.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. Select the desired settings.
Resetting the settings
The settings of the collision warning systems
can be reset to the default settings at vehicle
delivery.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Reset to recommended settings"
System limits
Safety information
Warning
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or
it may react too late or in a manner that is not
consistent with normal use. There may be a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer
to the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s operation
and limitations.
Detection capability
The system's detection capability is limited.
The system only takes into account objects
that are located in the detection range of the
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-
tem.
Seite 169
Safety
CONTROLS
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.
Thus, a system response might not come or
might come late.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Forward Collision Mitigation
Principle
The Forward Collision Mitigation can help
prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be
avoided, the system helps reduce the severity
of the accident.
The system can issue a warning of a possible
risk of collision and activate the brakes inde-
pendently, if needed.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the For-
ward Collision Mitigation system includes the
following functions:
▷
Forward Collision Warning with light brak-
ing function, refer to page 173.
▷ Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Miti-
gation, refer to page 174.
▷ Intersection warning with City light braking
function, refer to page 175.
▷ Evasion Assistant, refer to page 176.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Individual functions may not work correctly
when towing with Front Collision Warning en-
abled or Cruise Control switched on. There is
a risk of accident. Switch off Front Collision
Warning and Cruise Control before towing.
Sensors
Depending on the equipment, the system is
controlled by the following sensors:
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
▷ Front radar sensor.
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
Speed range
The system issues a warning of a possi-
ble risk of collision at speeds above approx.
3 mph/5 km/h.
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily.
Some functions are deactivated earlier.
The system is enabled as soon as the speed
drops below these values again.
Seite 170
CONTROLS
Safety
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Turning the Forward Collision
Mitigation on/off
Turning on the system automatically
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active after every de-
parture.
Turning on system manually
The system is activated by setting the warning
time.
Additional information:
Setting the warning time, refer to page 171.
Turning system off manually
Depending on national-market version, the ad-
justment can only be made when the vehicle is
at a standstill or in a very low speed range.
If necessary, the switch-off must be confirmed
successively on the control display.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"
7. "Off"
Setting the warning time
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"
7. Select the desired setting.
The more sensitive the warning time is set to
be, the more warnings will be displayed. The
system can therefore also issue more early or
unfounded warnings and reactions.
The system checks for visual impairments. De-
pending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver
Attention Camera in the instrument cluster
captures the driver’s field of vision. Visibility
and field of vision also affect the timing of the
warnings.
Display in the instrument cluster
The following indicator/warning lights are
shown on the instrument cluster and, depend-
ing on vehicle equipment, on the Head-up dis-
play:
Icon Meaning
Depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version:
Function restriction detected, e.g.,
due to system limits of the cameras
or because the system has malfunc-
tioned. You may continue driving.
If necessary, follow the instructions
from Check Control messages.
System limits of the cameras, refer to
page 35.
Depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version:
The system is turned off.
Risk of collision, for instance with a
person.
Risk of collision, for instance with a
preceding vehicle.
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle
crossing from the right.
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle
crossing from the left.
Risk of collision with a vehicle from an
unrecognizable direction of travel.
Seite 171
Safety
CONTROLS
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The corresponding indicator lights and warn-
ing lights may display differently if the system
detects multiple objects.
Warning function
The Forward Collision Mitigation warns on dif-
ferent warning levels, depending on the re-
spective hazardous situation.
In the event of a system warning, the driver
must intervene immediately and in accordance
with the situation.
▷ Red warning light illuminates:
A hazardous situation has been detected.
Increased awareness is required.
▷ Red warning light flashes:
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-
diately.
▷ A warning signal sounds:
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-
diately.
▷ Automatic brake intervention:
Depending on the equipment and situation
in case of an imminent danger of collision,
the system can also intervene with an auto-
matic brake intervention and automatically
decelerate the vehicle, if necessary, to a
complete stop.
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and
hard, the maximum braking force of the vehicle
is used.
Automatic brake intervention
In case of a risk of collision, the system can
assist with an automatic brake intervention, if
necessary.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
During automatic brake intervention, Dynamic
Stability Control activates automatically.
A brake intervention can be canceled by step-
ping on the accelerator pedal with sufficient
force, releasing the brake pedal, or by actively
steering.
City brake function: the brake intervention oc-
curs to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.
With radar sensor: the brake intervention oc-
curs to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,
only a brief brake intervention will occur.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or
it may react too late or in a manner that is not
consistent with normal use. There may be a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer
to the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s operation
and limitations.
Detection capability
The system's detection capability is limited.
The system only takes into account objects
that are located in the detection range of the
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-
tem.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.
Thus, a system response might not come or
might come late.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
Seite 172
CONTROLS
Safety
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ In tight curves.
▷ With limitation of the driving stability control
systems.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
switched on via the Start/Stop button.
Approach control warning
with light braking function
Principle
The Approach control warning with light brak-
ing function warns of a possible risk of collision
and may brake independently.
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
General information
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings
may vary with the current driving situation.
The system considers the driver’s vehicle han-
dling when responding. If an active driving
style is detected, warnings and brake interven-
tions occur less frequently.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.
Icon Meaning
Forward Collision Warning with a de-
tected vehicle.
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 170.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected,
or only detected with a delay, for instance:
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-
proached at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with unusual rear designs.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily. As soon as the speed drops below
this value again, the system is reactivated.
Seite 173
Safety
CONTROLS
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Daytime Pedestrian
Collision Mitigation
Principle
At speeds that are common in towns and cit-
ies, the Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation
function warns the driver of a possible risk
of collision with pedestrians and cyclists. The
system may brake automatically.
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
General information
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with pedestrians at speeds above
approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
pedestrian, a warning light is displayed.
Icon
Meaning
Risk of collision with a pedestrian.
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 170.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Detection range
The detection range in front of the vehicle is
divided into two areas:
▷
Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Extended area, arrows 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo-
cated within the central area. A warning is is-
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
▷
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of their contour or posture.
▷ Pedestrians with insufficient height.
Seite 174
CONTROLS
Safety
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Upper speed limit
Depending on vehicle equipment, the system
responds to pedestrians when the vehicle
peed is below 50 mph/80 km/h.
Intersection warning with
City light braking function
Principle
At speeds that are common in towns and
cities, the intersection warning with City light
braking function can warn the driver of a possi-
ble risk of collision with crossing traffic at inter-
sections and junctions. The system may brake
automatically.
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
General information
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
Vehicles that cross your driving direction can
be detected by the system as soon as these
vehicles enter into the detection range of the
sensors.
At intersections and junctions, a warning is is-
sued when a risk of collision with crossing traf-
fic is detected.
The system warns of a possible risk of colli-
sion with vehicles at speeds above approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
The timing of warnings may vary with the cur-
rent driving situation.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.
Icon Meaning
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing
from the right.
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing
from the left.
Risk of collision with vehicle for which
the driving direction cannot be deter-
mined.
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 170.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
▷
Crossing vehicles when they are hidden,
e.g. by buildings.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual side view.
▷ Vehicles in highly dynamic driving situa-
tions.
Seite 175
Safety
CONTROLS
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
▷ Crossing two-wheeled vehicles.
Upper speed limit
The system responds to crossing vehicles
when the vehicle speed is below approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
Evasion Assistant
Principle
The Evasion Assistant can support the driver
in making evasive maneuvers in certain situa-
tions, such as when obstacles or persons sud-
denly appear.
General information
The system issues a warning and intervenes
to support the driver if a lateral evasive ma-
neuver is possible.
Sensors monitor and detect the clearance
around the vehicle.
If the system identifies space alongside the ve-
hicle, it supports an evasive maneuver made
by the driver by safely performing automatic
steering movements.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Functional requirements
▷ Forward Collision Mitigation is active.
▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around
vehicle.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle or pedestrian, a warning light is dis-
played.
Icon Meaning
Warning when a vehicle is detected.
Warning when a pedestrian is de-
tected.
Warning function with evasion
support
If the vehicle approaches another object at a
high differential speed, a warning is displayed
if there is an immediate risk of collision.
Intervene in case of a warning.
The system is designed to provide assistance
during evasive maneuvers when there is a risk
of collision.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-
proached at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with unusual rear designs.
Seite 176
CONTROLS
Safety
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of their contour or posture.
▷ Pedestrians with insufficient height.
Lane Departure Warning
Principle
The lane departure warning alerts when the
vehicle is about to run off the road or exit the
lane.
General information
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
The system issues a warning starting at a min-
imum speed. The minimum speed is country-
specific and displayed on the control display.
Warnings are displayed in the instrument clus-
ter. In addition, the steering wheel vibrates.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set in the respective direction be-
fore exiting the lane.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in assess-
ing road and traffic situations. There is a
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate. Do
not jerk the steering wheel in response to a
warning.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate.
Functional requirement
The camera must detect the lane boundaries
for the lane departure warning to be active.
The areas of the sensors must be clean and
clear.
Sensors
The system is controlled by a camera behind
the windshield.
Turning the Lane Departure
Warning on/off
Turning on the system automatically
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active after every de-
parture.
Seite 177
Safety
CONTROLS
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Turning on system manually
The system is activated by setting the warning
time.
Additional information:
Setting the warning time, refer to page 178.
Turning system off manually
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, you must successively confirm
the switch-off on the control display.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane Departure Warning"
7. "Off"
Setting Lane Departure Warning
Setting the warning time
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane Departure Warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Early"
▷ "Medium"
▷ "Reduced"
Some warnings are suppressed de-
pending on the situation, for instance
when purposely driving over lane mark-
ings in curves or with dynamic passing
without a turn signal.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Vibration intensity"
7. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
Depending on the national-market
version: turning steering intervention
on/off
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane Departure Warning"
7. "Steering intervention"
Depending on the national-market version, the
steering intervention is automatically active af-
ter every driving off.
Display in the instrument cluster
Different system statuses are displayed on
the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle
equipment and national-market version.
Icon
Meaning
Indicator light illuminates green: Sys-
tem is switched on. At least one lane
boundary has been detected on one
side of the vehicle. The system is
ready to intervene and issue warn-
ings.
Indicator light flashes green: System
is performing a steering intervention.
Seite 178
CONTROLS
Safety
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-
ment cluster.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 151.
Warning function
If you leave the lane
If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary
has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates
in accordance with the steering wheel vibration
setting.
When the turn signal is switched on in the cor-
responding direction before changing the lane,
a warning is not issued.
Steering intervention
Depending on the equipment and the national-
market version: if a lane marking is crossed in
the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the
system intervenes with a brief active steering
intervention in addition to vibrating. The sys-
tem supports the driver in keeping the vehicle
within the lane. The steering intervention can
be noticed on the steering wheel and can be
manually overridden at any time.
When steering intervention is active,
the indicator light flashes green.
For instance, the steering intervention will be
suppressed in the following situations:
▷
With hard accelerating or braking.
▷ When flashing.
▷ With hazard warning system switched on.
▷ In driving situation with high driving dynam-
ics.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
▷ Immediately following a steering interven-
tion by the vehicle systems.
▷ When actively merging back to your own
lane after passing.
Warning signal
Depending on the national-market version: in
the event of multiple active steering interven-
tions by the system within 3 minutes with-
out the driver's intervention at the steering
wheel during the steering intervention itself, an
acoustic warning will sound. A short warning
signal will sound at the second steering inter-
vention. Beginning with the third steering inter-
vention, a continuous warning will sound.
In addition, a Check Control message is dis-
played.
The warning signal and Check Control mes-
sage advise to pay closer attention to the lane.
End of warning
For instance, the warning or an active steering
intervention will be canceled in the following
situations:
▷
Automatically after a few seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ With hard accelerating or braking.
▷ With hazard warning system switched on.
▷ When flashing.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
▷ Immediately following a steering interven-
tion by the vehicle systems.
▷ With manual steering intervention.
▷ When another driver assistance system is
activated, if applicable.
▷ No lane boundaries detected.
▷ When the system limits are reached.
Seite 179
Safety
CONTROLS
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
daries such as in construction areas.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight corners or on narrow roads.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
switched on via the Start/Stop button.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is limited. A yellow warning
light also illuminates, depending on national-
market version.
Active Blind Spot Detection
Principle
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles
in the blind spot or vehicles approaching from
behind in the adjacent lane.
The warning light in the exterior mirror gives
warnings at different levels.
General information
Radar sensors monitor the area behind and
next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a
minimum speed.
The minimum speed is country-specific and
displayed in the Active Blind Spot Detection
menu.
The system indicates whether there are vehi-
cles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The
warning light in the exterior mirror illuminates
dimly.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the
situations described above. The warning light
in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering
wheel vibrates.
When turning at a speed of up to approx.
12 mph/20 km/h, the steering wheel will not
vibrate.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
Seite 180
CONTROLS
Safety
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Functional requirement
The areas of the sensors must be clean and
clear.
Turning Active Blind Spot Detection
on/off
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
7. Select the desired setting.
Adjusting the Active Blind Spot
Detection
Setting the warning time
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
7. Select the desired setting.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Vibration intensity"
7. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
Depending on the national-market
version: turning steering intervention
on/off
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
7. "Steering intervention"
Display in the instrument cluster
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-
ment cluster.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 151.
Warning function
Warning light in exterior mirror
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
of a possible collision.
Prewarning
The dimmed warning light in the exterior mirror
indicates when vehicles are in your blind spot
or approaching from the rear.
Seite 181
Safety
CONTROLS
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Acute warning
When an acute warning occurs, the steering
wheel vibrates briefly. The warning light in the
exterior mirror flashes brightly.
An acute warning is issued if the following con-
ditions are met:
▷ Another vehicle is located in the critical
area.
▷ Your own vehicle is approaching the other
lane.
▷ Depending on the system setting when the
turn signal is turned on.
The warning stops when the other vehicle has
left the critical area or the turn signal has been
turned off.
Steering intervention
Depending on the national-market version:
when there is no response to the vibration
of the steering wheel at speeds of up to
130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking
is crossed, the system engages the active
steering intervention. The steering intervention
helps return the vehicle into the lane. The
steering intervention can be noticed on the
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-
den at any time.
The steering intervention is carried out from
a minimum speed. The minimum speed is dis-
played on the control display.
Warning light flashing
When the vehicle is unlocked, the warning light
in the exterior mirror flashes for self-testing
purposes.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily.
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.
Displaying warnings
Depending on the selected warning settings,
e.g., warning time, more or fewer warnings can
be displayed. However, there may also be an
excess of unwarranted warnings of critical sit-
uations.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In tight corners or on narrow roads.
▷ The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,
for instance by stickers.
Depending on the national-market version, the
steering intervention e.g. in the following situa-
tions:
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
daries such as in construction areas.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷ With lane boundaries that are not white.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ If the camera is impaired.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
switched on via the Start/Stop button.
A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is limited. A yellow warning
light also illuminates, depending on national-
market version.
Seite 182
CONTROLS
Safety
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Side collision mitigation
Principle
The side-collision warning helps to avoid an
impending side collision.
General information
Radar sensors monitor the space next to the
vehicle when traveling faster than a minimum
speed and up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.
The minimum speed is country-specific and
displayed on the control display.
If, for instance, another vehicle is detected next
to the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision
with this vehicle, the system helps avoid the
collision. For this purpose, the system issues a
warning with a flashing LED in the exterior mir-
ror, a Check Control message and a vibrating
steering wheel. If necessary, an active steering
intervention is performed by the system.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
Functional requirement
The camera behind the windshield determines
the lane boundary positions.
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the side collision mitigation with steering inter-
vention to be active.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷ Camera behind the windshield.
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
Turning the side collision warning
on/off
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Side collision warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Vibration intensity"
7. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-
ment cluster.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 151.
Seite 183
Safety
CONTROLS
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Warning function
Warning light in exterior mirror
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
of a possible collision.
Acute warning
If there is a risk of collision, the warning light
in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering
wheel starts vibrating.
A Check Control message is displayed at the
same time.
Steering intervention
Depending on the national-market version,
if necessary, the system engages the active
steering intervention to prevent a collision and
maintain the vehicle within its own lane. The
steering intervention can be noticed on the
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-
den at any time.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷
When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In tight corners or on narrow roads.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
daries such as in construction areas.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷ With lane boundaries that are not white.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
switched on via the Start/Stop button.
A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is limited.
Rear-end collision
preparation
Principle
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, the rear-end collision prepara-
tion can react to vehicles approaching from be-
hind.
General information
Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-
hicle.
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a
certain speed, the system can react as follows:
Seite 184
CONTROLS
Safety
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Where applicable, the hazard warning
flashers will be switched on.
▷ Where applicable, the PreCrash functions
are triggered.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the radar sensors
on the sides and rear.
Turning rear-end collision
preparation on/off
The system is automatically active when the
vehicle is turned on.
The system is deactivated when reversing.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Functional limitations
This function may be restricted if the speed
of the approaching vehicle is much higher or
similar to your own speed.
Emergency Stop Assistant
Principle
If the driver can no longer drive the vehicle
safely, the Emergency Stop Assistant helps to
bring the vehicle to a safe standstill.
General information
The Emergency Stop Assistant is not triggered
automatically. The system can only be trig-
gered manually by the occupants.
When the system is triggered, the vehicle is
brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of
lane guidance.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, the system includes a
lane change function.
With lane change function: on motorways or
motorway-like roads, the system steers the ve-
hicle to the side of the road or shoulder where
possible. On other roads or with high traffic
volume, the vehicle is brought to a standstill in
the current lane.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Parking brake
Functional requirements
▷
The Emergency Stop Assistant can be trig-
gered at speeds of approx. 6 mph/10 km/h
up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.
▷ With lane change function: lane changes
are executed when the traffic situation al-
lows.
Triggering the Emergency Stop
Assistant
Briefly pull the parking brake switch to
trigger the Emergency Stop Assistant.
Seite 185
Safety
CONTROLS
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ With lane change function: releasing the
switch may trigger an automatic lane
change.
▷ The system will take control of the vehicle
for a maximum of 2 minutes.
▷ The hazard warning system is switched on.
▷ An emergency call is triggered when sta-
tionary, depending on vehicle equipment.
Canceling Emergency Stop
Assistant
The driver can cancel the Emergency Stop As-
sistant by actively taking control of the vehicle
throughout the entire process.
For instance, the system will be canceled in the
following situations:
▷ When steering.
▷ When flashing.
▷ When depressing the accelerator pedal.
▷ When switching off the hazard warning sys-
tem.
▷ When canceling the Emergency Request.
▷ When switching the selector lever position
at a standstill.
▷ The parking brake switch is pressed.
At standstill
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the sys-
tem will carry out the following settings:
▷
The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
▷ The interior lights are switched on.
▷ The central locking system is unlocked.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Icon
Status
Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-
gered.
Without lane change function:
Icon
Status
When lane markings are detected,
the system keeps the vehicle in the
lane.
Lane guidance is briefly interrupted.
Lane boundary driven over.
When lane markings are detected,
the system keeps the vehicle in the
lane.
The hands are not grasping the
steering wheel. The system is still ac-
tive.
Warning light illuminates red and
acoustic signal sounds: Hands not
grasping steering wheel. Interruption
of lane guidance is imminent.
Warning light illuminates red and
acoustic signal sounds: Lane Guid-
ance is switched off.
System limits
Use the system only in the event of a driver
failure.
The system cannot replace the roadworthy
driving performance of a driver.
Cross traffic warning
Principle
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of
perpendicular parking spaces, road users ap-
proaching from the side are detected sooner
by the cross traffic warning than is possible
from the driver's seat.
Seite 186
CONTROLS
Safety
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
General information
The area behind the vehicle is monitored by
sensors.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is
monitored as well.
The system indicates approaching road users.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷
Radar sensors, side, rear.
▷ Depending on the equipment: radar sen-
sors, side, front.
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic
Warning
The system must be activated on the control
display for the Cross Traffic Warning to switch
on automatically.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
6. "CROSS TRAFFIC WARNING"
7. Select the desired setting.
Turning on the cross traffic warning
automatically
The system must be activated on the control
display. As soon as Park Distance Control or a
camera view is active and a selector lever po-
sition is engaged, the system is automatically
switched on.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is
switched on.
Depending on the equipment, the front system
is turned on when a gear position is engaged.
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active when the vehi-
cle is started.
Turning off the cross traffic warning
automatically
The system is automatically turned off in the
following situations:
▷
When the speed exceeds walking speed.
▷ When a certain distance covered is ex-
ceeded.
Seite 187
Safety
CONTROLS
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Warning function
General information
The control display shows the corresponding
view, an acoustic signal may sound as neces-
sary, and the warning light in the exterior mir-
ror flashes.
In case of a brake intervention, a message is
displayed on the control display and close after
a brief period of time.
Visual warning
Warning light in exterior mirror
The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes
if the rear sensors detect other vehicles when
the vehicle is reversing.
Display in the Park Distance Control view
In the Park Distance Control view, the respec-
tive boundary area flashes red if vehicles are
detected by the sensors.
Depending on vehicle equipment: display in
camera image
Depending on the direction of travel, the view
to the front or back is displayed in the camera
image.
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the
camera image flashes red if vehicles are de-
tected by the sensors.
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your
own vehicle.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the visual warning, a signal tone
sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re-
spective direction.
Depending on the national-market version, the
signal tone will already sound when the gear
position is engaged.
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Functional limitations
The function can be limited, for instance in the
following situations:
▷
In tight curves.
▷ Crossing objects are moving at a very slow
or a very fast speed.
▷ Other objects that hide cross traffic are in
the capture range of the sensors.
Seite 188
CONTROLS
Safety
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
BMW Drive Recorder
Principle
The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video
recordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to
document surrounding traffic.
General information
Video recordings can be saved in different
ways:
▷ Automatic storage of the recording.
The function makes it possible to document
the accident with the correspondingly set
recording type.
▷ Manual storage of the recording.
The function makes it possible to document
traffic situations with the correspondingly
set recording type.
The assistance systems' cameras are used to
record, e.g., Panorama View.
Additionally, the following parameters are
stored for the trip:
▷
Date.
▷ Time.
▷ Vehicle speed.
▷ Global Positioning System coordinates.
Data protection
The permissibility of recording and using video
recordings is contingent upon the statutory
regulations of the country in which the system
is to be used. The user is responsible for the
use of the system and compliance with respec-
tive applicable regulations.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
confirming there are no statutory or regulatory
constraints on use of the system in your state
or country prior to the initial use. In addition,
the laws with respect to use of the system
should be verified in regular intervals, espe-
cially when borders are frequently crossed.
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed
about the system. In addition, information
about the system is required when handing off
the vehicle.
Functional requirements
▷ Standby state or drive-ready state is
switched on.
▷ BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
▷ Privacy Policy was accepted.
▷ Recording type was selected.
▷ Recording time was selected.
Activating/deactivating the BMW
Drive Recorder
The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated
before the first use of the recording function.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. Accept Privacy Policy.
5. "Settings"
6. "Allow recording"
7. Select the desired setting.
Recording functions
Automatic recording
Recordings are saved automatically when the
vehicle sensors detect an accident.
The system saves recordings up to 20 sec-
onds before and after storage is triggered.
If the vehicle accelerates rapidly, an automatic
recording may be taken.
Seite 189
Safety
CONTROLS
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Manual recording
Using the button
Press and hold this button.
Via iDrive
Start the recording:
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Recording"
5. "Start recording"
Recording can also be started by selecting the
widget on the control display.
The system saves recordings up to 20 sec-
onds before and after storage is triggered.
Recording playback and
administration
Stored video recordings can be played back,
exported and deleted.
For your own safety, the video recording is
only displayed on the control display up to ap-
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market
versions, the video recording is only displayed
if the parking brake is engaged or if the selec-
tor lever is in the P position.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Recordings"
5. Select desired recording.
If a camera change occurred during the record-
ing, different segments of the video can be se-
lected.
Settings
Recording type
1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the desired setting.
Recording time
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the desired setting.
Cameras
Different cameras can be selected.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Settings"
5. "Cam. selection"
6. Select desired camera.
"All": In the event of an accident, the system
switches automatically.
If driver assistance systems are enabled, their
camera views are automatically selected.
System limits
In the event of serious accidents, it may not
be possible to store recordings if the damage
Seite 190
CONTROLS
Safety
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
on the vehicle is too great or the power supply
was interrupted.
If you overwrite a USB drive multiple times, it
may not be possible to export recordings cor-
rectly.
Active Protection
Principle
Active Protection prepares occupants and the
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving
or collision situations.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, Active Protection consists of
various PreCrash functions.
The system is used to detect certain critical
driving situations that might lead to an acci-
dent. This includes the following critical driving
situations:
▷ Emergency braking.
▷ Severe understeering.
▷ Severe oversteering.
Certain functions of several systems can,
within the system limits, lead to Active Protec-
tion triggering:
▷
Forward Collision Warning with light brak-
ing function: automatic brake intervention.
▷ Forward Collision Warning with light brak-
ing function: brake booster.
▷ Rear-end collision preparation: detection of
impending rear-end collisions.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the
system limits, critical situations might not be
detected reliably or in time. There is a risk
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con-
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate.
Function
Depending on vehicle equipment, the driver
and front passenger seat belts are automati-
cally tightened once after driving off, if the seat
belt is fastened.
Depending on the equipment and require-
ments, the following individual functions are
active in accident-critical driving situations:
▷ Automatic pretensioning of the front seat
belts.
▷ Automatic closing of the windows.
The windows remain open with a small
gap.
▷ The glass sunroof/panoramic glass sunroof
closes automatically.
The sun protection is also closed.
▷ Automatic positioning of the backrest for
the front passenger seat.
After a critical driving situation without an acci-
dent, the front seat belts are loosened again. If
the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the seat belt us-
ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
seat belt before continuing to drive. All other
systems can be restored to the desired setting.
PostCrash – iBrake
Principle
In certain accident situations, the PostCrash –
iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle to a
standstill without intervention by the driver.
General information
The PostCrash – iBrake can reduce the risk of
a further collision and its consequences.
Seite 191
Safety
CONTROLS
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically.
Harder vehicle deceleration
In certain situations, it may be necessary to
bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than
automatic braking allows.
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the
brake. For a brief period, the brake pressure
will be higher than the brake pressure that is
achieved by the automatic braking function.
Automatic braking is interrupted.
Abort automatic braking
It may be necessary to interrupt automatic
braking in certain situations, for instance when
making an evasive maneuver.
Abort automatic braking:
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
Fatigue alert
Principle
The Fatigue Alert can detect decreasing alert-
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo-
notonous trips, for instance on highways. The
system recommends a break.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
one's physical state. An increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or
not be detected in time. There is a risk of
accident. Make sure that the driver is rested
and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions.
Function
The system is switched on each time drive-
ready state is switched on.
After starting the trip, the system is trained to
the driver, so that decreasing alertness or fati-
gue can be detected.
This procedure takes, for example, the follow-
ing criteria into account:
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
behavior.
▷ Driving conditions, for instance time, length
of trip.
▷ Depending on the equipment: attention
of the driver through the Driver Attention
Camera.
The system is active starting at ap-
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also display a
break recommendation.
Break recommendation
Setting break recommendation
The break recommendation can be switched
on or off and adjusted via iDrive.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Fatigue Alert"
7. Select the desired setting.
Display
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,
a message is displayed in the control display
with the recommendation to take a break.
Seite 192
CONTROLS
Safety
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
During the display, various settings can be se-
lected.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle. A break recommendation
can only be displayed again after this time has
elapsed.
System limits
System functionality may be limited. If the
function is limited, either no warning is issued
or an incorrect warning is issued. The system
function may be limited in the following situa-
tions, e.g.:
▷ If the time is set incorrectly.
▷ At a predominantly driven speed below ap-
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road condition is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
Driver Attention Camera
Principle
A camera in the instrument cluster monitors
the driver’s activity and, depending on the
equipment, the driver’s viewing direction.
General information
For support by assistance systems, the atten-
tion of the driver is analyzed by evaluating the
head position and eye opening of the driver.
For full operability, make sure that the field of
view of the Driver Attention Camera is not ob-
structed.
Overview
Depending on the equipment, the instrument
cluster has up to three infrared light sources.
Depending on the light conditions, these light
sources can be visible when the vehicle is in
standby mode.
System limits
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
functional in the following situations:
▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-
ered by the steering wheel.
▷ With sunglasses with high protection from
infrared light.
Seite 193
Safety
CONTROLS
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Antilock Braking System
Principle
The Antilock Braking System prevents locking
of the wheels during braking.
The vehicle maintains its steerability even dur-
ing emergency braking, which increases the
active driving safety.
General information
The Antilock Braking System is ready after
each time drive-ready state is turned on.
Malfunction
The warning light on the instrument
cluster illuminates.
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷
The Antilock Braking System system is not
available.
▷ The ability to steer is restricted during full
braking.
Have checked immediately by an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Brake assistant
The brake assistant automatically applies
maximum braking assistance when the brake
pedal is depressed quickly. It reduces the brak-
ing distance to a minimum during emergency
braking. The advantages of the Antilock Brak-
ing System are thereby utilized.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
during full braking.
Drive-off assistant
Principle
The drive-off assistant supports driving off on
uphill grades.
Driving off
1.
Hold the vehicle by depressing the brake
pedal.
2. Release the brake pedal and drive off
quickly.
After the brake pedal is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle
may roll back slightly.
In order to prevent rolling back when driving
off, use the parking brake.
1.
Pull and release switch before driv-
ing off.
The parking brake is set.
2. Step on the accelerator pedal sufficiently to
drive off.
Seite 194
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Dynamic Stability Control
Principle
Dynamic Stability Control helps to keep the
vehicle on a steady course by reducing drive
power and by brake interventions on individual
wheels.
General information
The system detects the following unstable
driving conditions, for instance:
▷ Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Warning
When driving with a roof load, e.g., roof bars,
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher. This
increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in crit-
ical driving situations. There may be a risk of
accidents or risk of damage to property. Drive
with roof load only with activated Dynamic
Stability Control.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Dynamic Stability Control
Activating/deactivating Dynamic
Stability Control
General information
Dynamic Stability Control is automatically acti-
vated whenever drive-ready state is switched
on.
When Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated,
driving stability is reduced while accelerating
and when cornering.
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic
Stability Control as soon as possible.
Activating/deactivating the system
1.
Press the button to open the selec-
tion.
2. "DSC OFF"
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
3. Press the button again to reactivate
Dynamic Stability Control.
Seite 195
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Displays in the instrument cluster
View when Dynamic Stability
Control is deactivated.
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic
Stability Control is deactivated.
Warning light pulsates: Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control is regulating the drive and
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.
Reduce speed and modify your driving style to
the driving circumstances.
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Sta-
bility Control has failed or is initializing.
Driving stabilization is restricted or has
failed.
If the warning light illuminates continuously,
have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Automatic program change
Dynamic Stability Control can be activated
automatically by Front Collision Mitigation de-
pending on the situation. Deactivate Forward
Collision Mitigation as necessary.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 170.
Dynamic Traction Control
Principle
The Dynamic Traction Control is a variant of
the Dynamic Stability Control where the drive
power is optimized.
The system ensures maximum drive power
on unusual road conditions, for instance unp-
lowed snow covered roads or loose road surfa-
ces, but with somewhat limited driving stability.
General information
When the Dynamic Traction Control is acti-
vated, there is maximum traction. Driving sta-
bility is limited during acceleration and when
cornering.
A brief activation of the Dynamic Traction Con-
trol may be useful in the following situations:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose
ground.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Dynamic Stability Control
Activating/deactivating the Dynamic
Traction Control
1.
Press the button to open the selec-
tion.
2. "Traction": Dynamic Traction Control is ac-
tivated.
3. Press the button again to reactivate
Dynamic Stability Control.
Seite 196
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Displays in the instrument cluster
View when Dynamic Traction
Control is activated.
The indicator light illuminates: the Dy-
namic Traction Control is activated.
Automatic program change
In certain situations, Dynamic Stability Control
is activated automatically:
▷ Active Cruise Control with Distance Control
is activated.
▷ In case of a brake intervention by Front Col-
lision Mitigation. Deactivate Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation as necessary.
▷ If the suspension control system fails.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 170.
BMW xDrive
Principle
BMW xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of
the vehicle. Concerted action by the BMW
xDrive and other suspension control systems,
such as Dynamic Stability Control, further opti-
mizes traction and driving dynamics.
General information
BMW xDrive variably distributes the drive
forces to the front and rear axles as required
by the driving situation and road conditions.
M sport differential
The M Sport differential provides for continu-
ously variable locking of the rear axle differen-
tial, depending on the driving situation. This
prevents spinning of a single rear wheel and
thereby provides optimal traction in any driving
situation.
The driver is responsible adapting his or her
driving style to the situation.
Variable sport steering
The variable sports steering facilitates direct
and agile handling with little steering effort.
The variable sports steering works independ-
ently of the current speed, varying the steering
gear ratio in line with the steering angle.
Seite 197
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Driver assistance systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Speed warning
Principle
The speed warning can be used to set a speed
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed
limit is exceeded.
General information
Another warning occurs when the set speed
limit is exceeded again after it has dropped by
3 mph/5 km/h.
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Speed warning"
Adjusting the speed
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Speed warning"
7. "Warning above:"
8. Select the desired setting.
Applying current speed as the
speed warning
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Speed warning"
7. "Adopt current speed"
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Principle
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid
speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if
necessary, the Head-up display.
General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
well as overhead sign posts.
Traffic signs with extra icons are considered
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.
The traffic sign will then be either displayed
or ignored depending on the situation in the
instrument cluster and the Head-up display.
The system may also show speed limits that
apply to routes that are not signposted if the
navigation system has current map data.
Seite 198
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
For Speed Limit Info to function correctly, cur-
rent map data for the country in which the ve-
hicle is operated must be downloaded.
For information on the current map version
and map updates, see Map update in the Nav-
igation system chapter.
Additional information:
▷ Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Sensors
The system is controlled by a camera behind
the windshield.
Displaying Speed Limit Info
General information
The Speed Limit Info can be shown or hidden
via iDrive in the instrument cluster. Depending
on the national-market version, Speed Limit
Info is continuously displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Displaying Speed Limit Info
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
7. "Speed limits"
8. "Show current limit"
Display
Speed Limit Info
Icon Description
Current speed limit.
Depending on the national-
market version, it is possible
to switch between the units of
measurement.
No data on current speed limit
available.
Speed Limit Info not available.
If the detected speed limit has been exceeded,
the display will flash. Depending on national-
market version, an acoustic signal also sounds.
The warning for exceeding the maximum per-
missible speed can be activated or deactivated
via iDrive:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
7. "Warning when speeding"
Settings
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Seite 199
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
7. Select the desired setting.
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷ Camera, refer to page 35.
Functional limitations
The system function may be limited and may
provide incorrect information in the following
situations:
▷ Traffic signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers, or paint.
▷ Traffic signs do not comply with the stand-
ard.
▷ In areas that are not included in the naviga-
tion system map data.
▷ If navigation system map data is invalid,
outdated, or unavailable.
▷ When roads deviate from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road layout.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic
signs applied to them.
▷ In case of electronic traffic signs.
▷ When traffic signs that are valid for a paral-
lel road are detected.
▷ In the presence of country-specific road
signs or road layouts.
Manual Speed Limiter
Principle
The Manual Speed Limiter can be used to set
a speed limit, for instance to prevent the vehi-
cle from exceeding speed limits.
General information
The system can limit the speed, starting at
20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be driven
at any speed below the set speed limit.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
System on/off.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
Rocker switch:
Changing the speed limit.
Operation
Turning on the speed limiter
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The current speed is adopted as the speed
limit.
If the system is turned on while the vehi-
cle is stationary or driving at low speeds,
20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
corresponding speed.
Seite 200
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
When the speed limit is activated, Dynamic
Stability Control is switched on and the vehicle
may change to COMFORT drive mode.
Turning off the speed limiter
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The system switches off automatically in the
following situations, for example:
▷ When the engine is switched off.
▷ When Cruise Control is switched on.
▷ When certain driving modes are activated
via Driving Experience Control.
The displays turn off.
Stopping the speed limiter
If the reverse gear is engaged or in Neutral, the
system is interrupted when rolling backwards.
Changing the speed limit
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed limit is set.
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed
to the resistance point, the speed limit in-
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
If the set speed limit is reached or unintention-
ally exceeded, such as when driving downhill,
the vehicle is not actively braked.
When the speed limit is set during a trip to
a value below the current speed, the vehicle
coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.
The current speed can also be stored by
pressing a button:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Exceeding the speed limit
When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed
limit, a warning is issued.
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally.
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down
to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.
When the vehicle speed drops below the set
speed limit, the limit is automatically reacti-
vated.
Warning when the speed limit is
exceeded
Visual warning
If the speed limit is exceeded: the
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter flashes while the vehicle speed is
greater than the set speed limit.
Acoustic warning
▷
If the speed limit is exceeded unintention-
ally, a signal sounds.
▷ When the speed limit is reduced to be-
low the current vehicle speed, the signal
sounds after some time.
▷ When the speed limit is intentionally ex-
ceeded by stepping on the accelerator
pedal all the way down, there is no signal.
Seite 201
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Displays in the instrument cluster
Display in the speedometer
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
speedometer displays the status of the sys-
tem.
▷ Green marking: system is ac-
tive.
▷ Gray marking: system is in-
terrupted.
▷ No marking: system is
switched off.
Indicator light
Icon Description
The indicator light illuminates: the
system is switched on.
The indicator light flashes: the set
speed limit has been exceeded.
Gray indicator light: the system has
been interrupted.
Cruise Control without
Distance Control
Principle
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad-
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the set speed. The sys-
tem accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
General information
The system can be activated starting at
20 mph/30 km/h.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control settings may change under certain
conditions. For instance, acceleration can
change depending on the driving mode.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Warning
The use of the system can lead to an in-
creased risk of accidents in the following sit-
uations, for instance:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ With high traffic volume.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
There may be a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. Only use the system if
driving at constant speed is possible.
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Seite 202
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Warning
Individual functions may not work correctly
when towing with Front Collision Warning en-
abled or Cruise Control switched on. There is
a risk of accident. Switch off Front Collision
Warning and Cruise Control before towing.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting.
Interrupt cruise control.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
Rocker switch:
Set speed.
Turning Cruise Control on/off
Turning on the system
Depending on the equipment version,
press the relevant button on the steer-
ing wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
be turned on.
Turning off the system
Depending on the equipment version,
press the relevant button on the steer-
ing wheel.
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is
deleted.
Interrupting Cruise Control
Stopping the system manually
When active, press the button.
Stopping the system automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations, for example:
▷
When braking manually.
▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ While Dynamic Traction Control is enabled
or Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
Seite 203
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Adjusting the speed
Maintaining and storing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the set
speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-
ometer.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
be turned on.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
Press the button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷
Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the
resistance point, the set speed increases or
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de-
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it: vehicle accelerates or
decelerates without pressure on the accel-
erator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi-
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Continuing cruise control
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large be-
fore calling up the stored speed. Otherwise,
unwanted vehicle deceleration or acceleration
may occur.
Press the button with the system inter-
rupted.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-
ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷
When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Display in the speedometer
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
speedometer displays the status of the sys-
tem.
Seite 204
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Green marking: system is ac-
tive, the marking indicates
the desired speed.
▷ Gray marking: system is in-
terrupted, the marking indi-
cates the stored speed.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Indicator light
Icon Description
No indicator light: system is switched
off.
Indicator light green: system is active.
Gray indicator light: the system has
been interrupted.
Displays in the Head-up display
Some system information can also be dis-
played in the Head-up display.
The icon is displayed when the set
speed is reached.
System limits
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades
if the drive power is insufficient.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may
exceed or drop below the set desired speed
in some situations, for instance on downhill or
uphill grades.
Active Cruise Control with
Distance Control
Principle
Using the Cruise Control, a desired speed and
a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted
using the buttons on the steering wheel.
General information
The system maintains the set speed on clear
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto-
matically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of the vehicle so that the set
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained.
The speed is adjusted as far as the given sit-
uation allows.
The distance can be adjusted at several levels.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec-
tive speed.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a stand-
still and then drives off again within a brief pe-
riod, the system is able to detect this within the
given system limits.
Otherwise, drive off on your own, such as by
pressing the accelerator pedal or the rocker
switch on the steering wheel.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control settings may change under certain
conditions. For instance, acceleration can
change depending on the driving mode.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
Seite 205
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Risk of accident is greater when there is a
high speed differential to other vehicles, for
instance in the following situations:
▷
When approaching a slowly moving ve-
hicle at speed.
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own
lane.
▷ When approaching stationary vehicles at
speed.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively
intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Individual functions may not work correctly
when towing with Front Collision Warning en-
abled or Cruise Control switched on. There is
a risk of accident. Switch off Front Collision
Warning and Cruise Control before towing.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
With Steering Assistant:
Cruise control on/off.
With Steering Assistant:
Select function.
Without Steering Assistant:
Cruise control on/off.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
With Steering Assistant:
Interrupt cruise control.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting.
Without Steering Assistant:
Continue cruise control with the last
setting.
Without Steering Assistant:
Interrupt cruise control.
Increase the distance.
Switch Distance Control on/off.
Seite 206
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Button Function
Reduce distance.
Switch Distance Control on/off.
Rocker switch:
Set speed.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.
▷ Front radar sensor.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Application range
The system is best used on well-maintained
roads.
The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set is limited
and depends, for example, on the vehicle and
the vehicle equipment.
The system can also be activated when sta-
tionary.
Turning Cruise Control on/off or
stopping it
With Steering Assistant: Assisted
Driving Mode
General information
This button is used to switch the con-
figured function on and off.
The button can be used to set the pri-
marily used function.
Setting the function
When the system is active, press the
button repeatedly until the desired
function is selected in the toolbar. The
toolbar for Assisted Driving mode is displayed
at the bottom of the instrument cluster.
Icon Function
Cruise Control with Distance Control.
Cruise Control with Distance Control
and Steering Assistant.
The selected function is shown in green.
Turning on the system
With Steering Assistant:
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. If necessary, set the cruise control.
Without Steering Assistant:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
be turned on.
Turning off the system
To switch off the system while stationary, step
on brake pedal at the same time.
Press the button on the steering wheel:
Seite 207
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
With Steering Assistant.
Without Steering Assistant.
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is
deleted.
Stopping the system manually
When active, press the button on the steering
wheel:
With Steering Assistant.
Without Steering Assistant.
If interrupting the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Stopping the system automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷
When braking manually.
▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ While Dynamic Traction Control is enabled
or Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
▷ When the vehicle is stationary, the seat
belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is
opened.
▷ The system has not detected objects for
an extended period, for instance on a
road with very little traffic without curb or
shoulder markings.
▷ The detection range of the radar is im-
paired, for instance by contamination or
heavy precipitation.
▷ After a longer stationary period when the
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the
system.
Adjusting the speed
Maintaining and storing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted. The system will be
activated.
The current speed is maintained and stored as
desired speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-
ometer.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
be turned on.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
Press the button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
Seite 208
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the
resistance point, the set speed increases or
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Adjusting the distance
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the
system limits, deceleration can be late. There
may be a risk of accidents or risk of dam-
age to property. Be aware to the surround-
ing traffic situation at all times. Adjust the
distance to the traffic and weather conditions
and maintain the prescribed safety distance,
possibly by braking.
Reducing the distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-
tance.
Increasing the distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-
tance.
Automatic adaptation of the distance
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version: the system can be set so that
the distance to the vehicle in front is automati-
cally adjusted within the set distance. The sys-
tem takes into account the traffic situation and
ambient conditions, e.g. poor visibility.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
7. "Situational distance control"
Continuing cruise control
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large be-
fore calling up the stored speed. Otherwise,
unwanted vehicle deceleration or acceleration
may occur.
Press the button on the steering wheel with
the system interrupted:
With Steering Assistant.
Without Steering Assistant.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-
ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷
When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Seite 209
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Changing between Cruise Control
with/without Distance Control
Safety information
Warning
The system does not react to traffic driv-
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the
stored speed. There may be a risk of acci-
dents or risk of damage to property. Adjust
the set speed to the traffic conditions and
brake as needed.
Changing over the Cruise Control mode
Switching Cruise Control without Distance
Control off and on:
▷ Press and hold this button.
▷ Press and hold this button.
With Steering Assistant: switch on Distance
Control:
Press the button.
Without Steering Assistant: switch on Distance
Control:
▷
Press the button.
▷ Press the button.
After changing, a Check Control message is
displayed.
Displays in the instrument cluster
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.
Display in the speedometer
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
speedometer displays the status of the sys-
tem.
▷ Green marking: system is ac-
tive, the marking indicates
the desired speed.
▷ Gray marking: system is in-
terrupted, the marking indi-
cates the stored speed.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Indicator lights and warning lights
Depending on the equipment:
Icon Description
White indicator light:
No distance control display, as the
accelerator pedal is being pressed.
Indicator light illuminates green:
Vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle
in front is detected.
Indicator light flashes green:
Vehicle in front drove off.
Indicator light illuminates gray:
System interrupted.
Indicator light flashes gray:
Conditions are not adequate for the
system to work.
The system was deactivated but ap-
plies the brakes until you actively
resume control by pressing on the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Warning light flashes red and acous-
tic signal sounds:
Brake and make an evasive maneu-
ver, if necessary.
Seite 210
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Assisted View
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View in the central
display area of the instrument cluster.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 151.
Displays in the Head-up display
Set speed
Some system information can also be dis-
played in the Head-up display.
The icon is displayed when the set
speed is reached.
Distance information
The icon is displayed when the dis-
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead
is too short.
The distance information is active in the fol-
lowing situations:
▷
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control
switched off.
▷ Display in the Head-up display selected.
Head-up display, refer to page 137.
▷ Distance too short.
▷ Speed greater than approx.
40 mph/70 km/h.
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
Detection range
The detection capability of the system and the
automatic braking performance are limited.
For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be
detected.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the follow-
ing situations:
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving
road users.
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment and
national availability, for red traffic lights.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
Merging vehicles
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
merges into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis-
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se-
lected distance in certain situations, including
if you are driving significantly faster than vehi-
cles driving ahead of you, for instance when
Seite 211
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle
driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the
system requests that the driver intervene by
braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if
needed.
Cornering
When the set speed is too high for a curve,
the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves
may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a
curve at an appropriate speed.
The system has a limited detection range. Sit-
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi-
cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be
detected very late.
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due
to the bend of the curve. If the system decel-
erates you may compensate for it by briefly
accelerating. After releasing the accelerator
pedal the system is reactivated and controls
speed independently.
Driving off
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep uphill grades.
▷ In front of bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un-
favorable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle detection.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering
or evading.
Drive power
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades
if the drive power is insufficient.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may
exceed or drop below the set desired speed
in some situations, for instance on downhill or
uphill grades.
Speed Limit Assistant
Principle
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the
speed limit. A suggested speed can be ap-
plied.
General information
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit,
this new speed value can be applied for the
following systems:
Seite 212
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Manual Speed Limiter.
▷ Cruise control.
▷ Active Cruise Control with Distance Control.
The speed value is suggested as the new de-
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed
value, the corresponding system must be acti-
vated.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button
Function
Accept suggested speed manually.
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.
Turning Speed Limit Assistant
on/off
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
7. "Speed limits"
8. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Adjust manually": detected speed limits
can be applied manually.
▷ "Show anticipation": Depending on the
national-market version: current and up-
coming speed limits are displayed in
the instrument cluster without being ap-
plied.
▷ "Show current limit": current speed lim-
its are displayed without being applied
in the instrument cluster.
▷ "Off": depending on the national-market
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed
Limit Assistant will be turned off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
A message is displayed in the instrument clus-
ter when the system and a driver assistance
system are activated.
Seite 213
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Icon Function
Depending on the equipment version,
the indicator light illuminates green,
together with the icon for a speed
control system:
Speed Limit Assistant is active and
detected speed limits can be applied
manually for the displayed system.
Detected change of a speed limit with
immediate effect.
Depending on the national-market
version, it is possible to switch be-
tween the units of measurement.
Indicator light illuminates green: the
detected speed limit can be applied
with the SET button.
After it has been applied, a green
checkmark is displayed.
Manual adoption
A detected speed limit can be applied man-
ually for the active driver assistance system.
When the SET icon illuminates, press
the button.
Speed adjustment
Principle
It can be adjusted whether the speed limit is
applied exactly or with a tolerance.
General information
You can configure a speed adaptation for all
speed limits and an additional speed adapta-
tion for speed limits up to 40 mph/60 km/h.
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-
its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or
deactivated.
Setting the speed adjustment
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
7. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Adjust speed limits": set tolerance for
the speed adaptation that affects all
speeds.
▷ "2nd adjustm. up to": activate or deacti-
vate additional speed adaptation.
▷ "Adjust speed limits": With additional
speed adjustment activated, set the
tolerance for speed limits up to
40 mph/60 km/h.
Adapting to route
Principle
Depending on the national-market version, the
system can be configured so that the vehicle
adapts the speed automatically to the route.
For instance, the speed will be reduced in the
following situations, if necessary:
▷
Before making turns.
▷ Before a roundabout.
▷ Before a curve.
Adapting speed automatically to route
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
7. "Adjust to route" or "Automatically adjust
speed to route"
Seite 214
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
System limits
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed
Limit Info system.
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.
Upcoming speed limits can only be applied to
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control.
The system does not react or reacts to a lim-
ited extent to the route ahead in the following
situations:
▷ If the vehicle location cannot be clearly de-
termined by the navigation system.
▷ With wintry road conditions.
Additional information:
▷ System limits of Speed Limit Information,
refer to page 200.
▷ System limits of the sensors, refer to
page 35.
Steering Assistant
Principle
The Steering Assistant helps keep the vehicle
in the lane. For this purpose, the system ex-
ecutes supporting steering movements, for in-
stance when cornering.
General information
Depending on the speed, the system orients
itself according to the lane boundaries or vehi-
cles in front.
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Steering Assistant with Traffic Jam
Assistant on/off.
Switch function on.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.
▷ Front radar sensor.
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Functional requirements
▷
Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▷ Above approx. 43 mph/70 km/h: lane
boundary on both sides is detected.
▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane
boundary on both sides or vehicle driving
ahead is detected.
▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim.
▷ Wide curves.
▷ Drive in the center of the lane.
Seite 215
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Turn signal switched off.
▷ The sensor system calibration process is
complete.
▷ Cruise Control with Distance Control active.
▷ Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.
▷ Forward Collision Warning active.
▷ Pedestrian Warning active.
▷ Side Collision Warning active.
Turning Steering Assistant on/off
Assisted Driving Mode
General information
This button is used to switch the con-
figured function on and off.
The button can be used to set the pri-
marily used function.
Setting the function
When the system is active, press the
button repeatedly until the desired
function is selected in the toolbar. The
toolbar for Assisted Driving mode is displayed
at the bottom of the instrument cluster.
Icon
Function
Cruise Control with Distance Control.
Cruise Control with Distance Control
and Steering Assistant.
The selected function is shown in green.
Turning on the system
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Adjust the Steering Assistant if nec-
essary.
Indicator light illuminates green:
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering movements.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled.
The indicator light illuminates green.
The system is active.
With the system switched on, the Daytime Pe-
destrian Collision Mitigation system and the
Side Collision Warning are activated.
Turning off the system
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator goes out.
The system does not perform supportive
steering wheel movements.
Stopping Steering Assistant
automatically
The system interrupts the supporting steering
movements automatically, for example in the
following situations:
▷
At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ When the steering wheel is released.
▷ When braking manually.
▷ With strong steering intervention.
▷ When leaving own lane.
▷ When the turn signal is switched on.
▷ When the lane is too narrow.
Seite 216
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ If a lane boundary is not detected for a cer-
tain period of time and no vehicle is driving
ahead.
▷ Active Cruise Control with distance control
is stopped.
▷ The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas-
tened.
Indicator light illuminates green:
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering movements.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Icon Description
Indicator light illuminates gray:
The system is ready.
Indicator light illuminates green:
The system is activated.
The system supports the driver in
keeping the vehicle within the lane.
Warning light flashes yellow:
A lane boundary has been crossed.
The steering wheel vibrates where
applicable.
Warning light illuminates yellow and
acoustic signal may sound:
Yellow: System interruption is immi-
nent.
Depending on national-market ver-
sion: The warning light flashes or illu-
minates red. A signal sounds:
The system is switched off.
Icon Description
Warning light illuminates yellow:
Hands are not grasping the steering
wheel. The system is still active.
Warning light illuminates red, acous-
tic signal sounds:
Hands are not grasping the steering
wheel. System interruption is immi-
nent.
The system reduces the speed to a
standstill if applicable.
It is possible that the system will
not execute any supporting steering
movements.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-
ment cluster.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 151.
Displays on the steering wheel
The two LED lights above the buttons illumi-
nate analogously to the displays in the instru-
ment cluster:
▷
Yellow: system interruption is imminent.
▷ Red: system will be deactivated.
Seite 217
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The steering wheel displays can be switched
on/off if required.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Light elements"
Displays in the Head-up display
All system information can also be displayed in
the Head-up display.
System limits
General information
The system cannot be activated or meaning-
fully used in certain situations.
Safety information
Warning
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or
it may react too late or in a manner that is not
consistent with normal use. There may be a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer
to the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s operation
and limitations.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
Hands on the steering wheel
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering
wheel contact in the following situations:
▷
Driving with gloves.
▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel.
Narrow lanes
When driving within narrow lanes, the system
cannot be activated or effectively used, for in-
stance in the following situations:
▷ In construction areas.
▷ Depending on the equipment, with auto-
matic formation of emergency lanes.
▷ Within city limits.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un-
favorable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane
boundaries.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering
or evading.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
Principle
Assisted Driving Mode Plus helps drivers guide
their vehicle through traffic jams.
Supporting steering movements take place
without the driver actively steering.
General information
The system uses the sensors of the Steering
Assistant.
Seite 218
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and
the use of this function may be prohibited or
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and
local laws.
Additionally, the notices for the Steering Assis-
tant apply.
Additional information:
Steering Assistant, refer to page 215.
Functional requirements
▷
The functional requirements of the Steering
Assistant are fulfilled.
Functional requirements, refer to page 215.
▷ The Steering Assistant is active.
▷ The function is only available on certain
street types, e.g. freeways.
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or
cyclists.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▷ Lane markings and a vehicle driving ahead
are detected.
▷ Speed below approx. 40 mph/60 km/h.
▷ The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.
▷ The function must be available in the coun-
try in which the vehicle is driven.
Switching on Assisted Driving Mode
Plus
As soon as all functional requirements
are met, an additional icon for Assisted
Driving Mode Plus will be displayed on
the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed at
the bottom of the instrument cluster.
Select Assisted Driving Mode Plus with
the button on the steering wheel.
The icon for Assisted Driving Mode
Plus is shown in green.
Two green LED lights are illuminated on the
steering wheel.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
shown in green.
The system begins to assist the driver with
vehicle control.
Depending on vehicle equipment, this function
can be enabled/disabled on the control dis-
play.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Assisted Driving"
7. "Assisted Driving Plus"
Displays in the instrument cluster
Icon
Description
Indicator light green: system is active.
Indicator light white: system is ready.
Gray indicator light: the system has
been interrupted.
Seite 219
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Alternative displays
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-
plays in the instrument cluster may vary and
are displayed as follows:
Icon Description
Indicator light green: system is active.
Displays on the steering wheel
The two LED lights above the buttons illumi-
nate analogously to the displays in the instru-
ment cluster:
▷
Green: the system is active.
▷ Yellow: system will be interrupted.
▷ Red: system will be deactivated.
System limits
General information
The limits of the Steering Assistant system ap-
ply.
Additional information:
Steering Assistant, refer to page 215.
Driver Attention Camera
The limits of the Driver Attention Camera sys-
tem apply.
Additional information:
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 193.
Automatic Lane Change
Assistant
Principle
The Automatic Lane Change Assistant also
assists when changing lanes on multi-lane
roads.
General information
The system uses the sensors of the Steering
Assistant.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Additionally, the notices for the Steering Assis-
tant apply.
Additional information:
Steering Assistant, refer to page 215.
Functional requirements
▷
The functional requirements of the Steering
Assistant are fulfilled.
Functional requirements, refer to page 215.
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy-
clists and with physical barriers to oncom-
ing traffic, such as crash barriers.
▷ Crossable lane boundaries are detected.
▷ Maximum speed approx.
110 mph/180 km/h.
Seite 220
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ The minimum speed is country-specific.
▷ The function must be available in the coun-
try in which the vehicle is driven.
Turning on/turning off Automatic
Lane Change Assistant
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Assisted Driving"
7. "Automatic Lane Change"
Changing lanes
1.
Ensure that the traffic situation permits
changing lanes.
2. Press the turn signal lever in the required
direction to the pressure point for signaling
briefly.
A supporting steering movement in the re-
quired direction can be detected a short
time later.
After the lane change, the system helps keep
the vehicle in the new lane.
Canceling a lane change
The lane change can be canceled by steering
movement into the opposite direction.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Icon Description
Green steering wheel icon.
Green arrow icon for lane-changing.
The system carries out a lane
change.
Green steering wheel icon.
Gray line for lane marking on the ap-
propriate side.
The system detected the lane change
request. Lane change not currently
possible.
Depending on the national-market
version:
Green steering wheel icon.
Gray arrow icon for lane-changing.
Lane change not possible; functional
requirements not met.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-
ment cluster.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 151.
Alternative displays
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-
plays in the instrument cluster may vary and
are displayed as follows:
Seite 221
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Icon Description
Green steering wheel icon.
Gray line for lane marking on
the appropriate side.
Green arrow icon for lane-
changing.
The system carries out a lane
change.
Green steering wheel icon.
Gray line for lane marking on
the appropriate side.
No arrow icon for lane-chang-
ing on the display.
The system detected the lane
change request. Lane change
not currently possible.
Depending on the national-
market version:
Green steering wheel icon.
Gray line for lane marking on
the appropriate side.
Gray arrow icon for lane-
changing.
Lane change not possible;
functional requirements not
met.
System limits
The limits of the Steering Assistant system ap-
ply.
Additional information:
Steering Assistant, refer to page 215.
Seite 222
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Parking
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Parking assistance systems
General information
The parking assistance systems include differ-
ent individual systems. The individual systems
provide support with assistance functions, sen-
sors and different camera views when parking
and maneuvering or driving in reverse.
Additional information:
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 228.
▷ Automatic camera perspective, refer to
page 228.
▷ Side view, refer to page 229.
▷ 3D view, refer to page 230.
▷ Car wash view, refer to page 230.
▷ Panorama View, refer to page 230.
▷ Door opening angle, refer to page 232.
▷ Remote 3D View, refer to page 232.
▷ Park Distance Control, refer to page 233.
▷ Active Park Distance Control, refer to
page 236.
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
page 237.
▷ Back-up Assistant, refer to page 241.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Panorama View
Sensors
The parking assistance systems are controlled
by the following sensors:
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
Seite 223
Parking
CONTROLS
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
▷ Front camera.
▷ Top view cameras.
▷ Rearview camera.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Operating concept
The camera-based individual systems are op-
erated with the function bars on the control
display. The camera views can be viewed by
selecting the appropriate icon.
Some parking assistance systems can be set
individually in the Park menu.
Calling up Park menu
Via Parking Assistant button
1.
Press the button.
2. "Settings"
3. Select the desired settings.
Via iDrive
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
6. Select the desired settings.
Display
Principle
The parking assistance systems support park-
ing and maneuvering or reversing by display-
ing Park Distance Control and various camera
views.
General information
Depending on the equipment, one or more
cameras capture the area from different se-
lectable perspectives.
Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround-
ings or a part of it is depicted.
Depending on national-market version, the au-
tomatic camera perspective or the rearview
camera is displayed.
Turning display on/off
General information
The parking assistance systems view switches
off automatically when driving forwards or if a
certain distance or speed is exceeded.
With reverse
When drive-ready state is switched on, the dis-
play is automatically switched on if selector
lever position R is engaged.
Via Parking Assistant button
Press the button.
Display on the control display
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment and on the
activated parking assistance system, the con-
trol display will vary.
Seite 224
CONTROLS
Parking
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Without Parking Assistant Plus
1 Toolbar, left
2 Camera image
3 Selection window
4 Toolbar, right
With Parking Assistant Plus
1 Toolbar, left
2 Camera image
3 Selection window
4 Automatic camera perspective
5 Side view
6 Rearview camera
7 Toolbar, right
Toolbar, left
Different views can be selected using the left
toolbar depending on vehicle equipment:
▷
"Rear view camera"
The view of the rearview camera is dis-
played.
▷ "Only park. sensors"
The Park Distance Control view is dis-
played.
▷ "Parking"
The view of different camera perspectives
is displayed.
▷ "3D view"
A three-dimensional view is displayed.
▷ "Car wash"
The display of your own lane can be turned
on for easier driving into the car wash.
Toolbar, right
The parking assistance functions are displayed
in the right toolbar. The display may vary de-
pending on vehicle equipment.
▷ Status of the parking assistance systems.
▷ "Autom. Parking"
Functions of the Automatic Parking Assis-
tant.
▷ "Back-Up Assistant"
Functions of the Back-up Assistant.
▷ "Settings"
Settings in the Park menu.
Status of parking assistance
systems
The status of active parking assistance sys-
tems is indicated by icons in the right-hand
toolbar.
Seite 225
Parking
CONTROLS
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Icon Meaning
No search for Automatic Parking
Assistant offers.
Automatic Parking Assistant has
failed.
Search for Automatic Parking As-
sistant offers is active.
Automatic Parking Assistant: if the
icon is green, the Automatic Parking
Assistant is active. The system as-
sumes vehicle control.
Back-up Assistant: if the icon is
green, the Back-up Assistant is ac-
tive. The system takes over the
steering.
Additional displays
General information
Additional displays can be shown in the cam-
era image of the display of the parking assis-
tance systems, e.g., parking aid lines, to make
parking and maneuvering easier.
Several additional displays can be active at the
same time.
Turning additional displays on/off
Via Parking Assistant button
1.
Enable the camera image.
2. "Settings"
3. Select the desired settings.
Via iDrive
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
6. Select the desired setting.
Parking aid lines
Pathway lines
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Lane lines are displayed in front of or behind
the vehicle depending on the gear engaged.
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted
to the steering movements depending on the
steering-wheel angle.
Turning circle lines
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
The lines show the course of the smallest pos-
sible turning circle on a level road.
Only one turning circle line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-
gle.
Seite 226
CONTROLS
Parking
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Using parking aid lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
circle line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre-
sponding turning circle line.
Obstacle marking
Obstacles are detected by the sensors.
The obstacles detected by the Park Distance
Control are shown by marks in the camera im-
age.
Colored gradients for the obstacle markings in
green, yellow and red indicate the distances.
Functional limitations
The system can be used only to a limited ex-
tent in the following situations:
▷
With a door open.
▷ With open cargo area.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
Areas with gray hatching with an icon in the
camera image identify areas that are currently
not shown, such as an open door.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or
it may react too late or in a manner that is not
consistent with normal use. There may be a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer
to the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s operation
and limitations.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Field of view
Because of the camera angle, the areas under
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
The objects displayed on the control display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti-
mate the distance to the objects on the control
display.
Protruding cargo or a rear-mounted luggage
rack can limit the detection range of the cam-
era.
Malfunction
A camera failure is displayed on the control
display.
The detection range of the failed camera is
shown shaded on the control display.
Seite 227
Parking
CONTROLS
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Rearview camera
Principle
The rearview camera helps when reverse
parking and maneuvering. The area behind the
vehicle is shown on the control display.
Additional views can be shown on the display,
e.g., parking aid lines and obstacle markings.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Functional requirements
▷ The trunk is fully closed.
▷ The camera area is clean and clear.
Turning the rearview camera on/off
Turning the camera view on
automatically
When drive-ready state is switched on, the
rearview camera is automatically switched on
if selector lever position R is engaged.
Turning the camera view off
automatically
The rearview camera turns off automatically
when driving forward or when a certain dis-
tance or speed is exceeded.
Turning the camera view on/off
manually
Without Parking Assistant Plus
1.
Press the button.
2. Select the icon on the left toolbar.
To exit the rearview camera view, select
another camera view on the left toolbar.
With Parking Assistant Plus
1. Press the button.
2. Select the icon in the selection window.
To exit the rearview camera view, select
another camera view in the selection win-
dow.
Deactivated rearview camera
When the rearview camera is deactivated, for
instance when the trunk is open, the camera
image is displayed with gray shading.
Automatic camera
perspective
Principle
The automatic camera perspective shows a
steering-dependent view in the respective driv-
ing direction.
This perspective adapts to the respective driv-
ing situation.
General information
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
changes to a fixed display of the area in
front of or behind the bumper or, if necessary,
changes to side protection.
When the reverse gear is engaged, the auto-
matic camera perspective is exited if necessary
and the rearview camera view is displayed.
If necessary, select the automatic camera per-
spective when reverse gear is engaged. The
automatic camera perspective will then be
maintained for the current parking operation.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Seite 228
CONTROLS
Parking
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Turning the automatic camera
perspective on/off
Turning the camera view on/off
automatically
When the parking assistance systems' display
is turned on, automatic camera perspective is
selected automatically.
The icon in the selection window is selected
automatically.
To exit the steering-dependent camera view,
select another camera view in the selection
window.
Turning the camera view on/off
manually
1.
Press the button.
2. Select the icon in the selection window.
To exit the steering-dependent camera
view, select another camera view in the se-
lection window.
Side protection
Principle
The side Park Distance Control is automati-
cally displayed when the automatic camera
perspective is turned on. The function shows
obstacles located next to the vehicle.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Display
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-
hicle.
▷ No markings: no obstacles detected.
▷ Color marks: warning against detected ob-
stacles.
System limits
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
The system does not detect whether an obsta-
cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand-
still, the marks are not shown anymore in the
display after a certain time. The area next to
the vehicle must be newly captured.
Side view
Principle
Side view shows the vehicle's side surround-
ings, making it easier to position the vehicle at
the curb or with other obstacles on the side.
The side view looks from rear to front and, in
case of danger, focuses automatically on pos-
sible obstacles.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Seite 229
Parking
CONTROLS
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Turning the side view on/off
The selection window lets you choose the side
view for the left or right side of the vehicle.
1. Press the button.
2. Select the icon for the desired vehicle
side in the selection window.
To exit the side view, select another cam-
era view in the selection window.
3D view
Principle
When 3D view is selected, a circle is displayed
on the control display.
Specified perspectives can be selected on the
circle.
General information
The current perspective is marked with a cam-
era icon.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Turning the 3D view on/off
1.
Press the button.
2. "3D view"
To exit the 3D view, select another camera
view on the left toolbar.
Car wash view
Principle
The car wash view helps when driving into a
car wash.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Turning the car wash view on/off
1. Press the button.
2. "Car wash"
To exit the car wash view, select a different
camera view in the left toolbar.
Display
Your own lane is displayed for easier driving
into a car wash.
This view can be used to position the vehicle
correctly within the washing system guide rails.
In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll
freely forward.
Additional information:
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 122.
Panorama View
Principle
The panoramic view gives you an earlier view
of crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and
intersections.
Seite 230
CONTROLS
Parking
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
General information
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
and right of the vehicle can only be detected
relatively late from the driver's seat. The front
camera and the rearview camera capture the
area around the side of the vehicle to improve
the view.
The camera image shows different levels of
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita-
ble for distance estimations.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the function
can be used when driving forward or in re-
verse.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following cam-
eras:
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Front camera.
Turning the panoramic view on/off
Press the button.
Display
Yellow lines on the screen display identify the
bumpers of your own vehicle.
Depending on the engaged selector lever posi-
tion, the camera view of the rearview camera
or front camera will be displayed.
Automatic activation of panorama
view
Principle
Positions at which panorama view should
switch on automatically can be saved as acti-
vation points.
General information
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
Activation points can be used when driving for-
wards.
Follow instructions in the Parking assistance
systems chapter.
Functional requirements
▷ A GPS signal must be received.
▷ A BMW ID or driver profile must be ena-
bled.
▷ The direction of travel, selector lever posi-
tion, and vehicle angle must correspond to
a stored activation point.
Storing activation points
1.
Drive the vehicle to the position where the
system should switch on and stop.
2. Press the button.
3. "Activation point"
The current position is displayed.
4. "Save activation point"
Activation points are stored with one of the
following pieces of information if possible:
▷
With the city/town.
▷ With the city/town and the street.
▷ With the GPS coordinates.
Seite 231
Parking
CONTROLS
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Using activation points
The use of activation points can be switched
on and off.
1. Press the button.
2. "Settings"
3. "GPS-based"
Displaying activation points
1. Press the button.
2. "Manage points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
Editing activation points
1.
Press the button.
2. "Manage points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
3. Select an activation point as needed.
4. Select the desired setting.
Door opening angle
Principle
Depending on vehicle equipment, the door
opening angle display is shown automatically
when stationary.
This display helps to estimate how far the
doors can be opened when parking.
If obstacle marking is activated, the parking
view indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the
opening angles of the doors.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Display
The maximum opening angle of the doors is
displayed in selector lever position P.
System limits
The system does not provide a warning of ap-
proaching road users.
The vehicle's surroundings are distorted in the
display for technical reasons.
Even if the door opening angle indicator on the
control display does not overlap with any other
objects, it is necessary to park carefully next to
other objects.
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding
objects may be closer than they appear on the
control display.
Remote 3D View
Principle
The My BMW App and camera views in park-
ing view, such as automatic camera perspec-
tive, enable you to display the vehicle’s sur-
roundings on a mobile device.
The function displays a snapshot of the situa-
tion.
General information
For reasons of data protection, the function
can only be used three times within two hours.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Seite 232
CONTROLS
Parking
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following cam-
eras:
▷ Front camera.
▷ Top view cameras.
▷ Rearview camera.
Functional requirements
▷ Data transfer must be activated.
Data protection, refer to page 62.
▷ The My BMW App must be installed on the
mobile end device.
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: a BMW ID with
an existing ConnectedDrive account must
be activated.
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 63.
Activating/deactivating Remote 3D
View
The function can be activated or deactivated
individually or together with other functions.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.
After activation, Remote 3D View can be
accessed using the My BMW App.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷
With a door or the cargo area open. Dark
fields in the display indicate areas that are
not recorded by the system.
▷ With manually folded-in exterior mirrors.
▷ When other camera functions are being
performed in the vehicle.
▷ The vehicle moves faster than walking
speed.
▷ In case of missing or weak Internet connec-
tion.
Park Distance Control
Principle
Park Distance Control assists with parking.
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles
in front of or behind the vehicle.
Obstacles that are detected by the side ultra-
sonic sensors can also be reported.
General information
The range of the system, depending on obsta-
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-
pending collision at a distance to the object of
approx. 27 in/70 cm.
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
warning is issued as early as a distance to the
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Seite 233
Parking
CONTROLS
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Warning
Due to high speeds when the Park Distance
Control is activated, the warning can be de-
layed due to physical circumstances. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off quickly while Park Distance Control
is not yet active.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
Turning Park Distance Control
on/off
Turning on the system automatically
The system switches on automatically in the
following situations:
▷
When drive-ready state is switched on
when selector lever position R is engaged.
▷ While approaching detected obstacles
if the speed is lower than approx.
2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance
depends on the situation in question.
The automatic activation of detected obstacles
can be activated or deactivated.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
6. "Automatic PDC activation"
Turning off the system automatically
When driving forward, the system turns off au-
tomatically as needed when a certain distance
or speed is exceeded.
Turning the system on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED illuminates.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
If the system is manually switched on when
the reverse gear is engaged, the rearview
camera image is displayed.
Depending on the national-market version, the
system cannot be turned off manually when
the reverse gear is engaged.
Acoustic warning
General information
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
is approaching an object. E.g., when an object
is detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a
sound is heard from the rear left speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals of the intermittent tones.
When the distance to a detected object is less
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
When there are objects in front of and behind
the vehicle at the same time, at a distance
smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating
continuous tone will sound between the front
and rear speakers.
The intermittent tones and the continuous tone
are turned off when selector lever position P is
engaged.
Depending on national-market version, the in-
termittent tones are switched off after a short
time when the vehicle is stationary.
If an object approaches when the vehicle is
stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.
Seite 234
CONTROLS
Parking
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Adjusting the volume
The volume of the acoustic warning can be
adjusted.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
6. "PDC signal volume"
7. Set the desired value.
Visual warning
General information
The approach to an object is displayed on the
control display as soon as the system is acti-
vated.
Objects that are farther away are already dis-
played before a signal sounds.
Depending on the view, pathway lines, turning
circle lines and obstacle markings are shown
for a better estimation of the space required.
Depending on the equipment, the detection
range of the sensors is represented by shaded
annular surfaces. Green, yellow, and red mark-
ings indicate when obstacles are detected in
the detection zone.
When equipped with cross traffic warning: de-
pending on vehicle equipment, a warning is
also shown for vehicles approaching at the
rear and front from the side.
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-
hicle.
Display
Depending on vehicle equipment, warnings
may be displayed in front of, next to, and be-
hind the vehicle.
View behind vehicle.
View next to vehicle.
▷ Shaded area: detection range of sensors.
▷ Gray shaded area: no obstacles were de-
tected in the detection range.
▷ Colored marks in shaded area: obstacles
were detected in the detection range.
▷ Shaded area interrupted: the area next to
the vehicle has not yet been detected.
System limits
General information
The function for protecting the vehicle sides
only shows stationary obstacles that were pre-
viously detected by the sensors when passing
by.
The system does not detect whether an obsta-
cle moves later on. When the vehicle is station-
ary, the gray shaded areas on the sides are
hidden after a certain time. The area on the
side of the vehicle must be newly captured.
Also follow the information on system limits in
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.
Seite 235
Parking
CONTROLS
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Unwarranted warnings
Reaching the system limits can cause unwar-
ranted warnings.
To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance
in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis-
tance Control activation on obstacle detection.
Malfunction
An icon is displayed on the control dis-
play.
Depending on the vehicle equipment:
the detection range of the sensors is not dis-
played on the control display.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the
vehicle checked by an authorized service cen-
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Active Park Distance Control
Principle
The Park Distance Control brake function ini-
tiates emergency braking if there is an acute
risk of collision.
General information
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre-
vented under all circumstances.
The function is available below walking speed
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.
Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the
brake intervention. Emergency braking is not
performed.
After emergency braking to a stop, further
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro-
ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly
press the accelerator pedal and release as
needed.
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer,
the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi-
ble at any time.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumpers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
Deactivating Active Park Distance
Control temporarily
After emergency braking, the function can be
temporarily deactivated on the control display.
1.
"Obstacle detected. Emergency braking."
2. "Deactivate temporarily"
During continued driving in this surrounding
situation, no further emergency braking will
occur.
The function is automatically reactivated when
Park Distance Control is switched on again.
Seite 236
CONTROLS
Parking
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Settings
It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle
will be protected by the system.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
6. "Active PDC emergency braking"
7. Select the desired setting.
Display
As soon as the system engages, an
icon is displayed with a corresponding
message.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Automatic Parking Assistant
Principle
Automatic Parking Assistant provides support
when parallel parking and parking transverse
to the road.
In addition, the system makes it easier to park
out of parallel parking spaces.
The ultrasonic sensors measure both sides of
the vehicle when driving slowly forward. Suita-
ble parking spaces are calculated based on the
objects detected, e.g., parking vehicles. The
system status is displayed.
The system calculates the best possible park-
ing line for driving in or out of parking spaces,
and takes control of the vehicle while parking.
The operating principle and operation of the
system is divided into the following steps:
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Turning on.
▷ Parking.
▷ Driving out of parking spaces.
The parking manoeuver during parking is per-
formed automatically.
When driving out of parallel parking spaces,
the vehicle maneuvers automatically until it
reaches a position where it can be driven out
of the parking space without further steering
movements.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Warning
The system can steer the vehicle over or
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Watch surrounding
traffic closely and actively intervene where
appropriate.
Seite 237
Parking
CONTROLS
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Parking methods
Park Assist supports the following functions:
Parallel parking: reverse parking parallel to the
road.
Perpendicular parking: reverse parking per-
pendicular to the road.
Driving out of parallel parking spaces.
Sensors
The Automatic Parking Assistant is controlled
by the following sensors:
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
Functional requirements
Measurement of parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap-
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
Longitudinal parking:
▷ Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.
▷ Minimum length of gap between two ob-
jects: own vehicle length plus approx.
2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Perpendicular parking:
▷ Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
▷ Minimum depth: own vehicle length.
The depth of perpendicular parking spaces
must be estimated by the driver. Due to
technical limitations, the system is only able
to approximate the depth of perpendicular
parking spaces.
Parking operation
▷
Doors and cargo area are closed.
▷ Driver's seat belt is fastened.
Leaving parking spaces
▷
The vehicle was parked using the Auto-
matic Parking Assistant, and an object has
been detected in the area around the vehi-
cle.
▷ The vehicle was manually parked in re-
verse, and objects have been detected in
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. The
Seite 238
CONTROLS
Parking
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
distance to a detected curb is at least 6 in-
ches/15 cm.
▷ The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m
longer than the vehicle.
Turning the signal tone on/off
The signal tone for suitable parking spaces
can be turned on and off.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
6. "Sound when available"
Parking using the Automatic
Parking Assistant
1.
For the parking space search when driving
past parked vehicles at a speed of up to
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of
max. 5 ft/1.5 m.
The parking space search is activated.
2. Press the button or engage reverse
gear.
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the control display.
3. Select suggested parking method.
Green: the system takes control of the
parking operation.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
Depending on national-market version, an
intermittent or continuous tone sounds for
Park Distance Control.
At the end of the parking operation, selec-
tor lever position P is set.
The end of the parking operation is indi-
cated on the control display.
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Driving out of a parking space using
the Automatic Parking Assistant
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
2. With the vehicle at a standstill, press
button or engage reverse gear.
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
3. Select the desired direction for driving out
of the parking space on the control display.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Green: the system takes control of ma-
neuvering.
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
A message will be displayed at the end of
the maneuver.
5. Make sure that the traffic situation permits
driving out of parking space and driving off
as usual.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is turned
off automatically.
Canceling Automatic Parking
Assistant manually
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be can-
celed manually at any time, e.g.:
▷
Press the button.
▷ "Autom. Parking": select the icon on the
control display.
Seite 239
Parking
CONTROLS
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Canceling Automatic Parking
Assistant automatically
The system automatically cancels in situations
such as the following:
▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-
pear.
▷ With insufficient distances, which are indi-
cated by Park Distance Control.
▷ When a maximum number of parking at-
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex-
ceeded.
▷ When changing over to another function on
the control display.
▷ The turn signal opposite to the desired
parking side is switched on.
▷ With open cargo area.
▷ With the doors open.
▷ When setting the parking brake.
▷ When operating the accelerator pedal or
the selector lever.
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed for
longer while the vehicle is at a standstill.
▷ When unfastening the driver's seat belt.
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable.
Continuing the parking operation
If parking or leaving a parking space has been
interrupted, the operation can be continued, if
needed.
Restart the Automatic Parking Assistant and
follow the instructions on the control display.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
No parking assistance
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of-
fer assistance in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
▷ For parking spaces that are only marked
with lines on the ground. The system ori-
ents itself according to objects.
▷ For special parking lots such as pay parking
lots with automatic locking mechanisms,
coin parking or mechanical parking sys-
tems.
Under certain environmental conditions, park-
ing out with Park Assist may be temporarily
unavailable. The system limits of the Park Dis-
tance Control and the Automatic Parking As-
sistant continue to apply.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
parking space.
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
of a port.
▷ Parking spaces that are not suitable may
be detected or suitable parking spaces may
not be detected at all.
Seite 240
CONTROLS
Parking
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The Automatic Parking Assistant has malfunc-
tioned. Have the vehicle checked by an author-
ized service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Back-up assistant
Principle
The Back-up Assistant assists when driving in
reverse, for instance when driving out of tight
or confusing parking or street situations.
General information
The vehicle stores the driving movements of
the last distance covered. This stored distance
can be driven in reverse with automated steer-
ing.
The system takes over the steering. The speed
must be controlled by the driver using the ac-
celerator pedal and the brake.
A maximum of 164 ft/50 m are stored.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Warning
The system can steer the vehicle over or
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Watch surrounding
traffic closely and actively intervene where
appropriate.
Functional requirements
▷ Drive forward without interruption to store
the distance covered.
▷ To store the distance covered, do not drive
faster than 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Dynamic Stability Control is activated.
Driving in reverse with automated
steering
1.
Turn on drive-ready state.
2. With the vehicle at a standstill, press
button or engage reverse gear.
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
3. "Back-Up Assistant"
Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play where required.
4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and
carefully drive in reverse with the accelera-
tor pedal and the brake.
Green: the system takes control of
steering.
When driving in reverse, observe the vehi-
cle's surroundings.
In case of obstacles, stop immediately and
take over control of the vehicle. Follow the
instructions for Park Distance Control.
5. Right before the end of the stored distance
covered, a signal tone will sound and a
message is displayed.
Seite 241
Parking
CONTROLS
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Stop no later than when normal road traffic
is reached and take control of the vehicle,
such as by shifting to forward gear.
Canceling the Back-up Assistant
manually
The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assis-
tant can be canceled manually:
▷ Via touchscreen: "Back-Up Assistant"
▷ Press the button.
Canceling the Back-up Assistant
automatically
The system automatically cancels in situations
such as the following:
▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
▷ When shifting from reverse to another se-
lector lever position.
▷ During activation or intervention by driver
assistance systems.
▷ After an extended period of time when the
vehicle is stationary.
▷ When exiting the stored lane when revers-
ing, for instance with maximum steering-
wheel angle.
▷ When the view on the control display is
overlaid with messages.
▷ In case of a slippery surface.
▷ When the vehicle is rolling, such as on a
slope.
▷ In case of changed ambient conditions.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/9 km/h.
System limits
▷
The maximum speed when driving in re-
verse is limited to approx. 6 mph/9 km/h.
A warning is issued at a speed of approx.
4 mph/7 km/h.
If the maximum speed is exceeded, the
function is interrupted.
▷ After driving a stored distance covered with
major steering-wheel angles, the function
of the system will be limited for the return
trip.
Different influences can lead to side deviations
when driving the stored distance covered in re-
verse. For example, this includes the following
factors:
▷ Steering movements when the vehicle is
stationary while storing the distance cov-
ered.
▷ The speed is not adapted to the distance
covered.
▷ Certain road characteristics, such as gradi-
ents, inclines or slippery road surface.
▷ Greatly deviating conditions when storing
and driving the route, for instance other
tires or changed ambient conditions like
weather.
Also follow the information on system limits in
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.
Seite 242
CONTROLS
Parking
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Adaptive M chassis
Principle
The Adaptive M chassis is an intelligent, con-
trollable sport chassis.
The chassis reduces body movements with a
sporty driving style or on an uneven road.
General information
The intelligent control of the chassis increases
the driving dynamics and driving comfort de-
pending on the road condition and driving
style.
Setting
The system offers different shock absorber
settings ranging from comfortable travel to
sporty driving.
The shock absorbers are adjusted depending
on the selected driving mode as well as the
road condition and driving style.
Additional information:
Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 125.
BMW IconicSounds
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the vehicle drive sound can be
adjusted using BMW IconicSounds.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "IconicSounds"
6. Select the desired setting.
Seite 243
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Air conditioning control
Overview
Functions in the Climate menu
Icon Function
Automatic program.
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
Maximum cooling.
Air recirculation mode.
Automatic recirculated-air con-
trol.
Fresh air.
Icon Function
Air flow.
Air distribution.
SYNC program.
Seat heating.
Active seat ventilation.
Buttons, automatic climate control
Icon Function
Defrost function.
Rear window defroster.
Seite 244
CONTROLS
Climate control
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Buttons, rear automatic climate control
Icon Function
Automatic program.
Temperature.
Air distribution.
Switching off.
View on the control display
1
Toolbar
2 Climate control functions, driver's side
3 Climate control functions
4 Climate control functions, passenger's side
5 Climate control bar
Calling up climate control functions
Via climate control bar:
"CLIMATE MENU" tap in the center of the cli-
mate control bar.
Or:
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Climate control"
Turning the air conditioning system
on/off
1.
"CLIMATE MENU"
2. "All climate functions"
The complete air conditioning system is turned
on/off with the last settings.
When the air conditioning system is turned
on, individual climate control functions can be
turned off.
Turning rear automatic climate
control on/off
Functional requirements
▷
Automatic climate control is turned on.
▷ Defrost function is deactivated.
Via iDrive
1.
"CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Second row of seats"
4. "Rear climate control"
5. Select the desired setting.
The rear automatic climate control can be ac-
tivated with standard setting for temperature
and AUTO program:
"Activate with default settings"
Switching on using the button
Press one of the following buttons:
Seite 245
Climate control
CONTROLS
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Temperature.
▷ Automatic program.
▷ Air distribution, manual.
Switching off using the button
Press the button.
Locking the rear automatic climate
control
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Second row of seats"
4. "Lock rear climate control"
Automatic program
Principle
The automatic program ensures a comforta-
ble climate, which can be modified with the
desired temperature and individual settings.
The automatic program cools, ventilates or
heats the vehicle interior automatically.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the automatic
program provides the best possible settings
for climate control functions depending on
the outside temperature, interior temperature,
sunlight, seat occupancy and the desired tem-
perature setting:
▷
Air flow.
▷ Air distribution.
▷ Temperature.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Active seat ventilation.
The automatic program takes seat occupancy
into account, regulating the climate in an en-
ergy-efficient manner that is tailored to the oc-
cupants.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-
trols the automatic program in order to prevent
window condensation to the extent possible.
Turning the automatic program
on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Automatic program"
3. Select the desired setting.
Switching the rear climate control
automatic program on/off
Using the button
Press the button.
The LED of the button is illuminated
when the automatic program is turned
on.
Setting the intensity
General information
When the automatic program is activated, the
intensity of individual climate control functions
can be individually adjusted, for example:
▷
"LOW"
▷ "MEDIUM"
▷ "HIGH"
Each level has a specific control range of the
intensity.
Based on the stored data models, the intensi-
ties are dynamically adjusted while driving. It is
not necessary to manually change the desired
intensity to lower or higher levels while driving.
Seite 246
CONTROLS
Climate control
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Example of function
When the automatic program is turned on, the
intensity of the seat heating can be adjusted:
1. "CLIMATE MENU" tap in the center of the
climate control bar.
2. Seat heating.
3. Select desired setting, for example, "HIGH".
The individually selected settings of the cli-
mate control functions are stored and auto-
matically set up again, such as after the vehicle
is started again.
Display
The indicator in the climate control bar pro-
vides information about the temperature differ-
ence between the configured desired tempera-
ture and current interior temperature.
▷ The red or blue bar next to the temperature
display indicates the progress of heating or
cooling.
▷ The desired interior temperature is reached
as soon as the bar is no longer displayed.
Active climate control functions such as seat
heating are displayed as icons in the climate
control bar.
Active climate control functions are highlighted
in color in the climate control menu.
Temperature
Principle
The automatic climate control cools or heats
to the configured temperature and then keeps
the temperature constant.
General information
Do not rapidly switch between different tem-
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-
just the set temperature.
Setting the temperature
You can set the desired temperature for driver
and front passenger individually on the menu
bar.
▷ Raise the temperature.
▷ Lower temperature.
Configuring the temperature
adjustment
When the automatic program is switched on,
the heating and cooling speed can be adjusted
as follows:
▷ "BALANCED".
This setting enables a smooth, low-noise
adjustment of the interior temperature.
▷ "DYNAMIC".
The setting enables a quick adjustment of
the interior temperature with a high air vol-
ume.
Setting the rear automatic climate
control temperature
Via iDrive
1.
"CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Second row of seats"
4. Set the desired temperature.
Seite 247
Climate control
CONTROLS
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Using the button
Press the left or right button side to set
the desired temperature.
Upper body temperature
General information
The air temperature in the upper body area
can be adjusted.
This does not change the set interior tempera-
ture for the driver and front passenger.
Adjusting the upper body temperature
1.
"CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Temp. adjustment upper body"
4. Increase or decrease temperature.
Air conditioning
Principle
The air in the interior will be cooled and dehu-
midified and, depending on the temperature
setting, warmed again.
Functional requirement
Standby or drive-ready state is switched on.
Switching the cooling function on/off
1.
"CLIMATE MENU"
2. "A/C"
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
the side windows may fog up briefly when
drive-ready state is switched on.
When using the cooling mode, condensation
that will exit below the vehicle.
Maximum cooling
Principle
The function enables a quick and intense cool-
ing of the interior.
General information
The system is set to the lowest temperature
and maximum air volume.
The function is automatically activated in the
rear when the SYNC program is turned on.
Functional requirement
The function is available at an outside temper-
ature above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Turning maximum cooling on/off
1.
"CLIMATE MENU"
2. "MAX A/C"
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body
area. Open the vents.
Air recirculation mode
Principle
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-
tants in the immediate environment by tempo-
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the interior air.
General information
If there is window condensation, turn off the air
recirculation.
When the air recirculation is turned off, outside
air is directed into the interior.
In the automatic recirculated-air control, out-
side air is drawn in or the interior air is circu-
lated, depending on the outside air quality.
Seite 248
CONTROLS
Climate control
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation
mode.
Turning air recirculation on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. The current operating mode is displayed in
the toolbar. Select the desired setting in the
toolbar:
▷ "Air recirculation"
▷ "Fresh air"
▷ "Auto air recirculation"
Depending on vehicle equipment, air recircula-
tion will turn off automatically based on ambi-
ent conditions in order to prevent window con-
densation.
Air flow
General information
The air flow generated by the blower can be
adjusted as needed.
Adjusting the air flow
1.
"CLIMATE MENU"
2. Air flow.
3. Select the desired setting.
The air flow may be reduced to preserve the
vehicle battery.
Air distribution settings
General information
The air distribution can be adjusted as re-
quired in manual mode.
Adjusting the air distribution
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. Air distribution.
3. Select the desired setting.
The selected air distribution is displayed.
Adjusting the air distribution of the
rear climate control
Press the button repeatedly. Select the
desired setting.
The selected air distribution is shown
on the climate control display.
SYNC program
Principle
If SYNC program is activated, the settings on
the driver's side are transfered to the passeng-
er's side and to the rear.
General information
The following settings can be transferred:
▷
Temperature.
▷ Air distribution.
▷ Automatic program.
Turning the SYNC program on/off
1.
"CLIMATE MENU"
2. "SYNC"
If the settings on the front passenger side or in
the rear are changed, the program is automati-
cally switched off.
Seite 249
Climate control
CONTROLS
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Defrost function
Principle
With the defrost function, ice and condensation
are quickly removed from the windshield and
the front side windows.
General information
The air flow and air temperature are automati-
cally optimized for the removal of ice and con-
densation.
The air distribution is directed toward the
windshield and front side windows.
If there is window condensation, turn on the
automatic program to take advantage of the
condensation sensor. Make sure that air can
flow to the windshield.
When the defrost function is turned on, the rear
automatic climate control is deactivated to pro-
vide maximum performance.
Turning the defrost function on/off
Press the button.
The LED of the button is illuminated
when the system is switched on.
Rear window defroster
Principle
With the rear window defroster, ice and con-
densation are quickly removed from the rear
window.
Functional requirement
Standby or drive-ready state is switched on.
Turning the rear window defroster
on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with rear win-
dow defroster switched on.
The rear window defroster switches off auto-
matically after a certain period of time.
Seat heating
Principle
The system heats the seats as necessary.
General information
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-
nutes after an intermediate stop, the functions
are turned on automatically with the tempera-
ture that was last set.
Turning the seat heating on/off
1.
"CLIMATE MENU" tap in the center of the
climate control bar.
2. Seat heating.
3. Select the desired setting.
If a consumption-optimized driving mode is se-
lected, the heater output is reduced.
Active seat ventilation
Principle
The system cools the seat and backrest sur-
faces as necessary, ensuring a pleasant seat
temperature.
Seite 250
CONTROLS
Climate control
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Switching the active seat ventilation
on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU" tap in the center of the
climate control bar.
2. Seat ventilation.
3. Select the desired setting.
If a consumption-optimized driving mode is se-
lected, the cooling output is reduced.
Ventilation
Principle
The ventilation system offers individual ranges
of adjustment for direct or indirect ventilation
to optimize the air flows in the vehicle.
General information
Open the air vents and position them to ensure
effective climate control.
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depend-
ing on the set desired temperature.
Front ventilation
▷
Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-
row 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for the variable adjustment of
the air flow on the vents, arrows 2.
Ventilation in the rear
▷ Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-
row 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and clos-
ing of the air vents, arrow 2.
Setting the ventilation
Depending on the desired ventilation, align the
air flow directly or indirectly toward the pas-
sengers.
Air quality
General information
The air quality in the interior is improved by the
following components:
▷
Emission tested passenger compartment.
▷ Interior filter.
▷ Air conditioning system to control the
temperature, air flow and recirculated-air
mode.
▷ Pre-ventilation.
Interior filter
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation
mode.
Depending on the equipment:
▷
Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in-
flowing air.
▷ Nano-particle emissions are reduced.
Seite 251
Climate control
CONTROLS
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Gaseous pollutants are filtered.
▷ Microbial particles, viruses and allergens
are filtered.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
having the interior filter changed during vehicle
maintenance.
Pre-ventilation
Principle
The car's interior can be cooled or heated
before driving off with the pre-ventilation. De-
pending on set temperature and ambient tem-
perature, the car's interior is ventilated or pos-
sibly heated using the residual engine heat.
General information
The system can be switched on and off directly
or via a preset departure time.
The activation time is determined based on
the outside temperature. The system promptly
switches on before the selected departure
time.
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time. The system continues to
run for some time after being switched off.
Functional requirements
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.
▷ The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged.
If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle
battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the
maximum activation time to save the vehi-
cle battery. The system will be available
again after the engine is started or after a
short trip.
▷ Time and date are set correctly.
▷ The ventilation air vents are open.
Switching pre-ventilation on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Pre-ventilation"
4. Select the desired setting.
Departure time
General information
Different departure times can be set to ensure
a comfortable interior temperature in the vehi-
cle at the time of departure.
▷ One-time departure time: the time can be
set.
The system is switched on once.
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week can be set.
On the desired weekdays, the system will
be switched on before the set departure
time.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
▷ Set departure times.
▷ Activate departure times.
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-
tween setting and activating the departure
time and the planned departure time to allow a
sufficient period of time for the climate control.
Setting the departure time
1.
"CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Pre-ventilation"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Select the desired departure time.
6. Set the desired departure time.
7. Select day of the week, if needed.
Seite 252
CONTROLS
Climate control
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Activating the departure time
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Pre-ventilation"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Activate the desired departure time.
Display
Icon Description
Icon in the center console
at the top.
Icon illuminates: a depar-
ture time is activated.
Icon flashes: pre-ventila-
tion is switched on.
Activating with My BMW App
Depending on vehicle equipment, the My BMW
App with remote functionality can be used to
turn on pre-cooling at a preset departure time
or immediately.
Pre-conditioning through
Remote Engine Start
Principle
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the car's inte-
rior prior to start of the trip to a comfortable
temperature. The system automatically cools,
vents, and heats depending on the interior, ex-
ternal, and set temperature. Snow and ice may
be removed more easily.
The system starts the engine automatically
and allows it to run for a limited period of time.
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation
is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pol-
lute the area in and around the vehicle or
penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases
contain pollutants which are colorless and
odorless. In enclosed areas or areas with in-
sufficient ventilation, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation. Do not switch on
stationary climate control in enclosed areas
or areas with insufficient ventilation, e.g. in
enclosed garages.
Warning
When stationary climate control is in opera-
tion, high temperatures can occur underneath
the body, for instance caused by the exhaust
system. If combustible materials, such as
leaves or grass, come in contact with hot
parts of the exhaust system, these materi-
als can ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make
sure that no combustible materials can come
in contact with hot vehicle parts during sta-
tionary climate control operation, e.g. leaves,
grass, gas, gasoline, oil or other combustible
objects.
Functional requirements
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.
▷ Hood is closed.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ Air vents are opened.
Seite 253
Climate control
CONTROLS
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Enabling the automatic engine start
function
The automatic engine start must be enabled
before using the system. Otherwise, the en-
gine cannot switch on automatically to clima-
tize the car's interior.
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Remote Engine Start"
5. "Start engine for climate cont."
6. Confirm the disclaimer.
Turning on/turning off the pre-
conditioning
General information
The system switches off automatically after
max. 15 minutes for safety reasons.
The system can be switched on a maximum of
two times in a row.
The system will be available again as soon
as the drive-ready state is activated and deac-
tivated again.
Switching on via iDrive
1.
"CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Start now"
Switching on/off via vehicle key
The system can be switched on and off using
the vehicle key.
Press the button on the vehicle key
three times within 1 second.
After operating the vehicle key, it will
take approximately 3 seconds until the engine
is switched on.
To switch off the system, press the button
again three times.
Switching off with the Start/Stop
button
The system can be switched off directly by
pressing the Start/Stop button without de-
pressing the brake pedal.
Climate control for departure time
General information
Scheduled departure times can be set up in
the system to ensure a comfortable interior
temperature in the vehicle at the time of depar-
ture.
▷ One-time departure time: the time of the
scheduled departure can be set.
The system is switched on once.
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week of the scheduled departure can
be set.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
▷
Set departure times.
▷ Activate departure times.
The system is activated automatically a few
minutes before the set departure time. The
system remains switched on for a short time
after the set departure time.
For safety reasons, the air conditioning can
only be activated once for the departure time.
The system will be available again as soon
as the drive-ready state is activated and deac-
tivated again.
Observe the information about the intended
use of the vehicle.
Additional information:
For Your Own Safety, refer to page 8.
Seite 254
CONTROLS
Climate control
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Setting the departure time
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
Activating the departure time
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Activate the desired departure time.
Display
In the instrument cluster:
The engine runs for the purpose
of operating the pre-condition-
ing. The vehicle is not ready to
drive.
Icon
Description
Icon in the center console
at the top.
Icon illuminates: a depar-
ture time is activated.
Icon flashes: pre-condition-
ing is switched on.
Confirmation signals from the
vehicle
The activation of the system is confirmed by
flashing twice.
The parking lights are switched on as long as
the system is switched on.
Seite 255
Climate control
CONTROLS
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Integrated universal remote
control
Principle
The integrated universal remote control in the
interior mirror can operate remote-controlled
systems such as garage door openers, alarm
systems or locking systems.
General information
The integrated universal remote control re-
places up to three different hand-held trans-
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-
grammed with the desired functions.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the
remote-controlled system near metal objects
to ensure the best possible operation.
Safety information
Warning
The operation of remote-controlled systems
with the integrated universal remote control,
such as the garage door, may result in injury,
for example, body parts becoming jammed in
a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also fol-
low the safety information for the hand-held
transmitter.
Compatibility
If this icon is printed on the packaging
or in the operating instructions of the
remote-controlled system, the system
is generally compatible with the integrated uni-
versal remote control.
Additional questions are answered by:
▷ An authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
For any additional questions, contact an au-
thorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Control elements on the interior
mirror
▷
Buttons, arrow 1.
▷ LED, arrow 2.
▷ Hand-held transmitter of the remote-con-
trolled system, arrow 3.
Seite 256
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Programming the integrated
universal remote control
Functional requirement
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must
be fully charged at the time of programming
to ensure an optimal range of the integrated
universal remote control.
Programming individual buttons
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system.
2. Turn on standby state.
3. Select desired button on the interior mirror:
▷ Program available button:
Press the button.
▷ Program already assigned button:
Press and hold the button for approx.
20 seconds.
The LED on the interior mirror will slowly
begin flashing orange.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the
remote-controlled system approx. 1 to
12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons
on the interior mirror.
The required distance depends on the
hand-held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button on the hand-held
transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the
interior mirror button and repeatedly press
and release the hand-held transmitter but-
ton for 2 seconds.
6. The LED can illuminate in different ways:
▷ The LED illuminates green: program-
ming completed.
Release button.
▷ The LED flashes green rapidly: the
hand-held transmitter was detected but
programming is not complete.
Press and hold the button on the interior
mirror for approx. 2 seconds. Perform
this procedure three times.
If the integrated universal remote con-
trol remains nonoperational, continue
with the special features for rolling code
radio systems.
▷ LED does not illuminate green after
60 seconds: programming not com-
pleted.
Repeat steps 3 to 5.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
For systems with a rolling code radio system,
the integrated universal remote control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
Refer to information on synchronization in the
operating instructions of the remote-controlled
system.
1.
Program the desired button on the interior
mirror.
2. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the remote-controlled system, such as
on the garage door.
You have approx. 30 seconds for the next
step.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a
second person.
3. Press and hold the programmed button on
the interior mirror for approx. 3 seconds.
If necessary, repeat this step up to three
times in order to end synchronization. Once
synchronization is complete, the program-
med function will be carried out.
Operation
After programming, the remote-controlled sys-
tem can be operated with the button on the
interior mirror.
Seite 257
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Press and hold the desired button of the re-
mote-controlled system within range until the
function is triggered.
The LED on the interior mirror is continuously
illuminated green during the transmission of
the radio signal.
Deleting a button assignment
The button assignment cannot be deleted indi-
vidually.
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green
rapidly.
All stored button assignments will be deleted.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding the sun visor out
1.
Fold the sun visor down.
2. Detach it from the holder and swing it to-
ward the side window.
Folding the sun visor in
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun
visor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be-
hind a cover.
Sockets
Principle
The socket can be used for electronic devi-
ces when the standby or drive-ready state is
switched on.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
Safety information
Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of
the airbags, such as portable navigation de-
vices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag
or be thrown around in the car's interior dur-
ing unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that devices and cables are not in the
airbag's area of unfolding.
Warning
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the ve-
hicle may overload or damage the 12 V elec-
trical system. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the jump-
start terminals in the engine compartment.
Warning
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Insert the ciga-
rette lighter or socket cover again after using
the socket.
Seite 258
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Front center console
1. Press on the cover.
2. A socket is located between the cup hold-
ers. Detach the cover.
In the cargo area
A socket is located on the right side in the
cargo area. Unfold the cover.
USB port
General information
Follow the information regarding the connec-
tion of mobile devices to the USB port in the
section on USB connections.
Additional information:
USB connection, see Owner’s Manual for Nav-
igation, Entertainment, Communication;
In the center armrest
A USB port is located in the center armrest.
Properties:
▷
USB port Type C.
▷ For charging mobile devices.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A.
In the front center console
NOTICE
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g.,
large USB connectors, may block or damage
the cover when it is being opened or closed.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the cover
is clear while opening and closing it.
Seite 259
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
If necessary, push on the cover.
A USB port is located in the center console.
Properties:
▷ USB port Type A.
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷ Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
Wireless charging tray
Principle
The wireless charging tray allows wireless
charging of mobile phones and other mobile
devices certified according to the Qi standard.
General information
When inserting the device to be charged, make
sure that there are no objects between the de-
vice to be charged and the wireless charging
tray.
The charging process is shown by the
charge indicator on the control display.
Safety information
Warning
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the
wireless charging tray, any metal objects on
the tray together with the device can become
very hot. If storage media or electronic cards,
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips,
or cards that transmit signals, are placed on
the tray together with the device, they may
not function correctly. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. When charg-
ing mobile devices, make sure there are no
objects on the tray together with the device.
Overview
Tray in the center console:
1 LED
2 Storage area
Functional requirements
▷
The device to be charged must be certified
according to the Qi standard.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ The mobile phone must not exceed the
maximum size of approximately 6.0 x 3.1
x 0.7 in/154.5 x 80 x 18 mm.
▷ Protective sleeves and covers must be suit-
able for wireless charging.
▷ The mobile phone to be charged is located
in the center of the tray. The mobile phone
display is pointing upwards.
Seite 260
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Inserting the mobile phone
1. Open the tray cover.
2. Place the mobile phone centered in the tray
with the display facing up.
3. Close the tray cover.
LED displays
Color Meaning
Blue The mobile phone is charging.
The blue LED stays illuminated once
the inserted mobile phone with Qi
capability is fully charged.
Or-
ange
The mobile phone is not charging.
Temperature of the mobile phone
may be too high or foreign object
may be in charging tray.
Red The mobile phone is not charging.
Contact an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Forgotten warning
General information
A warning can be given if a Qi-certified mobile
phone was forgotten in the wireless charging
tray when leaving the vehicle.
The forgotten warning is displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
Enable/Disable Forgotten Warning
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Wireless charging tray"
5. "Mobile phone reminder"
System limits
The charge current may be reduced or charg-
ing may be temporarily interrupted in the wire-
less charging tray in the following situations:
▷ Due to excessive temperatures on the sur-
face of the tray and mobile phone.
▷ If there are objects between the mobile
phone and the wireless charging tray.
▷ If storage media or electronic cards,
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips,
or cards for signal transmission, are located
between the mobile phone and wireless
charging tray.
▷ Due to protective sleeves and covers that
exceed a thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm
▷ Due to protective sleeves and covers made
of unsuitable material, e.g., with magnetic
parts.
▷ Due to add-on parts for mobile phone, e.g.,
holders.
▷ By settings on the mobile phone, for in-
stance for charging. Follow the relevant in-
structions on the control display and in the
instructions for the mobile phone, if applica-
ble.
Seite 261
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Safety information
Warning
Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable,
such as mobile phones or loose objects, can
be thrown through the vehicle interior while
driving, such as in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury. Secure loose objects or devices that
are connected to the vehicle via a cable.
Warning
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. Attached objects
may come loose. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. Do not use anti-
slip pads.
Glove compartment
Safety information
Warning
Folded open, the glove compartment pro-
trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
glove compartment can be thrown into the
car's interior while driving, for instance in
the event of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately af-
ter using it.
Opening the glove compartment
Pull the handle.
Locking the glove compartment
The glove compartment can be locked with
an integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
After the glove compartment has been locked,
the vehicle key can be given to someone with-
out the integrated key, for example, when the
car is being parked by a parking attendant.
Additional information:
Integrated key, refer to page 69.
Seite 262
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Fold-out compartment
Safety information
Warning
The open fold-out compartment protrudes
into the vehicle interior. Objects in the fold-
out compartment can be thrown into the ve-
hicle interior during the trip, for instance, in
the event of an accident or braking or evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the fold-out compartment immediately
after using it.
Opening the fold-out compartment
Press the button and open the cover.
Storage compartments in
the doors
General information
There are storage compartments in the doors.
Safety information
Warning
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an acci-
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. Bro-
ken glass can be scattered in the car's inte-
rior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Do not use any breakable objects
while driving. Only stow breakable objects in
closed storage compartments.
Storage tray in center
console
Opening the storage compartment
Press on the cover.
Closing the storage compartment
Pull the cover on the handle back.
Front center armrest
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Seite 263
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Opening the center armrest
Press the button.
Closing the center armrest
Press the lid down until it engages.
Front cup holder
Safety information
Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-
ing traffic conditions and lead to an accident.
Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or
lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Do not force
objects into the cup holder. Use lightweight,
shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not
transport hot beverages.
Opening the cup holder
Press on the cover.
Two cup holders are located in the center con-
sole.
Closing the cup holder
Pull the cover on the handle back.
Rear cup holder
Safety information
Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-
ing traffic conditions and lead to an accident.
Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or
lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Do not force
objects into the cup holder. Use lightweight,
Seite 264
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not
transport hot beverages.
NOTICE
With an open cup holder, the center armrest
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of
damage to property. Press back the covers
before the center armrest is folded up.
Opening the cup holder
1.
Fold down the center armrest.
2. Press the button to open the cup holder.
Closing the cup holder
Press both covers back inward in sequence
and fold the center armrest back.
Coat hooks
General information
The coat hooks are located on the door pillar in
the rear.
Safety information
Warning
Clothing articles on the coat hooks can ob-
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
accident. When suspending clothing articles
from the coat hooks, ensure that they will not
obstruct the driver's view.
Warning
Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a
risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Only hang
lightweight objects, for instance clothing arti-
cles, from the coat hooks.
Seite 265
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Cargo area
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Loading
Safety information
Warning
High gross vehicle weight can overheat the
tires, damage them internally and cause
a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving char-
acteristics may be negatively impacted, re-
ducing directional stability, lengthening the
braking distances and changing the steering
response. There is a risk of accident. Pay
attention to the permitted load-carrying ca-
pacity of the tires and never exceed the per-
mitted gross vehicle weight.
Warning
Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable,
such as mobile phones or loose objects, can
be thrown through the vehicle interior while
driving, such as in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury. Secure loose objects or devices that
are connected to the vehicle via a cable.
Warning
Improperly stowed objects can slip and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in
the event of an accident, braking or an eva-
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.
NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1.
Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
the vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca-
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in the vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x
150) = 650 lbs)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
Seite 266
CONTROLS
Cargo area
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If the vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to the
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of the vehicle.
Payload
The maximum payload is the sum of the
weight of the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
▷
Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of
the backrests.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow large cargo.
▷ Fasten the aids for securing the load to the
lashing eyes in the cargo area.
▷ Small and light cargo: secure with tension-
ing straps or tension bands or with a lug-
gage compartment net.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi-
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the
rear seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as
possible, directly behind and at the bottom
of the rear seat backrests. When the rear
seat is not occupied, secure each of the
outer seat belts in the opposite buckle.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
General information
Attach auxiliary materials to secure the cargo
such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw
straps, or cargo nets to the lashing eyes.
Overview
The lashing eyes are located in the luggage
compartment.
Multifunction hook
General information
A multifunction hook is located on the left and
right side in the cargo area.
Seite 267
Cargo area
CONTROLS
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
Warning
Improper use of the multifunction hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about, e.g., dur-
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. Only hang lightweight objects from
the multifunction hooks. Only transport heavy
luggage in the cargo area if it has been ap-
propriately secured.
Net
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
left side.
Storage compartment on
the right side
A storage compartment is available on the
right side of the cargo area.
Storage compartment on
the left side
A storage compartment is located on the left
side in the cargo area.
Through-loading system
Principle
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrests.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
40–20–40. The right rear seat backrest and
the center section can be folded down sepa-
rately. The left rear seat backrest can be folded
down together with the center section.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down
from the cargo area. The center section can be
separately folded down from the rear.
Safety information
Warning
There is a danger of jamming with folding
down the rear seat backrests. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the rear
seat backrest and the of the head restraint is
clear prior to folding down.
Warning
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s
interior; for instance, in the event of an acci-
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. There
is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat
backrest is locked after folding it back.
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is
limited or compromised with incorrect seat
setting or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the
height of the head restraints or remove them.
Seite 268
CONTROLS
Cargo area
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Warning
When folding down the rear seat backrest,
vehicle components or body parts may be-
come trapped. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
area of movement of the rear seat backrest
including head restraint is clear when folding
down.
Folding down the rear seat backrest
From the cargo area
Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area
to release the rear seat backrest.
▷
Left lever: fold down the left and middle
rear seat backrest.
▷ Right lever: fold down the right rear seat
backrest.
Folding back the rear seat backrest
Return the rear seat backrest to the seat posi-
tion and engage it.
Folding down middle section
Pull lever and fold the center section forward.
Seite 269
Cargo area
CONTROLS
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Break-in procedures
General information
Moving parts need to work together smoothly.
The following instructions will help you to ach-
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con-
trol.
Safety information
Warning
Due to new parts and components, safety
and driver assistance systems can react with
a delay. There is a risk of accident. After in-
stalling new parts or with a new vehicle, drive
conservatively and intervene early if neces-
sary. Observe the break-in procedures of the
respective parts and components.
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ With gasoline engine:4500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full throttle or kickdown under all circum-
stances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur-
ing circumstances when tires are brand new.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brake disks and brake pads must be run in to
avoid possible brake noise. Drive cautiously for
the first approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Following part replacement
Observe the break-in procedures again if com-
ponents mentioned above are replaced.
Seite 270
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
General driving notes
Closing the trunk lid
Safety information
Warning
An open trunk lid protrudes from the vehicle
and can endanger occupants and other road
users or damage the vehicle in the event of
an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers.
In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the ve-
hicle interior. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Do not drive with the
trunk lid open.
Driving with the trunk lid open
If the vehicle still needs to be driven with the
trunk lid open:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the blower output.
▷ Drive moderately.
▷ Fasten the trunk lid, e.g., with a tensioning
belt.
Ice on window glass
NOTICE
The window will be lowered slightly when
pulling on the door handle. In the event of
frost, the window may be frozen solid and
may not be able to be lowered. There is a risk
of damage to property. When pulling on the
door handle, make sure that the window is
lowered. If necessary, remove snow and ice
from the window. Do not open the door with
force.
Hot exhaust system
Warning
High temperatures can occur underneath the
body, for instance caused by the exhaust
system, while driving. Contact with the ex-
haust system can cause burns. There is a
risk of injury. Do not touch the hot exhaust
system, including the exhaust pipe.
Warning
If combustible materials, such as leaves or
grass, come in contact with hot parts of the
exhaust system, these materials can ignite.
There is a risk of fire and an injury hazard.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that no combustible materials can come in
contact with hot vehicle parts while driving, in
Neutral or during parking.
Exhaust gas particulate filter
Principle
The exhaust gas particulate filter collects soot
particles. The soot particles are burned at high
temperatures to clean the exhaust gas particu-
late filter as necessary.
General information
During several minutes of cleaning the follow-
ing may occur:
▷
Temporarily, the engine may run less
smoothly.
▷ A somewhat higher RPM is necessary to
reach usual power development.
Seite 271
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ A slight smoke formation coming from the
exhaust system, even after the engine is
switched off.
▷ Noises, such as those caused by the radia-
tor fan running, even several minutes after
the engine is switched off.
Overrun of the radiator fan for several minutes
is normal even after short trips.
Climate comfort windshield
The marked area is not covered with heat re-
flective coating.
Use the marked area, such as for garage door
opener, devices for electronic fee collection or
payment systems.
Vehicle laminated glass
The vehicle laminated glass provides complete
protection against the harmful effects of ultra-
violet radiation on the skin.
Mobile radio in the vehicle
Warning
Vehicle electronics and mobile communica-
tion devices can influence one another. There
is radiation due to the transmission oper-
ations of mobile communication devices.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. If possible, in the car's interior only
use mobile communication devices, such as
mobile phones, with a direct connection to
an external antenna or the Personal eSIM in
order to prevent mutual interference and to
deflect radiation from the vehicle interior.
Aquaplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as aquaplan-
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
General information
When driving through water, follow the follow-
ing:
▷ Only drive through when the combustion
engine is running.
▷ Prevent the combustion engine from shut-
ting down, e.g., by deactivating Auto Start/
Stop.
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only up to a maximum
height of 9.8 inches/25 cm.
▷ Drive through water at a maximum of walk-
ing speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information
NOTICE
When driving too quickly through deep water,
the water can penetrate the engine compart-
ment, the electrical system, or the transmis-
sion. There is a risk of damage to property.
When driving through water, do not exceed
the maximum indicated water level and the
maximum speed for driving through water.
Seite 272
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Braking safely
General information
The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Brak-
ing System as a standard feature.
Perform emergency braking in situations that
require such. To achieve the best possible
brake boosting, do not reduce the pressure on
the brake pedal during full braking.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering
movement.
The pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds
from the hydraulic circuits indicate that the An-
tilock Braking System is in its active mode.
In certain braking situations, the perforated
brake disks can emit function-related noises.
However, function-related noises have no ef-
fect on the performance and operational relia-
bility of the brake.
Objects in the travel path of the pedals
Warning
Objects in the driver's footwell can limit the
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
vehicle such that they are secured and can-
not enter into the driver's footwell. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not
use loose floor mats and do not layer several
floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient
clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor
mats are securely fastened again after they
were removed, for instance for cleaning.
Driving in wet conditions
In case of wet roads, exposure to road salt or
in heavy rain, gently depress the brake pedal
every few kilometers.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other road users.
The heat generated during braking dries brake
disks and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
In this way the brake force will be available
when you need it.
Hills
General information
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking effort. Other-
wise, the brake system may overheat and re-
duce braking effect.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
downshifting, going all the way to first gear, if
needed.
Safety information
Warning
Light but consistent pressure on the brake
pedal can lead to high temperatures, brake
wear and possibly even brake system failure.
There is a risk of accident. Avoid placing ex-
cessive stress on the brake system.
Warning
In idle state or with the drive-ready state
switched off, safety functions, for instance
engine braking effect, braking assistance and
steering assistance, may not be available.
There is a risk of accident. Do not attempt
to drive in idle state or with drive-ready state
switched off.
Brake disk corrosion
Corrosion on the brake disks and contamina-
tion on the brake pads are increased by the
following circumstances:
Seite 273
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended stationary periods.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake disks will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes when braking
slowly - generally this cannot be corrected.
Condensation water under the
parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con-
densation water develops and collects under-
neath the vehicle.
Roof bars
General information
Roof racks are available as optional accesso-
ries.
Safety information
Warning
When driving with a roof load, e.g., roof bars,
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher. This
increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in crit-
ical driving situations. There may be a risk of
accidents or risk of damage to property. Drive
with roof load only with activated Dynamic
Stability Control.
Roof strip with flaps
The mounting points are located in the roof
strip above the doors.
Fold the cover outward.
Installation
Follow the assembly instructions of the roof
rack.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Loading
Because luggage racks raise the vehicle's cen-
ter of gravity when loaded, they have a ma-
jor effect on vehicle handling and steering re-
sponse.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷
Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
weights and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance
using luggage straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the swiveling
range of the trunk lid.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid driving off and
braking with jerky movements or fast cor-
nering.
Seite 274
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Driving on racetracks
Warning
The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport
or motorsport-like competition. There is a risk
of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M
Sport or motorsport-like competitions.
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
Use of the vehicle in M Sport or motor sport
type competition is an improper use of the ve-
hicle and may affect your warranty coverage.
Please consult the “New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty” Booklet for further information on war-
ranty matters.
Before and after driving on a racetrack, have
vehicle checked by an authorized service cen-
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Seite 275
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
275
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Reducing fuel consumption
Principle
The vehicle contains advanced technologies
for the reduction of consumption and emission
values.
There are some actions you can take to
change your fuel consumption and environ-
mental impact:
▷ Remove unnecessary cargo from the vehi-
cle.
▷ Remove attachments after use, e.g., a rear
carrier.
▷ Close the windows and glass sunroof while
driving.
▷ Check the tire pressure regularly and in-
crease it as necessary.
▷ Switch off the engine if the vehicle is to re-
main stationary for a longer period.
▷ Drive proactively and let the vehicle coast
more often.
▷ Deactivate functions that are not required,
e.g., rear window heating.
▷ Have the vehicle serviced regularly.
ECO PRO
Principle
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
on consumption. For this purpose, the engine
control and comfort features, for instance the
climate control output, are adjusted.
When certain prerequisites are met the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis-
sion in the D selector lever position. The ve-
hicle continues traveling in Neutral to reduce
consumption. The D selector lever position re-
mains engaged.
In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO
PRO tips, are displayed to assist with an effi-
cient driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
General information
The system includes the follow-
ing EfficientDynamics functions and
EfficientDynamics displays:
▷
ECO PRO seat climate control.
▷ ECO PRO climate control.
▷ ECO PRO view.
▷ Driving style analysis.
Seite 276
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Overview
Button in the vehicle
ECO PRO
Configuring ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
Via iDrive
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
6. Select the desired setting.
Activating/deactivating ECO PRO
functions
The following ECO PRO functions can be acti-
vated/deactivated:
▷
ECO PRO seat heating.
▷ ECO PRO climate control.
▷ ECO PRO light.
ECO PRO seat climate control
The activation of ECO PRO will reduce the out-
put of the seat heating.
ECO PRO climate control
Climate control is set to be efficient.
This means that it is possible to deviate
slightly from the set temperature or to heat
or cool down the car's interior more slowly to
economize on consumption.
ECO PRO light
The output of exterior mirror heating and rear
window defroster is reduced.
Depending on the equipment version, the dy-
namic ECO lighting function is activated in ad-
dition.
Resetting the settings
1.
Press the button.
2. "Settings"
3. "Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
Using ECO PRO efficiently
Optimizing driving style
Power gauge
When ECO PRO driving mode is activated, the
display switches to a special configuration.
When driving efficiently, the power gauge is
colored blue.
The display will change to gray if the driving
style is inefficient.
Activate adaptive recuperative braking for effi-
cient driving.
Seite 277
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
277
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Display in case of inefficient driving
style
When driving above the efficient range,
an arrow will be displayed.
For instance, this is displayed for the
following situations:
▷ Excessive acceleration.
▷ Excessive speed.
In addition, a notice to coast in advance is dis-
played.
Driving style analysis
Principle
The function helps develop an especially effi-
cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the control display.
This display will help you adjust your driving
style and save some fuel.
General information
The range of the vehicle can be extended by
adjusting your driving style.
The current trip is analyzed.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus
range in the instrument cluster and on the con-
trol display.
Functional requirement
This function is available in ECO PRO driving
mode.
Calling up the efficiency evaluation
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Live Vehicle"
Additional information:
Live Vehicle, refer to page
136
Display on the control display
The display of the efficiency analysis shows
the efficiency of the driving style.
The more efficient the driving style, the larger
the area that is displayed in color and the
faster the bonus range increases.
In contrast, a reduced area will be displayed
with an inefficient driving style.
Adaptive recuperation
Principle
The adaptive recuperation supports an adap-
tive and comfort-oriented driving style.
Various sensors analyze the current driving sit-
uation, e.g., the distance to the vehicle in front.
General information
Adaptive recuperation is available depending
on the equipment and national-market version.
The system decides based on the situation if
energy is recovered through recuperation or if
the vehicle is to coast.
In vehicles with mild hybrid technology, the
power of recuperation is adaptive, which
causes the vehicle to decelerate to varying de-
grees when coasting.
Functional requirements
The system active under the following condi-
tions:
▷
Brake pedal not depressed.
▷ Accelerator pedal not operated.
▷ ECO PRO drive mode is activated.
▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control is activated.
Seite 278
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
278
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Activating/deactivating adaptive
recuperation
Adaptive recuperation is deactivated by acti-
vating SPORT driving mode.
Adaptive recuperation is activated when
changing to another driving mode.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
Adaptive recuperation can be displayed on the
instrument cluster.
Additional information:
Power gauge, refer to page 147.
Display on the control display
The adaptive recuperation can be displayed on
the control display.
Additional information:
Current driving condition, refer to page 154.
Engine off/coasting
Principle
The drive system allows the vehicle to roll
freely with minimal deceleration in selector
lever position D. This driving condition is refer-
red to as coasting. This reduces fuel consump-
tion.
Vehicles with mild hybrid technology do not
consume fuel when coasting.
General information
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
the function often and supports the efficient
effect of coasting.
Coasting is automatically adapted to the re-
spective driving situation.
The coasting mode is displayed in the Live Ve-
hicle menu as efficient coasting.
Additional information:
Current driving condition, refer to page 154.
Exemplary driving situations
If a route can be traveled without an antici-
pated need for braking, it is advantageous to
roll.
The following exemplary driving situations may
be suitable:
▷ Rolling on a straight downhill route without
obstacles.
▷ Coasting on a distance without obstacles.
Avoid late or strong braking.
Functional requirements
▷ Selector lever position D is engaged.
▷ Brake is not depressed.
▷ Accelerator pedal is not operated.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
The function is available in the speed
range from approx. 16 mph/25 km/h to
100 mph/160 km/h.
Operation via shift paddles
Principle
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
Coasting mode can be influenced with the shift
paddles.
Activating/deactivating coasting via
shift paddles
Long press the right shift paddle to activate.
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
System limits
▷
While Active Cruise Control is active.
▷ With defective, dirty or covered sensors.
Seite 279
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
279
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Refueling
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Follow the following when
refueling
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation prior to refuel-
ing.
When refueling, hook the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the filler
nozzle during refueling causes:
▷ Premature switching off.
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly
after refueling, otherwise the emissions warn-
ing light may illuminate.
Follow safety regulations posted at the filling
station.
Additional information:
Fuel quality, refer to page 318.
Safety information
NOTICE
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the
engine may no longer have sufficient fuel.
Engine functions are not ensured anymore.
There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel
promptly.
NOTICE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of
the fuel tank can damage the fuel system.
Painted surfaces may be damaged by con-
tact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the
environment. There is a risk of damage to
property. Avoid overfilling.
Fuel cap
General information
If the fuel filler cap is not fitted correctly, the
emissions indicator light illuminates on the in-
strument cluster.
Additional information:
Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 138.
Safety information
Warning
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel va-
pors can escape. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. Pay attention that
Seite 282
MOBILITY
Refueling
282
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
the retaining strap is not jammed or crushed
when closing the cap.
Opening
1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1.
Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until
you clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.
Emergency unlocking
It may be necessary in certain situations to un-
lock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance
with an electrical malfunction.
Have the fuel filler flap unlocked by an author-
ized service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Seite 283
Refueling
MOBILITY
283
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Tire pressure
General information
The tire condition and tire pressure influence
the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Driving safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
▷ Fuel consumption.
Safety information
Warning
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pres-
sure may heat up significantly and sustain
damage. This will have a negative impact
on aspects of handling, such as steering and
braking response. There is a risk of accident.
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure,
and correct it as needed, for instance twice
a month and before a long trip.
Tire pressure specifications
In the tire pressure table
The tire pressure table, refer to page 284, con-
tains all tire inflation pressure specifications for
given tire sizes at ambient temperature. The
tire inflation pressure specifications apply to
the tire sizes approved by the vehicle manu-
facturer for the corresponding vehicle types.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of the vehicle.
▷ Maximum speed for driving.
On the control display
The current tire inflation pressure values and
the intended tire inflation pressure values for
the mounted tires can be displayed on the con-
trol display.
To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the
tire sizes must be stored in the system and
must have been set for the mounted tires.
The current tire inflation pressure value is lo-
cated on each tire.
The reference tire inflation pressure value is
located in the lower area of the control display.
Checking the tire pressure
General information
The tires heat up while driving. The tire pres-
sure increases with the tire temperature.
Tires have a natural, consistent tire pressure
loss.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Checking via tire inflation pressure
specifications in tire pressure table
1.
Determine the intended tire inflation pres-
sure levels for the mounted tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
Seite 284
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
284
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the ac-
tual tire inflation pressure deviates from the
intended tire inflation pressure.
4. Make sure that all valve caps are screwed
onto the tire valves.
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold
tires or tires at the same temperature as the
ambient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels
when the tires are cold, i.e.:
▷ A distance traveled of max. 1.25 miles/2 km
has not been exceeded.
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at
least two hours after a trip.
If equipped with an emergency wheel: check
the tire pressure of the emergency wheel in the
cargo area regularly and correct if necessary.
Checking using the tire inflation
pressure specifications on the control
display
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
5. Check whether the current tire inflation
pressure levels deviate from the intended
tire pressure value.
6. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the ac-
tual tire inflation pressure deviates from the
intended tire inflation pressure.
The display of current tire pressure on the con-
trol display may be restricted when the vehicle
is stationary. After a short drive, the tire pres-
sure is updated.
After correcting the tire pressure
If equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor, the
corrected tire pressures are applied automati-
cally. Make sure that the tire settings are cor-
rect. With tires that cannot be found in the tire
pressure values on the control display, reset
the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM).
If equipped with a flat tire monitor, reinitialize
the flat tire monitor.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, follow the tire infla-
tion pressure specifications in the tire pressure
table and adjust as necessary.
The tire inflation pressure specifications can
also be found on the tire pressure label on the
driver's door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
430i, 430i xDrive
Tire size
Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/45 R 18 95 H
XL A/S
225/45 R 18 95 H
XL M+S
2.3 / 33 2.5 / 36
Seite 285
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
285
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
225/40 R 19 93 H
XL A/S
2.4 / 35 2.7 / 39
Front: 225/45 R
18 95 Y XL
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 255/40 R
18 99 Y XL
- 2.3 / 33
Front: 225/40 R
19 93 Y XL
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 255/35 R
19 96 Y XL
- 2.4 / 35
Front: 225/35 R
20 90 Y XL
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 255/30 R
20 92 Y XL
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/45 R
18 95 V XL M+S
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 255/40 R
18 99 V XL M+S
- 2.3 / 33
Front: 225/40 R
19 93 H XL M+S
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 255/35 R
19 96 H XL M+S
- 2.4 / 35
M440i xDrive
Tire size
Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/45 R 18 95 H
XL A/S
225/45 R 18 95 H
XL M+S
2.5 / 36 2.6 / 38
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
225/40 R 19 93 H
XL A/S
2.7 / 39 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/45 R
18 95 Y XL
2.5 / 36 -
Rear: 255/40 R
18 99 Y XL
- 2.3 / 33
Front: 225/40 R
19 93 Y XL
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 255/35 R
19 96 Y XL
- 2.5 / 36
Front: 225/35 R
20 90 Y XL
2.9 / 42 -
Rear: 255/30 R
20 92 Y XL
- 3.0 / 44
Front: 225/45 R
18 95 V XL M+S
2.5 / 36 -
Rear: 255/40 R
18 99 V XL M+S
- 2.3 / 33
Front: 225/40 R
19 93 H XL M+S
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 255/35 R
19 96 H XL M+S
- 2.7 / 39
M440i
Tire size
Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/45 R 18 95 H
XL A/S
225/45 R 18 95 H
XL M+S
2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
Seite 286
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
286
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
225/40 R 19 93 H
XL A/S
2.6 / 38 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/45 R
18 95 Y XL
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 255/40 R
18 99 Y XL
- 2.3 / 33
Front: 225/40 R
19 93 Y XL
2.5 / 36 -
Rear: 255/35 R
19 96 Y XL
- 2.5 / 36
Front: 225/35 R
20 90 Y XL
2.8 / 41 -
Rear: 255/30 R
20 92 Y XL
- 3.0 / 44
Front: 225/45 R
18 95 V XL M+S
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 255/40 R
18 99 V XL M+S
- 2.3 / 33
Front: 225/40 R
19 93 H XL M+S
2.5 / 36 -
Rear: 255/35 R
19 96 H XL M+S
- 2.5 / 36
Tire inflation pressures at maximum
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Warning
In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex-
cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from
the relevant table on the following pages.
Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could
occur.
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table and
adjust as necessary.
Tire pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
430i, 430i xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/45 R 18 95 H
XL A/S
225/45 R 18 95 H
XL M+S
2.5 / 36 2.7 / 39
225/40 R 19 93 H
XL A/S
2.7 / 39 3.0 / 44
Front: 225/45 R
18 95 Y XL
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 255/40 R
18 99 Y XL
- 2.3 / 33
Front: 225/40 R
19 93 Y XL
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 255/35 R
19 96 Y XL
- 2.4 / 35
Front: 225/35 R
20 90 Y XL
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 255/30 R
20 92 Y XL
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/45 R
18 95 V XL M+S
2.5 / 36 -
Rear: 255/40 R
18 99 V XL M+S
- 2.5 / 36
Seite 287
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
287
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front: 225/40 R
19 93 H XL M+S
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 255/35 R
19 96 H XL M+S
- 2.7 / 39
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/45 R 18 95
H XL M+S
2.5 / 36 2.7 / 39
Front: 225/45 R
18 95 Y XL
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 255/40 R
18 99 Y XL
- 2.6 / 38
Front: 225/40 R
19 93 Y XL
2.8 / 41 -
Rear: 255/35 R
19 96 Y XL
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/35 R
20 90 Y XL
3.1 / 45 -
Rear: 255/30 R
20 92 Y XL
- 3.2 / 46
Front: 225/45 R
18 95 V XL M+S
2.8 / 41 -
Rear: 255/40 R
18 99 V XL M+S
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/40 R
19 93 H XL M+S
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 255/35 R
19 96 H XL M+S
- 2.7 / 39
M440i xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/45 R 18 95 H
XL A/S
225/45 R 18 95 H
XL M+S
2.7 / 39 2.9 / 42
225/40 R 19 93 H
XL A/S
2.9 / 42 3.1 / 45
Front: 225/45 R
18 95 Y XL
2.5 / 36 -
Rear: 255/40 R
18 99 Y XL
- 2.3 / 33
Front: 225/40 R
19 93 Y XL
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 255/35 R
19 96 Y XL
- 2.5 / 36
Front: 225/35 R
20 90 Y XL
2.9 / 42 -
Rear: 255/30 R
20 92 Y XL
- 3.0 / 44
Front: 225/45 R
18 95 V XL M+S
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 255/40 R
18 99 V XL M+S
- 2.5 / 36
Front: 225/40 R
19 93 H XL M+S
2.9 / 42 -
Rear: 255/35 R
19 96 H XL M+S
- 2.9 / 42
With high-speed tuning feature
Seite 288
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
288
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/45 R 18 95
H XL M+S
2.7 / 39 2.9 / 42
Front: 225/45 R
18 95 Y XL
2.8 / 41 -
Rear: 255/40 R
18 99 Y XL
- 2.6 / 38
Front: 225/40 R
19 93 Y XL
3.1 / 45 -
Rear: 255/35 R
19 96 Y XL
- 2.9 / 42
Front: 225/35 R
20 90 Y XL
3.4 / 49 -
Rear: 255/30 R
20 92 Y XL
- 3.4 / 49
Front: 225/45 R
18 95 V XL M+S
3.1 / 45 -
Rear: 255/40 R
18 99 V XL M+S
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/40 R
19 93 H XL M+S
2.9 / 42 -
Rear: 255/35 R
19 96 H XL M+S
- 2.9 / 42
M440i
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size
Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/45 R 18 95 H
XL A/S
225/45 R 18 95 H
XL M+S
2.6 / 38 2.9 / 42
225/40 R 19 93 H
XL A/S
2.8 / 41 3.1 / 45
Front: 225/45 R
18 95 Y XL
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 255/40 R
18 99 Y XL
- 2.3 / 33
Front: 225/40 R
19 93 Y XL
2.5 / 36 -
Rear: 255/35 R
19 96 Y XL
- 2.5 / 36
Front: 225/35 R
20 90 Y XL
2.8 / 41 -
Rear: 255/30 R
20 92 Y XL
- 3.0 / 44
Front: 225/45 R
18 95 V XL M+S
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 255/40 R
18 99 V XL M+S
- 2.6 / 38
Front: 225/40 R
19 93 H XL M+S
2.8 / 41 -
Rear: 255/35 R
19 96 H XL M+S
- 2.8 / 41
With high-speed tuning feature
Seite 289
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
289
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/45 R 18 95
H XL M+S
2.6 / 38 2.9 / 42
Front: 225/45 R
18 95 Y XL
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 255/40 R
18 99 Y XL
- 2.6 / 38
Front: 225/40 R
19 93 Y XL
2.8 / 41 -
Rear: 255/35 R
19 96 Y XL
- 2.9 / 42
Front: 225/35 R
20 90 Y XL
3.1 / 45 -
Rear: 255/30 R
20 92 Y XL
- 3.4 / 49
Front: 225/45 R
18 95 V XL M+S
2.9 / 42 -
Rear: 255/40 R
18 99 V XL M+S
- 2.9 / 42
Front: 225/40 R
19 93 H XL M+S
2.8 / 41 -
Rear: 255/35 R
19 96 H XL M+S
- 2.8 / 41
Tire marking
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: cross-sectional relationship in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load bearing capacity
Y: speed code letter
ZR tires: reinforced radial tire for speeds ex-
ceeding 150 mph/240 km/h
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissi-
ble weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire
sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating –
GAWR – on the certification label on the driver
door B-pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must
be greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross
Axle Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs.
rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
Speed letter
Designation Maximum speed
Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h
R up to 106 mph/170 km/h
S up to 112 mph/180 km/h
T up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h
(Y) above 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0123
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
0123: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Seite 290
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
290
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Tire age
Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread depth, replace tires
at least every 6 years.
Production date
You can find the tire production date on the tire
sidewall.
Designation Production date
DOT … 0123 1st week of 2023
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera-
ture A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
A represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Warning
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
Runflat tires
Runflat tires, refer to page 295, are labeled
with a circular icon containing the letters RSC
marked on the tire sidewall.
Seite 291
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
291
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
M+S
Winter tires, as well as all-season tires with
better winter performance than summer tires,
can be identified by the M+S marking on the
tire side wall.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
risk of aquaplaning.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
winter driving conditions.
All-season tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
winter driving conditions.
Minimum tread depth
Distributed over the tire circumference are
the tire manufacturer’s wear indicators with a
height of at least 0.06 in/1.6 mm, which serve
as an indicator of tire tread wear.
The positions of the wear indicators are
marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread
Wear Indicator.
Irrespective of the wear indicators, observe the
statutory regulations on the minimum tread
depth.
Tire damage
General information
Check your tires regularly for damage, foreign
bodies lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush-
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if the vehicle is equipped with
low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or another vehicle
malfunction:
▷ Unusual vibrations.
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten-
dency to pull to the left or right.
▷ Uneven wear pattern, e.g., increased wear
in the area of the tire shoulder.
Damage can be caused by the following situa-
tions, for instance:
▷
Driving over curbs.
▷ Road damage.
▷ Tire pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
▷ Incorrect tire storage.
Seite 292
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
292
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
Warning
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres-
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con-
trol. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam-
age is suspected while driving, immediately
reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and
tires checked. To do so, drive carefully to an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. Have vehicle
towed or transported as needed. Do not re-
pair damaged tires, but have them replaced.
Warning
Tires can become damaged by driving over
obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at
high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire
cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-sec-
tion, the higher the risk of tire damage. There
may be a risk of accidents and risk of dam-
age to property. If possible, avoid driving over
objects or road conditions that may damage
tires, or drive over them slowly and carefully.
Exchanging wheels and
tires
Mounting and wheel balancing
Have the wheel mounted and balanced by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Approved wheels and tires
General information
Only certain wheel/tire combinations are suit-
able depending on vehicle and equipment.
The vehicle manufacturer determines wheel/
tire combinations on the basis of the following
criteria:
▷ Tire size, e.g., tire width, aspect ratio.
▷ Wheel size, e.g., rim diameter, offset.
Ask an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop about
wheels and tires that are suitable for the vehi-
cle as well as special equipment.
Safety information
Warning
Wheels and tires that are not suitable for
the vehicle can damage parts of the vehi-
cle. There is a risk of accident. The vehicle
manufacturer recommends that you use only
wheels and tires that have been approved as
suitable for the vehicle type.
Warning
Mounted steel wheels can cause technical
problems, for instance unexpected loosening
of the lug bolts and damage to the brake
disks. There is a risk of accident. Do not
mount steel wheels.
Warning
Unsuitable wheel/tire combinations will im-
pair vehicle handling and a number of sys-
tem functions, such as the Antilock Braking
System or Dynamic Stability Control. There is
a risk of accident. The vehicle manufacturer
recommends that you use only wheels and
tires that have been approved as suitable
for the vehicle type. Following tire damage,
have the original wheel/tire combination re-
mounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.
Seite 293
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
293
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Recommended tire brands
Tire types are developed for each vehicle and
optimized specifically for the individual require-
ments of that vehicle, e.g.:
▷ Handling.
▷ Comfort.
▷ Noise characteristics.
Specially developed tires are marked with
a star on the tire sidewall. After replacing
wheels and tires, the vehicle manufacturer rec-
ommends using star-marked tires again. The
vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
use tires of the same make and tread design.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur-
ing circumstances when tires are brand new.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
Warning
Retreated tires can have different tire casing
structures. With advanced age the service life
can be limited. There is a risk of accident.
The manufacturer of the vehicle does not rec-
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Winter tires
General information
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Winter tires can be identified by the mountain
and snowflake icon, as well as the M+S mark-
ing on the tire sidewall.
So-called all-season tires with M+S marking
but without mountain and snowflake icon have
better winter properties than summer tires.
As a rule, all-season tires do not perform the
same as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for winter tires,
attach an info sign showing the permissible
maximum speed in the driver's field of vision.
The info label is available from an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
When driving on winter tires, observe the
speed limit for winter tires. Do not exceed this
limit.
Changing runflat tires
When changing from runflat tires to standard
tires, it must be ensured that the vehicle con-
tains an emergency wheel or tire mobility kit.
For more information, contact an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Seite 294
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
294
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Wheel change between axles
Warning
A wheel change between the axles on vehi-
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on
the front and rear axles can cause damage
to the tires and the vehicle. There is a risk of
accident. Do not rotate the tires between the
axles on vehicles with different tire sizes or
rim sizes on the front and rear axles.
Different abrasion patterns can occur on the
front and rear axles depending on individual
driving conditions. The tires can be rotated in
pairs between the axles to achieve even abra-
sion. For more information, contact an author-
ized service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop. After changing, check
the tire pressure and correct, if needed.
Storing tires
Tire pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres-
sure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Storage
▷
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and
dark place.
▷ Always protect tires against all contact with
oil, grease, and solvents.
▷ Do not leave the tires in plastic bags.
▷ Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Runflat tires
Principle
Runflat tires permit continued driving under
limited conditions even in the event of a com-
plete tire pressure loss.
General information
The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup-
porting to a limited degree and may also in-
clude special rims.
The reinforcement of the sidewall allows the
tire to remain drivable to a limited degree in
the event of a tire pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driving
with a flat tire.
Safety information
Warning
The vehicle handles differently when a runflat
tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for
instance, reduced directional stability when
braking, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is
a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do
not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Identification
Runflat tires are labeled with a circular icon
containing the letters RSC marked on the tire
sidewall.
Seite 295
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
295
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Repairing a flat tire
Safety precautions
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
ground at a safe distance from road traffic.
▷ Turn on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out and
make sure that they remain outside the
hazardous area such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up the hazard triangle or
hazard warning lights at an appropriate
distance.
Tire repair set
Principle
With the tire repair set, minor tire damage
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
driving.
General information
▷
The filled in tire sealant closes the damage
from the inside when it hardens.
▷ Follow the instructions on using the tire re-
pair set found on the compressor and seal-
ant bottle.
▷ The use of a tire repair set can be ineffec-
tive if the tire puncture measures above ap-
prox. 0.16 in/4 mm.
▷ Do not remove foreign objects that have
penetrated the tire. Remove foreign objects
only when they are visibly protruding from
the tire.
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
tire inflation pressure.
Overview
Storage
Depending on the equipment, storage for the
tire repair set is provided as follows:
▷ In the cargo area under the cargo floor
panel.
▷ In the cargo area on the left or right side.
▷ In the cargo area behind a side trim panel.
Sealant bottle and filler hose
1 Sealant bottle
2 Sealant bottle outlet
3 Filler hose
4 Sealant bottle connection
5 Wheel valve connection
Compressor
1
Compressor
2 Tire pressure display
3 Pressure reducing valve button
4 Sealant bottle mount
Seite 296
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
296
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
5 Connector for socket
6 Power switch
Safety precautions
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Turn on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out and
make sure that they remain outside the
hazardous area such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up the hazard triangle or
hazard warning lights at an appropriate
distance.
▷ Remove the warning label for maximum
permissible speed from the compressor
and attach it in a visible location in the vehi-
cle interior.
▷ Remove the warning label from the sealant
bottle and stick it to the rim.
Preparing the tire repair set
1. Insert the sealant bottle into the mount on
the housing of the compressor.
2. Turn the sealant bottle clockwise by 90° to
the stop.
3. Connect the filler hose to the outlet of the
sealant bottle and turn clockwise by 90° to
the stop.
Seite 297
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
297
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the wheel and
screw the connecting piece of the filler hose
onto the valve.
5. With the compressor switched off, insert the
connector into the power socket in the vehi-
cle interior.
Filling the tire with sealing
compound
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-
trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain
pollutants which are colorless and odorless.
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.
NOTICE
The compressor can overheat during ex-
tended operation. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not run the compressor for
more than 10 minutes.
Filling the tire with sealing compound
1.
With standby state or drive-ready state
switched on, switch on the compressor.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes
to fill in the tire sealant and reach a tire
pressure of 2.5 bar/36 psi.
While the tire is being filled with tire sealant,
the tire pressure can briefly reach approx.
6 bar/87 psi. Do not turn off the compres-
sor in this phase.
2. Switch off the compressor.
Checking the tire pressure
Read the tire pressure on the tire pressure dis-
play of the compressor. The tire pressure must
be at least 2.5 bar/36 psi.
Tire pressure too high
If the tire pressure is too high, reduce the tire
pressure with the pressure reducing valve on
the compressor.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not
reached
Do not continue driving unless a minimum tire
pressure of 2.5 bar/36 psi is reached. Contact
an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
reached
1.
Pull the connector out of the socket in the
vehicle interior.
2. Disconnect the hose from the sealant bottle
and the valve on the wheel.
3. Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
Seite 298
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
298
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
4. Stow the tire repair set in the cargo area.
5. Immediately drive 5 miles/10 km to ensure
that the tire sealant is evenly distributed in
the tire.
Do not exceed the speed limit of
50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Tire sealant may spray from the damaged
area during the initial wheel rotations.
Adjusting the tire pressure
1.
Stop at a suitable location.
2. Connect the hose directly to the compres-
sor and turn clockwise by 90° until it audi-
bly engages.
3. Unscrew the valve cap from the wheel and
screw the connecting piece of the hose
onto the valve.
4. Insert the connector into the socket in the
vehicle interior.
5. Read the tire pressure on the tire pressure
display of the compressor.
Do not continue driving unless a minimum
tire pressure of 1.3 bar/19 psi is displayed.
Contact an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
6. Correct the tire pressure to 2.5 bar/36 psi.
▷ Increase tire pressure: with standby or
drive-ready state turned on, turn on the
compressor and let it run for a maxi-
mum of 10 minutes.
▷ Reduce tire pressure: Press the pres-
sure reducing valve button on the com-
pressor.
Remove and stow the tire repair set
1.
Switch off the compressor.
2. Pull the connector out of the socket in the
vehicle interior.
3. Disconnect the hose from the compressor
and the valve on the wheel.
4. Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
5. Stow the tire repair set in the cargo area.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the speed limit of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Do not exceed a maximum distance travelled
of 125 miles/200 km.
Re-initialize the flat tire monitor or reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the faulty tire and the sealant bottle of
the tire repair set promptly.
Additional information:
▷
Flat tire monitor, refer to page 308.
▷ Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 300.
System limits
If the tire cannot be made drivable, contact an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
With Tire Pressure Monitor: Using sealant can
damage the air pressure sensor. In this case,
Seite 299
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
299
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
have the electronics checked and replaced at
the next opportunity.
Snow chains
Safety information
Warning
Mounting snow chains on unsuitable tires
can cause the snow chains to come into con-
tact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk
of accidents or risk of damage to property.
Only mount snow chains on tires that are
designated by their manufacturer as suitable
for the use of snow chains.
Warning
Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage
tires and vehicle components. There may be
a risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Make sure that the snow chains are al-
ways sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed
according to the snow chain manufacturer's
instructions.
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
the use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types
of fine-link snow chains have been tested by
the manufacturer of the vehicle and recom-
mended as road-safe and suitable.
For information on suitable snow chains, con-
tact an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
Use is only permitted in pairs on rear wheels
equipped with the tires of the following wheel/
tire sizes:
Tire size
Wheel size Rim offset (IS)
225/45 R18 7.5J x 17 25
Information on the wheel size and rim offset is
located on the inside of the wheel.
The list can also include wheel/tire sizes that
are only suitable for certain models.
Information on wheels and tires approved for
the vehicle can be requested from an author-
ized service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
If vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure Moni-
tor: When using snow chains, do not reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor, otherwise, incorrect val-
ues may be displayed.
If vehicle is equipped with flat tire monitor:
When using snow chains, do not initialize the
flat tire monitor, otherwise, incorrect values
may be displayed.
When driving with snow chains, activate the
Dynamic Traction Control briefly to optimize
the drive power.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Tire pressure monitor
Principle
The Tire Pressure Monitor monitors the tire
pressure and issues a warning if the tire pres-
sure has dropped.
General information
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire in-
flation pressure and tire temperature.
Depending on the tires detected or registered,
the system displays the specified nominal
Seite 300
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
300
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
pressures on the control display and compares
them with the current tire pressures.
If tires are being used that are not specified
in the tire inflation pressure details on the ve-
hicle, such as tires with special approval, the
system needs to be actively reset. The system
will then take over the actual tire inflation pres-
sures as the target pressures.
When operating the system, also note the in-
formation found in the Tire inflation pressure
chapter.
Additional information:
Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 284.
Safety information
Warning
The display of the target pressures is not
a substitute for the tire inflation pressure de-
tails on the vehicle. Incorrect entries in the
tire settings can lead to incorrect target tire
inflation pressure values. In this case, it can-
not be guaranteed that the notification of a
tire pressure loss will be reliable. There is a
risk of injury and risk of damage to property.
Ensure that the tire sizes of the mounted tires
are displayed correctly and match the details
on the tires and on the vehicle.
Functional requirements
The following prerequisites must be met for
the system; otherwise, reliable notification of a
tire pressure loss is not assured:
▷
After each tire or wheel change, the system
detects and updates the mounted tires on
the control display and displays them after
a short trip.
Enter the information about the mounted
tires in the tire settings when the system
does not automatically detect the tires.
▷ The Tire Pressure Monitor does not acti-
vate until after driving for a few minutes:
▷ After a tire or wheel change.
▷ After a reset, for tires with special ap-
proval.
▷ After changing the tire setting.
▷ For tires with special approval:
▷ After a tire or wheel change, a reset was
performed with the correct tire inflation
pressure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad-
justed to a new value, a reset was per-
formed.
▷ Wheels with air pressure sensor.
Tire settings
General information
The information about the mounted tires can
be entered in the tire settings if the system
does not automatically detect the tires.
The tire sizes of the mounted tires can be
gathered from the tire inflation pressure details
on the vehicle or directly on the tires.
The tire details do not need to be re-entered
when the tire pressure is corrected.
For summer and winter tires, the tire details
entered last are stored. After a tire or wheel
change, the settings of the tire sets used last
can be selected.
Adjusting the tires
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
5. "Tire settings"
6. "Tire selection"
7. "Manual"
8. "Tire type"
9. Select the tire size for the rear axle.
For tires with special approval:
Seite 301
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
301
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
"Other tires"
Observe further proceeding in the perform
a reset section.
10. Select the maximum speed to be driven.
11. "Save tire settings"
The measurement of the current tire inflation
pressure is started. The measurement prog-
ress is displayed.
Status display
Current status
The system status can be displayed on the
control display, e.g., whether or not the system
is active.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The current status is displayed.
Current tire pressure
The current tire pressure is displayed for each
tire.
The current tire inflation pressures may
change during driving or depending on the out-
side temperature.
Current tire temperature
The current tire temperatures are displayed
depending on the model.
The current tire temperatures may change
while driving or due to the outside tempera-
ture.
Nominal pressure
The nominal pressure for the tires on the front
and rear axles is displayed.
The specified nominal pressures take the in-
fluence of driving and outside temperature on
the tire temperature into account. The appro-
priate nominal pressure is always displayed,
independent of the weather situation, tire tem-
peratures and travel times.
The displayed nominal pressure may change
and may differ from the tire inflation pressure
details on the door pillar of the driver's door.
The tire inflation pressure can thus be cor-
rected to the value of the displayed target
pressures.
The nominal pressure is immediately adjusted
if the vehicle load status is changed in the tire
settings.
Tire conditions
General information
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a text message on the
control display.
Any existing messages may not be deleted if
the nominal pressure is not reached after the
tire inflation pressure is corrected.
All wheels green
▷
The system is active and bases warnings
on the target pressures.
▷ For tires with special approval: the system
is active and bases warnings on the tire
inflation pressures stored during the last re-
set.
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major tire pressure loss has occur-
red in the indicated tires.
Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
losses.
Possible causes:
Seite 302
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
302
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Malfunction.
▷ During tire inflation pressure measurement,
after confirmation of the tire settings.
▷ For tires with special approval: a reset is
performed for the system.
For tires with special approval:
performing a reset
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
5. Make sure that the tire settings are correct.
Tire settings, refer to page 301.
6. Turn on drive-ready state and do not drive
off.
7. Reset tire pressure: "Perform reset".
8. Drive off.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the fol-
lowing is displayed: "Resetting tire pressure…".
After a travel time of several minutes, the set
tire inflation pressures are accepted as the
predefined tire inflation pressures. The reset is
completed automatically while driving.
After a successfully completed reset, the
wheels on the control display are shown in
green and the following is displayed: "Reset
successful."
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue driving the reset resumes auto-
matically.
Messages: for tires without special
approval
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Sta-
bility Control may be turned on.
Safety information
Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or no tire
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
steering and braking response. Runflat tires
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk
of accident. Do not continue driving if the
vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow
the information on runflat tires and continued
driving with these tires.
With recommended tire pressure test
Message
An icon with service information is shown on
the control display and, if necessary, in the My
BMW App.
Icon Possible cause
Leak detected on the tire.
Measure
Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
An icon with a Check Control message appears
on the control display.
Icon
Possible cause
Inflation was not carried out accord-
ing to specifications, for instance
when the tire has not been suffi-
ciently inflated or in the case of a nat-
ural steady tire pressure loss.
Measure
Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
Seite 303
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
303
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes-
sage appears on the control display.
Icon Possible cause
There is a tire pressure loss.
Measure
1.
Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a fill-
ing station, check the tire inflation pressure
in all four tires and correct if necessary.
If there is a significant tire pressure
loss
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, an icon with the affected tire ap-
pears in a Check Control message on the con-
trol display.
Icon
Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major tire
pressure loss.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
standard tires or runflat tires.
Runflat tires are labeled with a circular icon
containing the letters RSC marked on the
tire sidewall.
Runflat tires, refer to page 295.
3. Read the description on what to do in case
of a flat tire.
Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to
page 305.
Messages: for tires with special
approval
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Sta-
bility Control may be turned on.
Safety information
Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or no tire
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
steering and braking response. Runflat tires
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk
of accident. Do not continue driving if the
vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow
the information on runflat tires and continued
driving with these tires.
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
An icon with a Check Control message appears
on the control display.
Seite 304
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
304
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Icon Possible cause
Inflation was not carried out accord-
ing to specifications, e.g., the tire
has not been sufficiently inflated.
The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
below the level of the last reset.
No reset was performed for the sys-
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Perform a system reset.
If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes-
sage appears on the control display.
Icon
Possible cause
There is a tire pressure loss.
No reset was performed for the sys-
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a fill-
ing station, check the tire inflation pressure
in all four tires and correct if necessary.
3. Perform a system reset.
If there is a significant tire pressure
loss
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, an icon with the affected tire ap-
pears in a Check Control message on the con-
trol display.
Icon Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major tire
pressure loss.
No reset was performed for the sys-
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
standard tires or runflat tires.
Runflat tires are labeled with a circular icon
containing the letters RSC marked on the
tire sidewall.
Runflat tires, refer to page 295.
3. Read the description on what to do in case
of a flat tire.
Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to
page 305.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Standard tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Check the tire pressure in all four tires,
for instance using the tire pressure display
from a tire repair set.
Seite 305
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
305
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
For tires with special approval: when the
tire pressure in all four tires is correct, the
Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been
reset. In this case, perform the reset.
If no tire damage can be identified, con-
tact an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire
repair set or by changing the wheel.
Using sealant, e.g., from the flat tire kit, may
damage the air pressure sensor. Replace the
air pressure sensor at the next opportunity.
Runflat tires
Safety information
Warning
The vehicle handles differently when a runflat
tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for
instance, reduced directional stability when
braking, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is
a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do
not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Follow the following when continuing to drive
with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires at the next opportunity.
Possible driving distance with a flat tire
The possible driving distance which may be
safely traveled varies depending on how the
vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road
conditions, outside temperature. The distance
traveled may be less but may also be more if
an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average
weight and used under favorable conditions,
the possible distance traveled may be up to
50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will han-
dle differently, potentially leading to conditions
such as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of skidding of the vehicle.
▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or
potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi-
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
System limits
Temperature
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tire's temperature.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
tire temperature, thus increasing the tire infla-
tion pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
tire temperature falls again.
Seite 306
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
306
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
These circumstances may cause a warning
when temperatures fall very sharply.
Following a temperature-related warning, the
target pressures are displayed on the control
display again after a short distance.
Sudden tire pressure loss
The system cannot indicate sudden and se-
rious tire damage caused by external circum-
stances.
Failure performing a reset
Tires with special approval: the system will not
function correctly if a reset was not performed,
for example a flat tire may be indicated al-
though the tire inflation pressures are correct.
Malfunction
Message
The yellow warning light flashes and is
then illuminated continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. It may
not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
Measure
▷
A wheel without air pressure sensor is
mounted: Have the wheels checked as
needed.
▷ Fault caused by systems or devices with
the same transmission frequency: The sys-
tem automatically reactivates after leaving
the area of the interference.
▷ For tires with special approval: the system
was unable to complete the reset. Perform
a system reset again.
▷ If the Tire Pressure Monitor malfunctions:
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in-
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If the
vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine
the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.) As an added safety feature, the vehi-
cle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Ac-
cordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping
ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it
is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale. The vehicle
has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pres-
sure telltale. When the system detects a mal-
function, the telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously il-
luminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-
cator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
Seite 307
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
307
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function-
ing properly. Always check the TPMS malfunc-
tion telltale after replacing one or more tires
or wheels on the vehicle to ensure that the re-
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Flat tire monitor
Principle
The flat tire monitor detects a tire pressure
loss while driving and issues a warning if the
tire pressure has dropped.
General information
The system detects tire pressure loss on the
basis of rotation speed differences between
the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire pressure loss, the diame-
ter and therefore the rotational speed of the
corresponding wheel changes. The difference
will be detected and reported as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla-
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The following prerequisites must be met for
the system; otherwise, reliable notification of a
tire pressure loss is not assured:
▷
After a tire or wheel change, an initialization
was carried out at the correct tire pressure.
▷ After the tire pressure was adjusted to a
new value, an initialization was performed.
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor can
be displayed, e.g., whether the flat tire monitor
is active.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the fol-
lowing situations:
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been
adjusted.
▷ After a tire or wheel change.
Performing initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
serve as reference values in order to detect a
flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming
the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Flat Tire Monitor"
5. Turn on drive-ready state and do not drive
off.
6. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset"
7. Drive off.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving continues.
Messages
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Sta-
bility Control (DSC) is turned on, if needed.
Seite 308
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
308
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or no tire
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
steering and braking response. Runflat tires
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk
of accident. Do not continue driving if the
vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow
the information on runflat tires and continued
driving with these tires.
Indication of a flat tire
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes-
sage appears on the control display.
Icon Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major tire
pressure loss.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
standard tires or runflat tires.
Runflat tires are labeled with a circular icon
containing the letters RSC marked on the
tire sidewall.
Runflat tires, refer to page 295.
3. Read the description on what to do in case
of a flat tire.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Standard tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire pressure in all four
tires, for instance using the tire pressure
display from a tire repair set.
When the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the flat tire monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
If tire damage cannot be identified, contact
an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire
repair set or by changing the wheel.
Runflat tires
Safety information
Warning
The vehicle handles differently when a runflat
tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for
instance, reduced directional stability when
braking, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is
a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do
not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Follow the following when continuing to drive
with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires at the next opportunity.
When the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the flat tire monitor may not
Seite 309
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
309
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Possible driving distance with a flat tire
The possible driving distance which may be
safely traveled varies depending on how the
vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road
conditions, outside temperature. The distance
traveled may be less but may also be more if
an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average
weight and used under favorable conditions,
the possible distance traveled may be up to
50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will han-
dle differently, potentially leading to conditions
such as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of skidding of the vehicle.
▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or
potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi-
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
System limits
The system may be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷
A natural, even tire pressure loss in all
four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
▷ Sudden and serious tire damage caused
by external circumstances cannot be recog-
nized in advance.
▷ The system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road.
▷ Sporty driving style: slip on traction wheels,
high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When using runflat tires or a tire repair set, the
wheel does not always need to be changed
immediately in the event of a breakdown when
there is tire pressure loss.
If necessary, a suitable wheel change tool, e.g.,
a jack, is available as an accessory from an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning
The jack is only provided for short-term lifting
of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all
safety precautions are observed, there is a
risk of the raised vehicle falling if the jack tips
over. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
When the vehicle is raised with the jack, do
not lie under the vehicle and do not switch on
the drive-ready state.
Seite 310
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
310
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Warning
Supports such as wooden blocks under the
jack reduce the load-carrying capacity of
the jack to bear weight. The load-carrying
capacity of the wooden blocks may be ex-
ceeded and the vehicle may tip over. There is
a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not place
supports under the jack.
Warning
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer,
is provided in order to perform a wheel
change in the event of a breakdown. The
jack is not designed for frequent use, e.g.,
changing from summer to winter tires. Using
the jack frequently may cause it to become
jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Only use the
jack to change an emergency or spare wheel
in the event of a breakdown.
Warning
The jack may slip on soft, uneven, or slippery
ground, e.g., snow, ice, tiles, etc. There is a
risk of injury. If possible, change the wheel on
a flat, solid, slip-resistant surface.
Warning
The jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle
and for the jacking points on the vehicle only.
There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other
vehicle or cargo using the jack.
Warning
When the jack is not inserted into the jacking
point provided for this purpose, the vehicle
may be damaged or the jack may slip when
it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. When cranking
up the jack, ensure that it is inserted in the
jacking point next to the wheel well.
Warning
A vehicle that is raised on a jack may fall
off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on
it. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-
age to property. While the vehicle is raised,
do not exert lateral effort on the vehicle or
pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck
wheel removed by an authorized service cen-
ter or another qualified service center or re-
pair shop.
NOTICE
Using an impact wrench to loosen or tighten
the wheel lock bolt can damage the wheel
lock bolt. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Only use a lug wrench to loosen and
tighten the wheel lock bolt.
Securing the vehicle against rolling
away
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ad-
ditionally secure the vehicle against rolling
away when changing a wheel.
Seite 311
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
311
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
On a level surface
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in
front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to
the wheel to be changed.
On a slight downhill gradient
If you need to change a wheel on a slight
downhill grade, place chocks and other suit-
able objects, for instance rocks, under the
proper side of the wheels of both the front and
rear axles to block the car from rolling downhill.
Lug bolt lock
Principle
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
which matches the coding.
Overview
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the on-
board vehicle tool kit or in a storage compart-
ment close to the onboard vehicle tool kit.
▷
Lug lock bolt, arrow 1.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug lock bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the
lug bolt.
Screwing on
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt. If
necessary, turn the adapter until it fits on
the wheel lug bolt.
2. Screw on the lug lock bolt. The tightening
torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after
screwing on the lug bolt.
Safety precautions
▷
Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
ground at a safe distance from road traffic.
▷ Turn on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out and
make sure that they remain outside the
hazardous area such as behind a guardrail.
Seite 312
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
312
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ If necessary, set up the hazard triangle or
hazard warning lights at an appropriate
distance.
▷ Depending on vehicle equipment, remove
the wheel change set and, if necessary, the
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll-
ing away.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points
The jacking points are located at the indicated
positions.
Jacking up the vehicle
Warning
Hands and fingers can be jammed when us-
ing the jack. There is a risk of injury. Comply
with the described hand position and do not
change this position while using the jack.
1.
Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar-
row 1, and grasp the jack crank handle or
lever with your other hand, arrow 2.
2. Insert the jack into the rectangular recess of
the jacking point closest to the wheel to be
changed.
3. Extend the jack by turning the jack crank
handle or lever clockwise.
4. Take your hand away from the jack as soon
as the jack is under load and continue turn-
ing the jack crank handle or lever with one
hand.
Seite 313
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
313
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
5. Make sure that the car jack foot extends
vertically and is at a right angle beneath the
jacking point.
6. Make sure that the car jack foot is vertical
and at a right angle beneath the jacking
point after extending the vehicle jack.
7. Crank the vehicle up until the vehicle jack
has the entire surface on the ground
and the relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 in-
ches/3 cm above ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
1.
Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a
crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
When non-original light-alloy wheels of the
vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac-
companying lug bolts may have to be used
as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat-
tern.
5. Turn the jack crank handle counterclock-
wise to retract the jack and lower the vehi-
cle.
6. Remove the jack and stow it securely.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight-
ening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the faulty wheel in the cargo area, if
necessary.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op-
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Re-initialize the flat tire monitor or reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Drive to the nearest authorized service cen-
ter or another qualified service center or
repair shop, then have the damaged tire
renewed.
Seite 314
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
314
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Overview
1 Filler neck for washer fluid
2 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
3 Oil filler neck
4 Depending on motorization: coolant reser-
voir for additional radiator
5 Coolant reservoir, engine
6 Vehicle identification number
7 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
Seite 315
Engine compartment
MOBILITY
315
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Hood
Safety information
Warning
Improperly executed work in the engine com-
partment can damage vehicle components
and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk
of an accident and damage to property.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in
the engine compartment be performed by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Warning
The engine compartment accommodates
moving components. Certain components in
the engine compartment can also move with
the vehicle switched off, for instance the radi-
ator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach
into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of
clothing and hair away from moving parts.
Warning
There are protruding parts, for instance lock-
ing hooks, on the inside of the hood. There
is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay
attention to protruding parts and keep clear
of these areas.
Warning
An incorrectly locked hood can open while
driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk
of accident. Stop immediately and correctly
close the hood.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when opening
and closing the hood. There is a risk of in-
jury. Make sure that the area of movement of
hood is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE
Folded-out wipers can be jammed when the
hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the wipers with the
wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
the windshield before opening the hood.
NOTICE
When the hood is closed, it must engage on
both sides. Pressing again can damage the
hood. There is a risk of damage to property.
Open the hood again and then close it ener-
getically. Avoid pressing again.
Opening hood
1.
Pull the lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. Release the lever and pull it again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Seite 316
MOBILITY
Engine compartment
316
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Operating materials
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many filling stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter
or summer conditions. Fuel that is available
in winter, for instance helps make a cold start
easier.
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as
containing metal must not be used.
Fill up using fuel with a maximum ethanol con-
tent of 10 %, e.g., E10.
The power and consumption specifications re-
fer to operating with RON 98 E10 fuel
When using minimum quality AKI 87 fuel, there
may be knocking noises as well as driving and
acoustic abnormalities. These have no effect
on the engine service life.
Safety information
Caution
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi-
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start-
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi-
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we
recommend switching to a high quality gaso-
line brand and a higher octane grade — AKI
number — for a few tank fills. To avoid harm-
ful engine deposits, it is highly recommended
to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommenda-
tions may result in the need for additional
maintenance.
NOTICE
Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or
wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel
system and engine. Furthermore, the cat-
alytic converter is permanently damaged.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not refuel or add the following in the case of
gasoline engines:
▷
Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, for instance manga-
nese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refu-
eling with the wrong fuel. Contact an author-
ized service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
Seite 318
MOBILITY
Operating materials
318
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
NOTICE
Fuel that does not comply with the minimum
quality can compromise engine function or
cause engine damage. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not fill with fuel that
does not comply with the minimum quality.
NOTICE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system
and the engine. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not use fuels with a higher
ethanol content than recommended. Do not
refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5
to M100.
Recommended gas quality
BMW recommends AKI 91.
M Performance model:
BMW recommends AKI 93.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 87.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat-
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high external temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Engine oil
General information
The engine oil consumption and engine oil
properties depend on the driving style and op-
erating conditions.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling by taking a detailed measure-
ment.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
the following situations, for instance:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idle operation of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi-
fied as not suitable.
Different Check Control messages are shown
on the control display depending on the engine
oil level and engine oil properties.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends having
the engine oil changed by an authorized serv-
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Safety information
NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes en-
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine
or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not add too much
engine oil. If there is excess engine oil, have
the engine oil level corrected by an author-
ized service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
Seite 319
Operating materials
MOBILITY
319
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
NOTICE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely fash-
ion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. It is recommended that you
do not exceed the service intervals indicated
in the vehicle.
Electronic oil measurement
General information
The electronic oil measurement has two
measuring principles:
▷ Monitoring.
▷ Detailed measurement.
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a sporty driving style, for instance when
cornering aggressively, regularly perform a de-
tailed measurement.
Monitoring
Principle
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and can be shown on the control
display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after ap-
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving.
Displaying the engine oil level
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
System limits
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a sporty driving style, it may not be pos-
sible to calculate a measured value. In this
case, the measured value for the last, suffi-
ciently long trip is displayed.
Detailed measurement
Principle
The engine oil level is checked when the vehi-
cle is stationary and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
General information
During the measurement, the idle speed is in-
creased somewhat.
Functional requirements
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ The drive-ready state is switched on by
pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ The engine is at operating temperature.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N or
P and accelerator pedal not depressed.
Performing a detailed measurement
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Engine oil level"
5. "Oil level measurement"
6. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Seite 320
MOBILITY
Operating materials
320
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis-
played in the instrument cluster. The top-up
quantity is indicated in the message shown on
the control display.
Only add suitable types of engine oil.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-
ready state before adding engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Safety information
Warning
Operating materials, for instance oils,
greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful
ingredients. There is a risk of injury or danger
to life. Follow the instructions on the contain-
ers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing,
skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not
refill operating materials into different bottles.
Store operating materials out of reach of chil-
dren.
NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes en-
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine
or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not add too much
engine oil. If there is excess engine oil, have
the engine oil level corrected by an author-
ized service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com-
partment.
Additional information:
For an overview, refer to page 315.
Adding engine oil
1. Opening the hood.
Opening, refer to page 316.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
4. Close the lid.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil grade is critical for the service
life of the engine.
Only add with the types of engine oil which are
listed.
Safety information
NOTICE
Oil additives can damage the engine. There
is a risk of damage to property. Do not use oil
additives.
Seite 321
Operating materials
MOBILITY
321
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
NOTICE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions
in the engine or damage it. There is a risk
of damage to property. When selecting an
engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has
the correct oil specification.
Suitable engine oil types
When topping up engine oil, the following oil
specification applies:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-17 FE+.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use
is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an
engine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Oil specification
API SL.
API SM.
API SN.
Viscosity grades
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
the engine oil has a suitable viscosity grade.
The suitable viscosity grade is indicated on a
sign in the engine compartment.
Viscosity grades
SAE 0W-20.
More information about suitable oil specifica-
tions and engine oil viscosity grades can be
requested from an authorized service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Coolant
General information
Coolant consists of water and coolant additive.
Not all commercially available coolant addi-
tives are suitable for the vehicle. The vehicle
manufacturer recommends using coolant with
the BMW LC-18 specification. Do not mix cool-
ant additives of different colors. Use a 50:50
mixing ratio of water to coolant additive. Infor-
mation on suitable coolant additives can be
provided by an authorized service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning
With the engine hot and the cooling system
open, coolant can escape and lead to scald-
ing. There is a risk of injury. Only open the
cooling system with the engine cooled down.
Warning
Additives are harmful and incorrect additives
can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of damage to property. Do not
allow additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi-
tives only.
Seite 322
MOBILITY
Operating materials
322
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Coolant level
General information
The coolant may be overfilled in the coolant
reservoir when the vehicle is delivered from the
factory. Run longer to achieve the normal cool-
ant level.
The nominal coolant level is indicated by the
maximum mark in the filler neck of the coolant
reservoir.
Additional information:
For an overview, refer to page 315.
Checking the coolant level
1.
Let the engine cool down.
2. Opening the hood.
Opening, refer to page 316.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres-
sure to dissipate, then open it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
5. The coolant level is correct when it is just
below the maximum mark in the filler neck.
6. Close the lid.
Adding coolant
1.
Let the engine cool down.
2. Opening the hood.
Opening, refer to page 316.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres-
sure to dissipate, then open it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified fill level; do not overfill.
6. Close the lid.
7. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen-
tal protection regulations when dispos-
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Washer fluid
General information
All spray nozzles are supplied from one tank.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can
be used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.4 US
gal/2 liters.
Safety information
Warning
Some types of antifreeze can contain harmful
substances and are flammable. There is a
risk of fire and an injury hazard. Follow the in-
structions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill op-
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio
is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many in-
dividual states; do not exceed the allowable
washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply.
Follow the usage instructions on the washer
fluid container.
Seite 323
Operating materials
MOBILITY
323
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen-
trate or the equivalent is recommended.
Warning
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con-
tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid
reservoir.
NOTICE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer
fluid for the water-repelling effect on the win-
dows can lead to damage to the car wash.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not add silicon-containing additives to the
washer fluid.
NOTICE
Mixing different windshield washer fluid con-
centrates or antifreeze can damage the
washer system. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not mix different windshield
washer fluid concentrates or antifreeze. Fol-
low the information and mixture ratios pro-
vided on the containers.
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en-
gine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer fluid
concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can
lead to incorrect readings at temperatures be-
low +5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Seite 324
MOBILITY
Operating materials
324
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
BMW maintenance system
Principle
The maintenance system provides service no-
tifications and thereby provides support in
maintaining road safety and the operational
reliability of the vehicle.
General information
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the
maintenance system may vary according to
the country version. Replacement work, spare
parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear materials
are calculated separately. Further information
is available from an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Condition Based Service
Principle
Condition Based Service determines the main-
tenance recommendation using sensors and
special algorithms that take into account the
operating conditions of the vehicle.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
General information
Information on service notifications can be dis-
played on the control display.
Additional information:
Service notifications, refer to page 155.
Service data in the vehicle key
Information on the service notifications is con-
tinuously stored in the vehicle key. The author-
ized service center can read this data out and
suggest a maintenance scope for the vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the vehicle
key with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Stationary periods
Stationary periods during which the vehicle
battery was disconnected are not taken into
account.
In such cases, have any time-dependent main-
tenance, e.g., brake fluid, engine oil, and mi-
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter checks, per-
formed by an authorized service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Maintenance Booklet for US
Models
Please consult your Maintenance Booklet for
additional information on the performance of
service and maintenance work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by
an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop. Records of
regular maintenance and repair work should
be retained.
Seite 325
Maintenance
MOBILITY
325
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Diagnostic socket
General information
Devices connected to the diagnostic socket will
trigger the alarm system after locking the vehi-
cle.
Remove devices connected to the diagnostic
socket before locking the vehicle.
Safety information
NOTICE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in-
tricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions sys-
tem. Improper use of the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis, or contact with the socket for On-
board Diagnosis for other than its intended
purpose, can cause vehicle malfunctions and
creates risks of personal and property dam-
age. Given the foregoing, the manufacture
of the vehicle strongly recommends that ac-
cess to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be
limited to an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop
or other persons that have the specialized
training and equipment for purposes of prop-
erly utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagno-
sis.
Position
There is a diagnostic socket on the driver’s
side for reading out vehicle data.
Emissions
▷ The warning light illuminates:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos-
sible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir-
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir-
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the ve-
hicle checked immediately; otherwise, se-
rious engine misfiring within a brief pe-
riod can seriously damage emission control
components, in particular the catalytic con-
verter.
Seite 326
MOBILITY
Maintenance
326
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the
left storage compartment of the cargo area un-
der a cover.
Wiper blades
Safety information
NOTICE
The window may sustain damage if the wiper
falls onto it without the wiper blade installed.
There is a risk of damage to property. Hold
the wiper firmly when changing the wiper
blade. Do not fold in or switch on the wiper
without a wiper blade installed.
NOTICE
Folded-out wipers can be jammed when the
hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the wipers with the
wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
the windshield before opening the hood.
Replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, bring wipers
into fold-out position.
Fold-out position of the wipers, refer to
page 133.
2. Fold out and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Squeeze the retaining spring, arrow 1, and
fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the
detent.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold in the wipers.
Lights and bulbs
General information
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu-
tion to driving safety.
Seite 327
Replacing components
MOBILITY
327
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
All headlights and lights are designed using
LED technology at least.
In the event of a malfunction, the vehicle man-
ufacturer recommends having an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop perform any necessary work.
Safety information
Warning
Focused laser light can irritate or perma-
nently damage the retina of the eye. There
is a risk of injury. The vehicle manufacturer
recommends having work on the lighting sys-
tem, including bulb replacement, performed
by an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Warning
Intense brightness can irritate or damage the
retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do
not look directly into the headlights or other
light sources. Do not remove the LED covers.
Headlight glass
The inside of the headlight glass can fog up
in cool or humid weather. When driving with
the lights switched on, the condensation evap-
orates after a short time. The headlight glass
does not need to be changed.
If, despite driving with the headlights switched
on, moisture such as water droplets increas-
ingly forms in the light, have the headlights
checked.
Vehicle battery
General information
The battery is maintenance-free.
More information on the battery can be re-
quested from an authorized service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. There is a risk of injury or dan-
ger to life. Do not touch any components that
are under voltage.
Warning
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can
damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle
functions. There is a risk of an accident and
damage to property. Only vehicle batteries
that are compatible with the vehicle type
should be installed in the vehicle. Information
on compatible vehicle batteries is available at
an authorized service center.
Registering the battery to the
vehicle
The vehicle manufacturer recommends hav-
ing an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop register
the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the bat-
tery has been changed. Once the battery has
been registered again, all comfort features will
be available without limitation and any Check
Control messages displayed which relate to
comfort features will disappear.
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi-
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
Seite 328
MOBILITY
Replacing components
328
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
A discharged battery is indicated by a
red indicator light.
Charge the battery when acceleration is insuffi-
cient.
The following circumstances can have a nega-
tive effect on the performance of the battery:
▷ Frequent short-distance drives.
▷ Stationary periods of more than one month.
Safety information
Warning
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the ve-
hicle may overload or damage the 12 V elec-
trical system. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the jump-
start terminals in the engine compartment.
Charging the battery
Charge the battery only when the engine is off
and via the jump-start terminals in the engine
compartment.
With Mild Hybrid technology: charge the bat-
tery only when the hood is opened.
Additional information:
Jump-start terminals, refer to page 335.
Power interruption
After a power interruption, some equipment
needs to be newly initialized or individual set-
tings updated, for example:
▷
Parking brake, refer to page 128.
▷ With Memory function: store the positions
again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
Mild Hybrid technology
Principle
Part of the Mild Hybrid technology is a battery
that works with a voltage of 48 volts. Mild Hy-
brid technology can lower the fuel consump-
tion.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. There is a risk of injury or dan-
ger to life. Do not touch any components that
are under voltage.
Overview
The battery for the Mild-Hybrid technology is
located under a cover in the engine compart-
ment on the front passenger side.
Seite 329
Replacing components
MOBILITY
329
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Removing the cover
1. Turn lid up to the opened lock icon ar-
row 1.
2. Remove cover, arrow 2.
Notice
Do not exchange or work on the battery for the
Mild Hybrid technology.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by an
authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop,
or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the filled battery in an upright position
for transport and storage. Secure the battery
so that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
General information
The fuses are located at different places in the
vehicle.
Information on the fuse layout and the posi-
tions of the fuse boxes is available on the In-
ternet: fusecard.bmw.com.
Safety information
Warning
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a
risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown
fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a
substitute of another color or amperage rat-
ing.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends having
the fuses replaced by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Seite 330
MOBILITY
Replacing components
330
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Breakdown Assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Hazard warning system
Hazard warning system button
The red light in the button flashes when the
hazard warning system is turned on.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the tailgate.
Press on the release, arrow 1, and swivel the
cover down, arrow 2.
First-aid kit
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, the vehicle is equipped
with a first-aid kit.
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg-
ularly and replace any expired items promptly.
Storage
Storage for the first-aid kit is provided in the
right storage compartment of the cargo area.
BMW Roadside Assistance
Principle
BMW Group Roadside Assistance can be con-
tacted if assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown.
Seite 331
Breakdown Assistance
MOBILITY
331
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
General information
In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve-
hicle's condition is transmitted to the BMW
Roadside Assistance.
There are various ways of contacting BMW
Roadside Assistance.
▷ Via a Check Control message.
Supplementary text messages, refer to
page 145.
▷ Via a call with a mobile phone.
▷ Via the BMW app.
Functional requirements
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
with intelligent emergency call or BMW
ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
Starting BMW Roadside Assistance
manually
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices,
support is first offered through Teleservice Di-
agnosis and, where applicable, then through
Teleservice Help.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "BMW Assistance"
4. "BMW Roadside Assistance" or select the
desired service.
Follow the displays on the control display.
A voice connection is established.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnostics enables detailed vehi-
cle data to be transmitted via cellular networks,
which is necessary for vehicle diagnosis. This
data is transmitted automatically. It may be
necessary to approve this on the control dis-
play.
Teleservice Help
Depending on the country, Teleservice Help
enables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by
BMW Roadside Assistance via wireless trans-
mission.
You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting
it through BMW Roadside Assistance.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Turn on control display.
4. Consent to Teleservice Help.
BMW Accident Assistance
Principle
BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con-
tacted if assistance is needed in the event of
an accident.
General information
If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder-
ately severe accident, which did not deploy any
airbags, a Check Control message is displayed
in the instrument cluster. In addition, a text
message appears on the control display.
When BMW Accident Assistance is triggered,
data on the vehicle's condition is sent to BMW.
Functional requirements
▷
Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
with intelligent emergency call or BMW
ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
Starting BMW Accident Assistance
If an accident is detected automatically
A text message relating to BMW Accident As-
sistance appears on the control display.
Seite 332
MOBILITY
Breakdown Assistance
332
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The connection can be established directly:
"Contact accident assistance"
The Check Control message for BMW Accident
Assistance can also be called up from the
stored Check Control messages for a certain
length of time.
Additional information:
Check Control, refer to page 145.
Starting BMW Accident Assistance
manually
BMW Accident Assistance can also be con-
tacted independently of the automatic accident
detection function.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "BMW Assistance"
4. "BMW Accident Assistance" or select the
desired service.
Follow the displays on the control display.
A voice connection is established.
Emergency Call
Intelligent emergency call
Principle
In case of an emergency, an emergency call
can be triggered automatically by the system
or manually.
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, the vehicle is equipped
with an Assist system.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
The Intelligent Assist system establishes a
connection with the BMW Response Center.
For technical reasons, the emergency call can-
not be guaranteed under unfavorable condi-
tions.
Overview
SOS button
Functional requirements
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
emergency call: the integrated SIM card in
the vehicle has been activated.
Automatic triggering
Under certain conditions, for example if the
airbags are deployed, an emergency call is au-
tomatically triggered immediately after an acci-
dent of corresponding severity. Automatic Col-
lision Notification is not affected by pressing
the SOS button.
Manual triggering
1.
Tap the cover flap.
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the
LED in the area of the button illuminates
green.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an
emergency call has been initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the control
display, the emergency call can be aborted.
Seite 333
Breakdown Assistance
MOBILITY
333
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
If the situation allows, wait in the vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab-
lished.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been es-
tablished.
The BMW Response Center then makes
contact with the occupants of the vehicle
and initiates further steps to help.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circumstan-
ces.
For this purpose, data that serves to deter-
mine the necessary rescue measures, for
instance the current position of the vehicle
when it can be determined, is transmitted
to the BMW Response Center.
Even if the BMW Response Center is no
longer heard through the loudspeakers, the
BMW Response Center may still be able to
hear the occupants of the vehicle.
The BMW Response Center ends the emer-
gency call.
Malfunction
The function of the emergency call may be im-
paired.
The LED near the SOS button flashes for ap-
proximately 30 seconds. A Check Control mes-
sage is displayed.
An emergency call may be disrupted in the fol-
lowing circumstances, among others:
▷
Extended vehicle idle times.
▷ Intense sunlight on vehicle roof.
Have checked by an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca-
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. There is a risk of injury or dan-
ger to life. Do not touch any components that
are under voltage.
Warning
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, spark formation may occur.
There is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the
correct order during connection.
Warning
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that no
body contact occurs.
Preparation
1.
Check whether the battery of the other ve-
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi-
cle.
3. Switch off any electrical components in
both vehicles.
Seite 334
MOBILITY
Breakdown Assistance
334
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Jump-start terminals
The jump-start terminals are located in the en-
gine compartment.
Additional information:
For an overview, refer to page 315.
Open the covers of the jump-start terminals.
Connecting the cables
Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary
electronic systems/components, such as the
radio, on the assisting and receiving vehicles.
1.
Open the lid of the jump-start terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive battery termi-
nal, or to the corresponding jump-start ter-
minal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive battery terminal,
or to the corresponding jump-start terminal
of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative battery termi-
nal, or to the corresponding engine or body
ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative battery terminal, or to the corre-
sponding engine or body ground of the ve-
hicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1.
Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
If the vehicle to be started has a diesel en-
gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle
run for approx. 10 minutes.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first attempt to start the engine is not
successful, wait a few minutes before mak-
ing another attempt in order to allow the
discharged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Tow-starting and towing
Safety information
Warning
Individual functions may not work correctly
when towing with Front Collision Warning en-
abled or Cruise Control switched on. There is
a risk of accident. Switch off Front Collision
Warning and Cruise Control before towing.
Steptronic transmission:
Transporting the vehicle
General information
Do not transport the vehicle by towing it.
Safety information
NOTICE
The vehicle can be damaged when towing
the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There
is a risk of damage to property. The vehicle
should only be transported on a loading plat-
form.
Warning
The vehicle can become damaged when lift-
ing and securing it.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property.
Seite 335
Breakdown Assistance
MOBILITY
335
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
hazardous area, push it for a short distance at
a speed of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h.
Additional information:
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 122.
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, de-
pending on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden-
tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or
a warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information
Warning
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the
towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control handling. There is
a risk of accident. Make sure that the gross
vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier
than the vehicle to be towed.
Warning
Different levels of braking may occur when
towing with adaptive recuperation. There is a
risk of accident. Deactivate adaptive recuper-
ation before towing.
NOTICE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor-
rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc-
cur. There is a risk of damage to property.
Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to
the tow fitting.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
If it is impossible to avoid mounting the tow
bar at an inclination, note the following:
▷
Free movement is limited when cornering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an inclination.
Tow rope
Observe the following notes when using the
tow rope:
▷
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable
the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
▷ Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when
fastening.
▷ Check the attachment of the tow fitting and
tow rope in regular intervals.
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of
30 mph/50 km/h.
Seite 336
MOBILITY
Breakdown Assistance
336
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of
3 miles/5 km.
▷ When driving off to tow the vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car-
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting is found in the onboard vehicle
tool kit.
Observe the following notes when using the
tow fitting:
▷
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle.
▷ Turn the tow fitting at least 5 turns clock-
wise and screw it in as far as it will go. If
necessary, tighten with a suitable object.
▷ After use, unscrew the tow fitting counter-
clockwise.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for
instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow
fitting.
▷ Check the attachment of the tow fitting in
regular intervals.
Additional information:
Onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 327.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there
may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow
fitting. There is a risk of damage to property.
Follow the notes on using the tow fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
For covers which have an opening instead of a
marking, pull the cover out by the opening.
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Start the engine by jump-starting, if possible.
Have the cause of starting issues corrected by
an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Additional information:
Jump-starting, refer to page 334.
Seite 337
Breakdown Assistance
MOBILITY
337
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Vehicle Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Washing the vehicle
General information
Regularly remove foreign bodies such as
leaves or snow in the area below the wind-
shield.
Wash the vehicle frequently, particularly in win-
ter. Intense contamination and road salt can
damage the vehicle.
Additional information:
Fold-out position of the wipers, refer to
page 133.
Safety information
NOTICE
When washing with an open fuel filler flap,
damage may occur. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Close the fuel filler flap be-
fore washing. Clean dirt behind the fuel filler
flap with a cloth.
Steam cleaner and high pressure
cleaner
Safety information
NOTICE
When cleaning with high pressure cleaners,
components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high.
There is a risk of damage to property. Main-
tain sufficient distance and do not spray too
long continuously. Follow the operating in-
structions for the high pressure cleaners.
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals and lights: 12 inches/30 cm.
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
Automatic car washes or car
washes
Safety information
NOTICE
Using a car wash with high pressure washers
may result in water penetration of window
areas. There is a risk of damage to property.
Do not drive into high-pressure car wash sys-
tems.
Seite 338
MOBILITY
Vehicle Care
338
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
NOTICE
Improper use of automatic car washes can
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk
of damage to property. Follow the following
instructions:
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Do not drive through a car wash with
guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to
avoid damage to the body.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage
to the exterior mirrors.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary,
rain sensor to avoid damage to the win-
dow wiper system.
Driving into a car wash
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en-
gaged when standby state is switched off.
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk
of damage to property. Do not switch off
standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g.,
in a car wash.
In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll
freely.
Some car washes do not permit persons in the
vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the
outside when in selector lever position N. A
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock
the vehicle.
Additional information:
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 122.
Driving out of a car wash
Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.
Turn on drive-ready state.
Additional information:
Drive-ready state, refer to page 41.
Lights
Do not rub wet lights dry and do not use
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents or cleaning
agents containing alcohol.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
from insects, with auto shampoo and wash off
with water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking effect
can be reduced. The heat generated during
braking dries brake disks and brake pads and
protects them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the win-
dows to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
General information
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning agents from BMW. Suitable vehicle
care products are available from an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Seite 339
Vehicle Care
MOBILITY
339
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
Warning
Cleaning agents can contain substances that
are dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the
interior, open the doors or windows. Only use
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol-
low the instructions on the packaging.
Vehicle paintwork
General information
Regular vehicle care contributes to driving
safety and value retention. Environmental in-
fluences in areas with elevated air pollution
or natural contaminants, such as tree resin or
pollen, can affect the vehicle paintwork. Tailor
the frequency and extent of the vehicle care to
these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed
immediately to prevent alterations or discolor-
ations of the finish.
Matte paintwork
Only use cleaning and care products suitable
for vehicles with matte paintwork.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using
a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to heavy
abrasion and premature degradation of the
leather surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be-
cause contamination on such surfaces is sub-
stantially more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
coating of the leather surface.
Remove aggressive substances, e.g.,
sunscreen, immediately to prevent alterations
or discolorations of the leather.
Synthetic leather care
Clean synthetic leather regularly with a damp
microfiber cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, dust and road grime particles will
rub into pores and folds, causing significant
abrasion and premature degradation of the
surface.
In case of major soiling, use a moist soft
sponge or microfiber cloth with suitable interior
cleaners.
Immediately remove aggressive substances,
e.g., sunscreen, to prevent alterations or dis-
colorations of the synthetic leather.
Fabric care
General information
In case of major contaminations, such as bev-
erage stains, use a moist soft sponge or micro-
fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaners.
Immediately remove aggressive substances,
e.g., sunscreen, to prevent alterations or dis-
colorations of the fabric.
Safety information
NOTICE
Open hook and loop fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers and
other cloth upholstery in the vehicle. There is
a risk of damage to property. Ensure that any
Velcro® fasteners are closed.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
Seite 340
MOBILITY
Vehicle Care
340
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Clean extensively down to the seams. Avoid
rubbing the material vigorously.
Textile care
Use a microfiber cloth for cleaning minor con-
tamination.
Dampen the cloth with water.
Caring for special components
Displays, operating elements, and
protective glass of the Head-up
display
NOTICE
Surfaces can be damaged by improper
cleaning, e.g., by using chemical cleaners, or
from moisture or liquid of any kind. Physical
damage to the material is possible.
▷ Avoid pressure that is too high and do
not use any scratching materials.
▷ Use a dry, clean antistatic microfiber
cloth for cleaning displays.
▷ Clean the operating elements and, de-
pending on vehicle equipment, the pro-
tective glass of the Head-up display with
a damp microfiber cloth and standard
household dish soap.
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral rim
cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not
use abrasive cleaning agents or steam clean-
ers above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac-
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective coating of adjacent
components, such as the brake disk.
After cleaning, apply the brakes shortly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
brake disks and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean Chrome surfaces, especially in
case of exposure to road salt, with plenty of
water and added auto shampoo as needed.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
contamination of rubber parts and a loss of
gloss. Use only water and suitable cleaning
agents for cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care products at regular intervals. When clean-
ing rubber seals, do not use any silicon-con-
taining vehicle care products in order to avoid
damage or noises.
Wiper blades
The wiper blades are cleaned by using the
washer system.
Avoid cleaning the wiper blades manually, as
this may reduce wiper performance.
Fine wood parts
Clean the fine wood veneer and fine wood
components with a damp cloth. Then dry with
a soft cloth.
Kenaf
Only treat parts made of Kenaf fibers using a
suitable care product.
Plastic components
NOTICE
Solvent cleaners that contain alcohol or sol-
vents, such as lacquer thinners, cold cleaning
agents, fuel and such, can damage plastic
parts. There is a risk of damage to property.
Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the
cloth lightly with water, if needed.
Do not soak the headliner.
Seite 341
Vehicle Care
MOBILITY
341
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Seat belts
Warning
Chemical solvent cleaners can destroy the
seat belt fabric. Missing protective effect of
the seat belts. There is a risk of injury or dan-
ger to life. Use only a mild soap solution for
cleaning the seat belts.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soap solution for cleaning the
installed belt straps.
Seat belts should only be allowed to retract if
they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
Warning
Objects in the driver's footwell can limit the
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
vehicle such that they are secured and can-
not enter into the driver's footwell. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not
use loose floor mats and do not layer several
floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient
clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor
mats are securely fastened again after they
were removed, for instance for cleaning.
The floor mats can be removed from the inte-
rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very contaminated,
clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a
textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the car-
pet, rub back and forth in the driving direction
only.
Sensors and camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Taking the vehicle out of service
When the vehicle is shut down for longer
than three months, special measures must
be taken. For more information, contact an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 342
MOBILITY
Vehicle Care
342
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
General information
The technical data and specifications in the
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
Vehicle-specific data may deviate from this,
for instance due to the optional equipment
chosen, national-market version, or country-
specific measuring process. More specific val-
ues can be obtained in approval documents,
on the vehicle info label, or from an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment version or country-
specific measurement procedure.
The height of the vehicle can also differ, e.g.,
due to tires and vehicle load.
BMW 4 Series Coupe
Width with mirrors in/mm 81.9/2,081
Width without mirrors in/mm 72.9/1,852
Height in/mm 54.8/1,393
Length in/mm 188/4,775
Wheelbase in/mm 112.2/2,851
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 39.4/12.0
Weights
430i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,475/2,030
Payload lbs/kg 723/328
Seite 344
REFERENCE
Technical data
344
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
430i
Approved front axle weight lbs/kg 2,216/1,005
Approved rear axle weight lbs/kg 2,469/1,120
M440i powered by BMW M
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,828/2,190
Payload lbs/kg 899/408
Approved front axle weight lbs/kg 2,414/1,095
Approved rear axle weight lbs/kg 2,601/1,180
430i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,619/2,095
Payload lbs/kg 736/334
Approved front axle weight lbs/kg 2,326/1,055
Approved rear axle weight lbs/kg 2,491/1,130
M440i xDrive powered by BMW M
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,949/2,245
Payload lbs/kg 902/409
Approved front axle weight lbs/kg 2,502/1,135
Approved rear axle weight lbs/kg 2,624/1,190
Filling capacities
BMW 4 Series Coupe
Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 15.6/59.0
Observe further information on fuel quality, re-
fer to page 318.
Seite 345
Technical data
REFERENCE
345
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Appendix
General information
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve-
hicle are listed here.
Updates made after the
editorial deadline
The following chapters were updated in the
printed version of the Owner's Manual after
the editorial deadline for the Integrated Own-
er's Manual in the vehicle had closed:
▷ Operation: Light: Cornering light: General.
▷ Driving tips: Things to remember when
driving: Break-in procedure: Brake system.
Seite 346
REFERENCE
Appendix
346
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Everything from A to Z
Index
0-9
3D view 230
48V technology, see Mild Hybrid technol-
ogy 329
A
ABS, see Antilock Braking System 194
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 124
Acceleration sensor, see G-Meter 152
Accessories and parts 9
Accident Assistance, see BMW Accident Assis-
tance 332
Accident prevention, see Active Protection 191
ACC, see Cruise Control with Distance Con-
trol 205
Activated carbon filter, see Interior filter 251
Activation points, panorama view 230
Activation word 52
Active Blind Spot Detection 180
Active Cruise Control 205
Active damping control, see Adaptive M chas-
sis/suspension 243
Active Guard, see Collision warning sys-
tems 168
Active M Sport differential 197
Active Park Distance Control 236
Active Protection 191
Active seat ventilation 250
Adaptive Light Control 159
Adaptive lighting functions 159
Adaptive M chassis/suspension 243
Adaptive recuperation 278
Adding engine oil types 321
Additional camera view displays 226
Additives, engine oil types 321
Adjustments, steering wheel 110
After run of fan, see Exhaust gas particulate
filter 271
Airbags
165
Airbags, indicator and warning light 167
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 248
Air conditioning, climate 248
Air distribution, manual 249
Air drying, see air conditioning 248
Air flow, automatic climate control 249
Air outlets, see Ventilation 251
Air pressure, tires 284
Air quality 251
Air vent, see Ventilation 251
Alarm system 91
Alarm, unintentional 93
All-season tires, see Winter tires 294
All-season tires, tread 292
All-wheel drive, see BMW xDrive 197
Amazon Alexa Car Integration 55
Ambient light 163
Android Auto, see Owner’s Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 323
Antilock Braking System 194
Anti-theft protection, lug bolt lock 312
Apple CarPlay, see Owner’s Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Applications see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Applications, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Apps, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
tertainment, Communication 6
Aquaplaning 272
Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off as-
sistant 194
Assistance with breakdown 331
Assisted Driving Mode Plus 218
Assisted Driving Mode, see Steering Assis-
tant 215
Assisted View 151
Seite 348
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
348
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Audio player, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
tertainment and Communication 6
Authorized service center, see BMW Accident
Assistance 332
Authorized service center, see BMW Roadside
Assistance 331
AUTO H button, see Automatic Hold 128
Automatic activation of panorama view 230
Automatic camera perspective 228
Automatic climate control 244
Automatic control, headlight 156
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 109
Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger
airbags 167
Automatic dimming, see Automatic High Beam
Assistant 160
Automatic headlight control 156
Automatic High Beam Assistant 160
Automatic Hold 128
Automatic Lane Change Assistant 220
Automatic locking 90
Automatic Parking Assistant 237
Automatic program, automatic climate con-
trol 246
Automatic time setting 152
Automatic transmission, see Steptronic trans-
mission 120
Automatic unlocking 90
Automating routines, BMW Intelligent Personal
Assistant 55
AUTO program, automatic climate control 246
Auto Start/Stop function 118
Average consumption, see Trip data 150
Axle loads, approved 344
B
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 102
Backrest, seats 99
Backrest tilt 101
Backrest width 102
Back-up Assistant 241
Bandages, see First-aid kit 331
Bar for tow-starting/towing 336
Battery, disposing of
330
Battery, vehicle 328
Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 335
Belt carrier 105
Belts, see Seat belts 104
Blind spot collision warning 180
Blower 249
Bluetooth audio, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Bluetooth connection, see Owner’s Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
BMW Accident Assistance 332
BMW app, see Owner’s Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 6
BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
BMW Curved Display 46
BMW Digital Key 86
BMW display key 72
BMW display key, malfunction 76
BMW Drive Recorder 189
BMW IconicSounds 243
BMW ID 63
BMW iDrive 43
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 51
BMW Live Cockpit Plus, see BMW Curved Dis-
play 46
BMW Live Cockpit Professional, see BMW
Curved Display 46
BMW maintenance system 325
BMW Operating System, see BMW iDrive 43
BMW Roadside Assistance 331
BMW SIM Reader, see Owner’s Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
BMW Theater Screen, see Owner’s Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
BMW xDrive 197
Bottle holder, front, see Cup holder, front 264
Bottle holder, rear, see Cup holder, rear 264
Brake assistant 194
Brake disks, break-in 270
Brake disks, see Brake system 270
Brake pads, break-in 270
Brake pads, see Brake system 270
Brake system 270
Braking, information 273
Seite 349
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
349
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Breakdown assistance 331
Break-in 270
Break recommendation, see Fatigue alert 192
Brightness, control display 47
button AUTO H, see Automatic Hold 128
Button, central locking system 88
Buttons on the steering wheel 30
Button, SOS, see Intelligent emergency
call 333
Button, Start/Stop 118
Bypassing, see Jump-starting 334
C
Cable for tow-starting/towing 336
Calendar day, see Date 152
Calibration of the front seats 103
California Proposition 65 Warning 9
Camera cleaning 342
Camera, instrument cluster, see Driver Atten-
tion Camera 193
Camera lenses, care 342
Camera perspective, automatic 228
Camera, rearview camera 228
Cameras, see Sensors of the vehicle 35
Camera view assistance lines 226
CANCEL button, Active Cruise Control 205
CANCEL button, Cruise Control 202
Can holder, front, see Cup holder, front 264
Can holder, rear, see Cup holder, rear 264
Care 338
Care, displays, screens 341
Care, Head-up display 341
Care, light-alloy wheels 341
Care, vehicle 339
Cargo 266
Cargo area 266
Cargo area, enlarging 268
Cargo area, securing, see Valet parking
mode 89
Cargo, stowing and securing 267
Cargo straps, see Lashing eyes in the cargo
area 267
Car key, see Vehicle key 69
Carpet, care 342
Car seats, see Transporting children safely 113
Car wash
338
Car wash, automatic 338
Car wash view 230
Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys-
tem 271
CBS, see Condition Based Service 325
Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Center armrest, front 263
Center console 33
Central display area, instrument cluster 149
Central Information Display (CID), see Control
display 46
Central locking switch, see Central locking sys-
tem 88
Central locking system 88
Central screen, see Control display 46
Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 8
Change, wheels and tires 293
Changing parts 327
Changing wheels 310
Charging cradle 260
Charging smartphone, see Wireless charging
tray 260
Charging tray for smartphones, see Wireless
charging tray 260
Chassis/suspension, electronic, see Adaptive
M chassis/suspension 243
Chassis number, see Vehicle identification
number 13
Check Control 145
Checking the engine oil level electronically 320
Children, seating position 113
Children, transporting safely 113
Child restraint seats 113
Child restraint systems, mounting 114
Child restraint systems, see Transporting chil-
dren safely 113
Child seat installation 114
Child seat, mounting 114
Child seat mountings LATCH 115
Child seats, see Transporting children
safely 113
Chrome-plated surfaces, care 341
Chrome surfaces, care 341
Cleaning, displays, screens 341
Seite 350
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
350
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Cleaning, Head-up display 341
Cleaning the camera 342
Climate comfort windshield 272
Climate control 244
Closing with the Key Card 84
Closing with the smartphone, see BMW Digital
Key 86
Clothes hooks 265
Coasting 279
Coasting with idling engine 279
Coat hooks 265
Collision warning systems 168
Comfort Access 79
COMFORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 125
Communication, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment and Communication 6
Comparison of entries, see Entry compari-
son 45
Compartments in the doors 263
Compressor 296
Condensation water under the parked vehi-
cle 274
Condensation, windshield 250
Condition Based Service 325
Confirmation signal from the vehicle 90
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment and Communication 6
ConnectedDrive services, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Communi-
cation 6
Connected Music, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle 56
Connection, electrical devices, see Sock-
ets 258
Consumption, see Trip data 150
Contactless operation of the trunk lid 83
Contacts, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 6
Continued driving with a flat tire, see Tire Pres-
sure Monitor 300
Continued driving with flat tire, see Flat tire
monitor 308
Control display 46
Control display, brightness 47
Control display, pop-ups 45
Controller
47
Control systems, driving stability 194
Convoy Assistant, see Assisted Driving Mode
Plus 218
Coolant 322
Coolant level 323
Coolant temperature, see Engine tempera-
ture 148
Cooling, maximum 248
Cooling system 322
Cornering light 159
Corrosion, brake disks 273
Cosmetic mirror 258
Cross Traffic Warning 186
Cruise Control, see Cruise Control with Dis-
tance Control 205
Cruise Control with Distance Control 205
Cruise Control without Distance Control 202
Cruising range 153
Cup holder, front 264
Cup holder, rear 264
Current driving condition 154
Curved Display 46
D
Damage, tires 292
Damping control active, see Adaptive M chas-
sis/suspension 243
Dashboard 30
Dashboard, see Instrument cluster 135
Dashcam, see BMW Drive Recorder 189
Data memory 10
Data protection, settings 62
Data, see Personal data, deleting 62
Data, technical 344
Date 152
Daytime driving lights 159
Daytime running lights 159
DCC, see Cruise Control without Distance Con-
trol 202
Defrost function 250
Defrost, windshield 250
Deleting, personal data 62
Departure schedule, see Pre-ventilation 252
Seite 351
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
351
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Departure time, preconditioning via Remote
Engine Start 254
Departure time, pre-ventilation 252
Destination input 6
Diagnostic connection 326
Diagnostic socket 326
Differential lock 197
Digital Key 86
Digital Key, see BMW Digital Key 86
Dimensions 344
Dimmable exterior mirrors 109
Dimmable interior mirror 110
Direct dial buttons, see Shortcuts 46
Display and operating concept, see BMW
iDrive 43
Display, current driving condition 154
Display, iDrive 45
Display in the windshield, see Head-up dis-
play 137
Display key 72
Display key, malfunction 76
Display key, see BMW display key 72
Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 162
Display panel, see Instrument cluster 135
Displays 135
Displays and icons 7
Displays for the vehicle, see Live Vehicle 136
Display, speed limiting function, see Speed
Limit Info 198
Display SPRINT 125
Disposal, coolant 323
Disposal, vehicle battery 330
Distance Control, see Cruise Control 205
Distance Warning, see Park Distance Con-
trol 233
Door handle lighting, see Welcome lights 158
Door opening angle 232
Drive-off assistant 194
Drive-off assistant, see Dynamic Stability Con-
trol 195
Drive power reduced 147
Driver activity, see Driver Attention Camera 193
Driver Assistance, parking, see Parking assis-
tance systems 223
Driver assistance systems 198
Driver Attention Camera 193
Drive-ready state, engine start
41
Drive-ready state, see Operating condition of
the vehicle 40
Drive Recorder 189
Driver profiles 63
Driver profiles, welcome screen 63
Drive sound, see BMW IconicSounds 243
Driving 118
Driving Assistant, see Collision warning sys-
tems 168
Driving comfort 243
Driving condition, display 154
Driving Dynamics Control 125
Driving mode, see Driving Dynamics Con-
trol 125
Driving notes, break-in 270
Driving notes, general 271
Driving stability control systems 194
Driving, Start/Stop button 118
Driving style analysis, ECO PRO 278
Driving through water 272
Driving tips, see General driving notes 271
DSC, see Dynamic Stability Control 195
DTC, see Dynamic Traction Control 196
Dynamic Cruise Control, see Cruise Con-
trol 202
Dynamic damping, see Adaptive M chas-
sis/suspension 243
Dynamic Stability Control 195
Dynamic Traction Control 196
E
ECO PRO, driving style analysis 278
ECO PRO, see Driving Dynamics Control 125
Efficient rolling, see Current driving condi-
tion 154
Electronic oil measurement 320
Electronic Stability Program ESP, see Dynamic
Stability Control 195
Emergency brake, see Emergency Stop Assis-
tant 185
Emergency braking, see PostCrash –
iBrake 191
Emergency call 333
Emergency Stop Assistant 185
Seite 352
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
352
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 123
Emergency unlocking, trunk lid 84
Energy savings, see Gear shift indicator 146
Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 118
Engine compartment 315
Engine coolant 322
Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 279
Engine oil filler neck 321
Engine oil, topping up 321
Engine oil types to add 321
Engine sound, see BMW IconicSounds 243
Engine start, see Drive-ready state 41
Engine start, see Jump-starting 334
Engine stopping, see Drive-ready state 41
Engine temperature 148
Entering a destination, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment and Communication 6
Entertainment, selection list in the instrument
cluster 146
Entry comparison 45
Equipment, interior 256
Error indicators, see Check Control 145
eSIM telephony, see Owner’s Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
ESP Electronic Stability Program, see Dynamic
Stability Control 195
Evasion Assistant, see Forward Collision Miti-
gation 170
Exchange, wheels and tires 293
Exhaust gas particulate filter 271
Exhaust gas system 271
Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 271
Exterior lighting, locked vehicle 158
Exterior mirror 108
Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 109
Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 109
External start, see Jump-starting 334
Eyelet for towing 337
Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 267
F
Factory settings, see Vehicle data, resetting 62
Failure message, see Check Control 145
Fan after run, see Exhaust gas particulate fil-
ter 271
Fan, see Air flow 249
Fastening seat belts, see Seat belts 104
Fatigue Alert 192
Fatigue Alert, see Driver Attention Camera 193
Fatigue warner, see Fatigue Alert 192
Fault indicators, see Check Control 145
Filler neck for engine oil 321
Filter, see Interior filter 251
Fine wood parts, care 341
First-aid kit 331
Flat tire, changing wheels 310
Flat tire, continued driving, see Flat tire moni-
tor 308
Flat tire, continued driving, see Tire Pressure
Monitor 300
Flat tire message, see Flat tire monitor 308
Flat tire message, see Tire Pressure Moni-
tor 304
Flat tire monitor 308
Flat tire, repairing 296
Flat tire, see Flat tire monitor 308
Flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor 300
Flat tire warning light, see Flat tire moni-
tor 308
Flat tire warning light, see Tire Pressure Moni-
tor 304
Floods, driving through 272
Floor carpet, care 342
Floor mats, care 342
Fold-away position, wiper 133
Fold-out position 133
Foot brake 273
Forward Collision Mitigation 170
Forward Collision Warning, see Forward Colli-
sion Warning 170
For Your Own Safety 8
Front airbags 165
Front fog lights 162
Front lights, replacing, see Lights and
bulbs 327
Seite 353
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
353
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Front passenger's side exterior mirror, tilting
down, see Automatic Curb Monitor 109
Front passenger airbags, automatic deactiva-
tion 167
Front-seat passenger airbag, indicator
light 168
Front seats 99
Fuel 318
Fuel filler cap 282
Fuel filler flap 282
Fuel filler flap, emergency unlocking 283
Fuel filler flap, manual operation 283
Fuel filler flap, unlocking manually 283
Fuel gauge 153
Fuel quality 318
Fuel recommendation 318
Fuel tank, see Filling capacity 345
Fuses 330
G
Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal
Remote Control 256
Gasoline 318
Gasoline particulate filter, see Exhaust gas
particulate filter 271
Gasoline quality 319
Gear change, Steptronic transmission 120
General driving notes 271
Glare shield, see Sun visor 258
Glass sunroof 95
Glass sunroof, initialize the system 98
Glove compartment 262
G-Meter 152
GPS navigation, navigation, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
munication 6
Gross vehicle weight, approved 344
Guest profile, see BMW ID 63
H
Handbrake, see Parking brake 127
Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 257
Hands-free device, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Hands-free system
6
Hazard warning system 331
Head airbag 166
Headlight control, automatic 156
Headlight flasher 130
Headlight glass 328
Headlights, care 339
Headlights, replacing, see Lights and
bulbs 327
Headlights, turning up, dimming, see Auto-
matic High Beam Assistant 160
Headliner 34
Head restraints and seats 99
Head restraints, front 106
Head-up display 137
Head-up display, care 341
Head-up display, position, saving see Memory
function 111
Heated steering wheel 111
Heavy cargo, stowing 267
Height, vehicle 344
High beams 130
Hills 273
Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 194
Holder for beverages, front 264
Holder for beverages, rear 264
HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote
Control 256
Homepage, see Internet 7
Hood 315
Horn 30
Hotel function, see Valet parking mode 89
Hot exhaust gas system 271
Hour, see Time 152
I
iBrake – PostCrash 191
Ice, see Outside temperature 148
Ice warning, see Outside temperature 148
IconicSounds 243
Icons and displays 7
Identification marks, tires 290
Identification number, see Vehicle identification
number 13
iDrive 43
Seite 354
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
354
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
ID transmitter, see Vehicle key 69
Ignition key, see Vehicle key 69
Inclination 101
Indicator light, front-seat passenger airbag 168
Indicator lights 138
Individual air distribution 249
Individual settings, see BMW ID 63
Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wireless
charging tray 260
Information 6
Information on Driver Assistance, displaying,
see Assisted View 151
Initialization, see flat tire monitor 308
Input, iDrive 45
Installation of child restraint systems 114
Instrument cluster 135
Instrument lighting 162
Instrument panel, see Instrument cluster 135
Integrated key 70
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 6
Integrated Universal Remote Control 256
Intelligent emergency call 333
Intelligent Personal Assistant 51
Intended use 8
Interior equipment 256
Interior filter 251
Interior lights 163
Interior lights, locked vehicle 158
Interior mirror 110
Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 110
Interior mirror, manually dimmable 110
Interior motion sensor 92
Internet page 7
Intersection Collision Warning, see Forward
Collision Mitigation 170
Interval indicator, see Service notifications 155
J
Jacking points 313
Jacking points for the vehicle jack 313
Jam protection system, glass sunroof 97
Jam protection system, windows 95
Journey data 150
Joystick, Steptronic transmission 120
Jump-starting 334
Jump-starting terminals
335
Jump-start terminals 335
K
Kenaf, care 341
Key Card 84
Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 79
Key, mechanical 70
Key, see BMW display key 72
Key, see Vehicle key 69
Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 120
Knee airbag 166
L
Labeling 290
Label on recommended tires 294
Lane boundary 177
Lane change assistant 220
Lane departure warning 177
Lane Keeping Assistant, see Steering Assis-
tant 215
Lane Keeping Assistant with active side col-
lision protection, see Side Collision Warn-
ing 183
Lane lines, additional camera view dis-
plays 226
Lane threshold, warning 177
Language, setting 53
Laser headlights, changing, see Lights and
bulbs 327
Laser high beams 161
Lashing eyes in the cargo area 267
LATCH child seat mountings 115
Lateral Parking Aid 228
Launch Control 124
Leather care 340
LED headlights, changing, see Lights and
bulbs 327
Length, vehicle 344
Letters and numbers, entering 45
Light-alloy wheels, care 341
Light carpet, see Welcome Light Carpet 158
Light control, adaptive 159
Seite 355
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
355
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Light in exterior mirror, see Active Blind Spot
Detection 180
Light in exterior mirror, see Cross Traffic Warn-
ing 186
Lighting 156
Light replacement, see Lights and bulbs 327
Lights 156
Lights and bulbs 327
Lights, care 339
Light switch 156
LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 200
List, instrument cluster, see Selection lists 146
Live Cockpit Plus, see BMW Curved Display 46
Live Cockpit Professional, see BMW Curved
Display 46
Live Vehicle 136
Load 267
Loading 266
Loading the cargo area, see Stowing
cargo 267
Local time, see Time 152
Locking, automatic 90
Locking, see Opening and Closing 69
Locking, settings 90
Locking the rear automatic climate control 246
Lock, lug bolts 312
Loop 337
Low beams, operation 157
Lower back support, see Lumbar support 102
Lug bolt lock 312
Luggage rack, refer to Roof bars 274
Luggage straps 267
Lumbar support 102
M
Maintenance 325
Maintenance recommendation, see Condition
Based Service 325
Maintenance, see Service notifications 155
Maintenance system, BMW 325
Make-up mirror 258
Malfunction, BMW display key 76
Malfunction, vehicle key 72
Manual brake, see Parking brake 127
Manual control, air distribution 249
Manual control, air flow
249
Manually unlocking doors, see Integrated
key 70
Manual mode, transmission 123
Manual Speed Limiter 200
Map, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
tertainment, Communication 6
Map update, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Marking, run-flat tire 295
Matte paintwork 340
Matt paint, care 340
Maximum cooling 248
Maximum speed, display, see Speed Limit
Info 198
Maximum speed, winter tires 294
M chassis/suspension, adaptive, see Adaptive
M chassis/suspension 243
Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 331
Memory function 111
Messages, see Check Control 145
Messages, see Owner’s Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Meters, see Instrument cluster 135
Microfilter, see Interior filter 251
Mild Hybrid technology 329
Minimum tread depth, tires 292
Mirror position, saving, see Memory func-
tion 111
Mobile devices, connecting 56
Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment and Communication 6
Mobile radio in the vehicle 272
Mobile Service, see BMW Accident Assis-
tance 332
Mobile Service, see BMW Roadside Assis-
tance 331
Mobility System, see Tire repair set 296
MODE button, see Active Cruise Control 205
Modifications, technical, see For Your Own
Safety 8
Moisture in headlight, see Headlight glass 328
Monitor, see Control display 46
Mounting of child restraint systems 114
MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Seite 356
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
356
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
M Sport differential 197
Multifunction hook 267
Multi-function steering wheel 30
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 30
My BMW app, see Owner’s Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
N
Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints,
front 106
Net, cargo area 268
Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels,
care 341
Notifications, see Owner’s Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 336
O
OBD, see On-board diagnosis 326
Obstacle marking, additional camera view dis-
plays 226
Octane number, see Gasoline quality 319
Odometer, see Trip data 150
OFF display, instrument cluster, see Standby
and Drive-ready state 148
Oil filler neck 321
Oil level, checking electronically 320
Oil service interval, see Service notifica-
tions 155
Oil, topping up 321
Oil types to add, engine 321
Old battery 330
On-board computer, see Trip data 150
On-board diagnosis 326
Onboard vehicle tool kit 327
On-call service, see BMW Accident Assis-
tance 332
On-call service, see BMW Roadside Assis-
tance 331
Opening and closing 69
Opening with the Key Card 84
Opening with the smartphone, see BMW Digi-
tal Key 86
Operating condition of the vehicle 40
Operating principle, see BMW iDrive
43
Operating system, see BMW iDrive 43
Operating temperature, see Engine tempera-
ture 148
Operation via voice 51
Optional equipment, see Vehicle equipment 8
Outside temperature 148
Overheating of the engine, see Engine temper-
ature 148
Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor-
age 342
Owner's Manual via voice operation, BMW In-
telligent Personal Assistant 53
P
Paint, vehicle care 340
Paintwork 340
Panic alarm, see Panic mode 92
Panic mode 92
Panorama View 230
Panorama View, see Panorama View 230
Panoramic display, see Owner’s Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Panoramic glass sunroof, see Glass sun-
roof 95
Park Distance Control 233
Parking assistance lines, additional camera
view displays 226
Parking assistance systems 223
Parking assistant 237
Parking Assistant Plus, see Parking assistance
systems 223
Parking Assistant, see Park Distance Con-
trol 233
Parking Assistant, see Parking assistance sys-
tems 223
Parking brake 127
Parking brake function, see Active Park Dis-
tance Control 236
Parking lights 157
Parking with Automatic Hold 128
Particulate filter, see Exhaust gas particulate
filter 271
Parts and accessories 9
Pathway lighting 158
Seite 357
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
357
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Pathway lighting, turning on 158
Payload 267
Payload, technical data 344
PDC, see Park Distance Control 233
Pedestrian Warning, see Forward Collision Mit-
igation 170
Performance display, see Sport displays 154
Personal Assistant 51
Personal data, deleting 62
Personal eSIM, see Owner’s Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Personal hotspot, see Owner’s Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Personal profile, see BMW ID 63
Personal settings 62
Physical units, see Units of measurement, set-
ting 153
Plastic parts, care 341
Pop-ups, control display 45
PostCrash – iBrake 191
Power Display, instrument cluster 147
Power failure 329
Power interruption 329
Power Meter, see Power Display 147
Power windows 93
Pre-conditioning 253
Pressure monitor, tire, see Tire Pressure Moni-
tor 300
Pressure, tires 284
Pressure warning, see Flat tire monitor 308
Pressure warning, see Tire Pressure Moni-
tor 300
Pre-ventilation 252
Prevention of rear-end collision, see Rear-end
collision preparation 184
Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam
protection system 97
Protective function, windows, see Jam protec-
tion system 95
Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 47
R
Racing track 275
Radar sensors, see Sensors of the vehicle 35
Radiator fan, see Exhaust gas particulate fil-
ter 271
Radiator fluid 322
Radio information, see Owner’s Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
tertainment and Communication 6
Radio stations, see Owner’s Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Rain sensor 132
READY display, instrument cluster, see
Standby and Drive-ready state 148
Real Time Traffic Information, see Owner’s
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
munication 6
Rear automatic climate control 244
Rear automatic climate control, locking operat-
ing elements 246
Rear-end collision preparation 184
Rear lights, replacing, see Lights and
bulbs 327
Rear seat backrests, folding down 268
Rearview camera 228
Rear-view mirror, exterior 108
Rearview mirror, interior 110
Rear window defroster 250
Recirculated-air mode 248
Recirculating air filter, see Interior filter 251
Recommended tire brands 294
Recuperation, adaptive 278
Reduced drive power 147
Refueling 282
Remote 3D View 232
Remote control, see Vehicle key 69
Remote control, universal 256
Remote Engine Start, see Stationary climate
control 253
Remote services, see Owner's Manual for Nav-
igation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Remote Software Upgrade 58
Renewal, wheels and tires 293
Replace battery, vehicle key 70
Replacement, wheels and tires 293
Replacing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 327
Replacing light diodes, see Lights and
bulbs 327
Seite 358
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
358
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Replacing parts 327
Reporting safety malfunctions 14
RES CNCL button, Active Cruise Control 205
RES CNCL button, Cruise Control 202
Reserve warning, see Range 153
Reservoir, washer fluid 323
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor 303
Reset, vehicle settings 62
Restricted Driving, see BMW Digital Key 86
RESUME button, Active Cruise Control 205
RESUME button, Cruise Control 202
Retreaded tires 294
Reversing Assistant 241
Roadside Assistance, see BMW Roadside As-
sistance 331
Roadside parking lights 157
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 257
Rolling to a stop with engine decoupled, see
Coasting 279
RON, see gasoline quality 319
Roof bars 274
Roofliner 34
Roof luggage rack, refer to Roof bars 274
Rope for tow-starting/towing 336
Route, navigation, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
RSC, see Runflat tires 295
Rubber components, care 341
Runflat tires 295
Runflat tires, see Runflat tires 295
S
Safe braking 273
Safe Share function, see BMW Digital Key 86
Safety and warning, see Collision warning sys-
tems 168
Safety package, see Active Protection 191
Safety systems, see Airbags 165
Safety systems, see Collision warning sys-
tems 168
Satellite radio, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Saved stations, see Owner’s Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Screen, see BMW Curved Display 46
Screen, see Control display
46
Sealing compound, see Tire repair set 296
Seat-belt extender 105
Seat belt reminder, see Seat belt warning 106
Seat belts 104
Seat belts, care 342
Seat belt warning 106
Seat calibration 103
Seat heating 250
Seating position for children 113
Seat position, saving, see Memory function 111
Seats and head restraints 99
Seats, front 99
Seat ventilation, active 250
Securing, cargo 267
Selection list on the instrument cluster 146
Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 120
Sensors, care 342
Sensors of the vehicle 35
Service and warranty 10
Service notifications 155
Service notifications, see Condition Based
Service 325
SET button, Active Cruise Control 205
SET button, Cruise Control 202
Set clock 152
Set day, see Date 152
Set time, see Time 152
Setting, control display 47
Settings, locking/unlocking 90
Settings, resetting, vehicle 62
Settings, seats and head restraints 99
Shift lights 149
Shift paddles on the steering wheel 123
Shift point display 146
Shift point indicator, tachometer 149
Shift recommendation for fuel-efficient driving,
see Shift point display 146
Shortcuts, iDrive 46
Side airbag 165
Side Collision Warning 183
Side protection, see Automatic camera per-
spective 228
Side view 229
Signaling, horn 30
Seite 359
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
359
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Signals when unlocking, see Confirmation sig-
nals from the vehicle 90
SIM Reader, see Owner’s Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Sitting safely 99
Sleep mode, see Operating condition of the
vehicle 40
Slipperiness, see Outside temperature 148
Slippery road, see Outside temperature 148
Smallest turning circle, vehicle 344
Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Smartphone, using via voice control 55
Snow chains 300
Sockets, electrical devices 258
Software Update, see Remote Software Up-
grade 58
Software Upgrade, see Remote Software Up-
grade 58
Soot particulate filter, see Exhaust gas particu-
late filter 271
SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 333
Sound settings, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Sound system, see Owner’s Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Speed control, see Cruise Control 202
Speed Limit Assist 212
Speed Limit Assistant 212
Speed Limit Device, Speed Limiter 200
Speed limit, display, see Speed Limit Info 198
Speed Limit Info 198
Speed warning 198
Sport chassis/suspension, see Adaptive M
chassis/suspension 243
Sport differential 197
Sport displays 154
Sport program, transmission 120
SPORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 125
Sport steering, variable 197
Sprint function 125
Stability control systems 194
Standard equipment, see Vehicle equipment 8
Standby, see Operating condition of the vehi-
cle 40
Start/stop, automatic function 118
Start/Stop button
118
Starting aid terminals 335
Starting, see Drive-ready state 41
Starting the engine, see Drive-ready state 41
Starting the engine with the Key Card 84
Stationary climate control via Remote Engine
Start 253
Stations, see Owner’s Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 6
Status control display, tires 302
Status information, iDrive 44
Status of Owner's Manual 8
Status, vehicle 153
Steering Assistant 215
Steering column adjustment 110
Steering wheel, adjusting 110
Steering wheel, buttons 30
Steering wheel heating 111
Steering wheel position, saving, see Memory
function 111
Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic
transmission 120
Steptronic transmission 120
Stopping the engine, see Drive-ready state 41
Storage compartment, cargo area 268
Storage compartment, center console 263
Storage compartments 262
Storage, tires 295
Storing the vehicle 342
Stowing, cargo 267
Straps for cargo, see Lashing eyes in the cargo
area 267
Summer tires, tread 292
Sun visor 258
Supplementary Owner's Handbooks 7
Supplementary Owner's Manuals 7
Suspension settings, see Driving Dynamics
Control 125
Switches, see Dashboard 30
Switch for driving dynamics, see Driving Dy-
namics Control 125
SYNC program, automatic climate control 249
System language, setting, see Language, set-
ting 53
Seite 360
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
360
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
T
Tachometer 147
Tail light, changing, see Lights and bulbs 327
Taking the vehicle out of service 342
Tank capacity 345
Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 8
Technical data 344
Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Telephone, selection list in the instrument
cluster 146
Teleservices, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Temperature, automatic climate control 247
Temperature display, see outside tempera-
ture 148
Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 91
Thigh support 102
Tilt alarm sensor 92
Tilt, backrest 101
Tilting down, front passenger's side exterior
mirror, see Automatic Curb Monitor 109
Time 152
Time of day, see Time 152
Time setting, automatic 152
Time zone 152
Tire brands, recommended 294
Tire change 293
Tire damage 292
Tire identification marks 290
Tire inflation pressure 284
Tire marking 290
Tire pressure 284
Tire Pressure Monitor 300
Tire pressure monitoring, see Flat tire moni-
tor 308
Tire Pressure Monitor, reset 303
Tire pressure, tires 284
Tire pressure warning, see Flat tire moni-
tor 308
Tire repair set 296
Tires and wheels 284
Tire sealant, see Tire repair set 296
Tire settings 301
Tires, run-flat 295
Tire tread
292
Tools 327
Torque display, see Sport displays 154
Touchpad, Controller 49
Tow bar 336
Tow fitting 337
Towing 335
Tow rope 336
Tow-starting 335
Traction Control 196
Traction control system, see Dynamic Stability
Control 195
TRACTION, driving dynamics 196
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Traffic bulletins, see Owner’s Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Traffic Jam Assistant, see Assisted Driving
Mode Plus 218
Traffic jam assistant, see Steering and Lane
Control Assistant 215
Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 123
Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 120
Transporting children safely 113
Tread, tires 292
Trip data 150
Triple turn signal activation 130
Trip odometer, see Trip data 150
Trunk, emergency unlocking 84
Trunk lid, contactless operation 83
Trunk lid, emergency unlocking 84
Trunk, see Cargo area 266
Turn indicators, see Turn signals 130
Turning circle lines, additional camera view
displays 226
Turning circle, vehicle 344
Turn signal, indicator light 142
Turn signal, replacing bulbs, see Lights and
bulbs 327
Turn signals, operation 130
U
Ultrasonic sensors, see Sensors of the vehi-
cle 35
Unintentional alarm, avoiding 93
Seite 361
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
361
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Units of measurement, setting 153
Units, see Units of measurement, setting 153
Universal remote control 256
Unlocking, automatic 90
Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 69
Unlocking, settings 90
Updates made after the editorial deadline 8
Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 58
Upholstery material care 340
Upper retaining strap, top tether 116
USB audio, see Owner’s Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
USB port, position in vehicle 259
Used battery, disposing of 330
Use, intended 8
Using menus, see BMW iDrive 43
V
Valet parking mode 89
Vanity mirror 258
Variable sport steering 197
Vehicle battery 328
Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis-
tance 331
Vehicle, break-in 270
Vehicle care 339
Vehicle care products 339
Vehicle data, resetting 62
Vehicle equipment 8
Vehicle identification number 13
Vehicle issues 331
Vehicle key 69
Vehicle key, additional 69
Vehicle key, integrated key 70
Vehicle key, loss 70
Vehicle key, malfunction 72
Vehicle key, replace battery 70
Vehicle key with display, malfunction 76
Vehicle key with display, see BMW display
key 72
Vehicle laminated glass 272
Vehicle paint, care 340
Vehicle paintwork 340
Vehicle status 153
Vehicle storage 342
Ventilation
251
Ventilation, see Pre-ventilation 252
Venting, see Ventilation 251
Version Software, see Remote Software Up-
grade 58
Video recording, see BMW Drive Recorder 189
Video, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
tertainment and Communication 6
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 13
Voice activation system 51
Voice control 51
Voice control, see BMW Intelligent Personal
Assistant 51
Voice recognition 51
Volume, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 6
W
Wake word 52
Warning for crossing traffic 186
Warning function, rear-end collision 184
Warning light in exterior mirror, see Active
Blind Spot Detection 180
Warning light in exterior mirror, see Cross Traf-
fic Warning 186
Warning lights 138
Warning messages, see Check Control 145
Warning systems for collision hazards 168
Warning triangle 331
Warranty 9
Warranty Booklet, see Warranty 9
Washer fluid 323
Washing the vehicle 338
Washing, vehicle 338
Water on roads 272
Water, see Condensation water under the
parked vehicle 274
Web page 7
Website, see Internet 7
Weights 344
Welcome Light Carpet, see Welcome light 158
Welcome lights 158
Welcome screen, driver profiles 63
Wheelbase 344
Wheel base, vehicle 344
Seite 362
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
362
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Wheel change 310
Wheels and tires 284
Wheels and tires, exchange 293
Widgets, iDrive 44
Widgets, instrument cluster, see Central dis-
play area 149
Width, vehicle 344
WiFi connections, see Owner’s Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Window, defrosting 250
Windows, powered 93
Windshield cleaning system, see Wiper sys-
tem 131
Windshield, climate comfort 272
Windshield, defrosting 250
Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 323
Windshield wipers, see Wiper system 131
Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle stor-
age 342
Winter tires 294
Winter tires, tread 292
Wiper blades, changing 327
Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 323
Wiper, fold-away position 133
Wipers, see Wiper system 131
Wiper system 131
Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wireless
charging tray 260
Wireless charging tray for smartphones 260
Wood parts, care 341
Wordmatch principle, see Entry comparison 45
Workshop, see Service notifications 155
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 327
X
xDrive 197
Seite 363
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
363
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.
YOUR DIGITAL VEHICLE INFORMATION.
The BMW Driver's Guide app explains the equipment of your
vehicle and offers further scopes and functions:
All information surrounding navigation,
entertainment and communication
Photorealistic animations for various
vehicle functions
Keyword search
360° view: Explore your vehicle
interactively inside and out
Smart Scan for Apple iPhone: Icon
and optical character recognition on the
buttons in the vehicle
Available in more than 30 languages
Can be used offline after download
01405A7D166 ue
*BL5A7D16600W*
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23
OwnersManuals2.com
